Operation Manual
The Steinberg Documentation Team: Cristina Bachmann, Martina Becker, Heiko Bischoff, Lillie Harris, Christina Kaboth, Insa Mingers, Matthias Obrecht, Sabine Pfeifer Translation: Ability InterBusiness Solutions (AIBS), Moon Chen, Jérémie Dal Santo, Rosa Freitag, GiEmme Solutions, Josep Llodra Grimalt, Vadim Kupriianov, Roland Münchow, Boris Rogowski, Sergey Tamarovsky This document provides improved access for people who are blind or have low vision.
Table of Contents 8 New features 13 13 13 14 15 16 16 Introduction Platform-independent documentation Usage of musical terms Documentation structure Typographical conventions Key commands How you can reach us 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 21 21 22 23 24 25 Dorico concepts Design philosophy and higher-level concepts Projects in Dorico Modes in Dorico Flows in Dorico Players in Dorico Instruments in Dorico Popovers Notes and rests in Dorico Rhythmic position Layouts in Dorico Page templates in Dorico Key commands
Table of Contents 638 641 642 643 645 649 649 651 652 652 Beaming notes together manually Beam placement relative to the staff Beam slants Centered beams Creating cross-staff beams/tremolos Beam corners Secondary beams Tuplets within beams Stemlets Fanned beams 653 653 Note and rest grouping Creating custom beat groupings for meters 655 656 Brackets and braces Changing bracket grouping according to ensemble type Secondary brackets Sub-sub-brackets 547 548 556 Flow headings Frames Music frame chains
Table of Contents 715 717 Linked dynamics VST Expression Maps for volume types 719 720 721 722 722 726 728 Figured bass Hiding/Showing figured bass in layouts Showing figured bass on rests Showing single brackets on figured bass Figured bass hold lines Positions of figured bass Appearance of figured bass 731 731 732 733 734 744 Fingering General placement conventions for fingering Changing fingerings to substitution fingerings Changing existing fingerings Changing the staff-relative placement of fing
Table of Contents 851 Deleting guitar pre-bends, pre-dives, and postbends 852 852 853 854 856 856 857 Guitar techniques Vibrato bar techniques Tapping Hammer-ons and pull-offs Showing notes as dead notes Changing vibrato bar dip intervals Changing the staff-relative placement of guitar techniques Deleting guitar techniques 858 859 860 861 861 862 Jazz articulations Jazz ornaments Positions of jazz articulations Changing the type/length of existing jazz articulations Changing the line style of smooth
Table of Contents 983 984 985 986 Hiding/Showing instrument change labels at the start of flows Player group labels Staff labels for percussion kits Staff labels on condensed staves 1053 1054 1055 1056 1059 Turning tuplets into normal notes Allowing/Disallowing tuplets to span barlines Tuplet beams Tuplet brackets Tuplet numbers/ratios 988 989 989 990 990 992 994 Staves Per-layout options for staves Extra staves Ossia staves System dividers System objects System indents 1062 1062 995 Divisi 996 99
New features NOTE Documentation for this new version is ongoing, and you may encounter some discrepancies between screenshots in the operation manual and how the application appears. We recommend that you also read the Version History for Dorico 4.3 for information about other new features not yet included in this documentation. You can download the Dorico 4.3 Version History from the Steinberg Download Assistant. New Features in Version 4.3.
New features New Features in Version 4.1.0 Color improvements ● A new Colors page has been added to Preferences. It includes new options that allow you to control colors used for various purposes in the music area, including the first eight voices on each staff, and to invert music/page colors, which by default shows white music on a black background. See Changing music area colors and Inverting colors. Printing/Exporting flows ● You can now specify the flows that you want to print or export.
New features settings for MIDI recording and quantization, Dorico SE can also detect slurs, tremolos, trills, pedal lines, tuplets, and grace notes. See MIDI recording. Insert mode scope ● Insert mode has been given additional functionality, allowing you to change the scope of its impact. For example, you can now set Insert mode to affect all players in flows and also change the duration of the current bar. See Insert mode scopes.
New features Note spelling ● A new automatic note respelling dialog has been added, allowing you to specify the notes you want to respell and apply general preferences to the selection. See Respell Notes Automatically dialog. ● You can now copy note spellings to other layouts, for example, if you originally respelled notes in a part layout but want those spellings to appear in the full score layout as well. See Copying note spellings to other layouts.
New features Project preview ● When you save projects, Dorico now generates preview images of the layout open in the music area. PNG files are used on the Open Recent page in the Hub. See Project Info dialog. Pedal line improvements ● You can now add retakes and pedal level changes to, and remove them from, multiple rhythmic positions simultaneously. See Adding retakes with the popover, Adding retakes with the panel, and Removing retakes and pedal level changes.
Introduction Thank you very much for downloading Dorico SE. We are delighted that you have chosen Steinberg's scoring application and hope that you will enjoy using it for years to come. Dorico is a next-generation application for producing beautiful sheet music, whether you are a composer, arranger, music engraver, publisher, instrumentalist, teacher, or student. Whether you want to print your music or share it in a digital format, Dorico is the most sophisticated program available.
Introduction Documentation structure American name British name Half note Minim Quarter note Crotchet Eighth note Quaver Sixteenth note Semiquaver Thirty-second note Demisemiquaver Sixty-fourth note Hemidemisemiquaver Hundred twenty-eighth note Semihemidemisemiquaver Two hundred fifty-sixth note Demisemihemidemisemiquaver Half-step Semitone Whole step Whole tone Staff Stave Bar/Measure Bar NOTE This documentation only uses “bar”.
Introduction Typographical conventions TIP Descriptive topics do not describe how to perform a task, and procedural topics do not explain what something is. To find general information about items or concepts, we recommend searching for them by name, such as “dynamics”. To find instructions for performing particular actions, we recommend including a relevant verb in your search, such as “moving”. Links at the bottom of topics guide you to further relevant content.
Introduction Key commands If bold text is separated by a greater-than symbol, this indicates either a sequence of different menus to open, or directions to follow for navigation inside the dialog named at the start of the sequence. EXAMPLE Choose Edit > Notations > Voices > Change Voice > [Voice]. You can change this option in Preferences > Note Input and Editing > Editing. File names and folder paths are shown in a different font. EXAMPLE example_file.
Dorico concepts Dorico is based on a number of key concepts that come from its design philosophy. We recommend familiarizing yourself with these concepts, as this will greatly enhance your ability to work efficiently with Dorico and to navigate more easily through this documentation. Design philosophy and higher-level concepts Deep design considerations are required to create a notation software like Dorico, which might be of particular interest to users familiar with scoring applications.
Dorico concepts Projects in Dorico score with as many instruments as possible condensed onto a smaller number of staves, a full score with each player’s music on separate staves, a custom score layout containing just the piano and vocal staves for choral rehearsals, and an instrumental part for each player that only contains the music belonging to them. This means it is not necessary to extract flows or parts as separate files: all this information can co-exist in the same Dorico project file.
Dorico concepts Flows in Dorico Play In Play mode, you can change how your music sounds in playback. You can do this by changing the playback template and assigning VST instruments, inputting automation, adjusting the mix, and changing the sounding duration of notes in playback without affecting their notated duration. Print In Print mode, you can print your layouts or export them as graphics files. When printing layouts, you can specify the paper size and other options, such as duplex or booklet printing.
Dorico concepts Instruments in Dorico or a soprano section player might represent the whole soprano section in a mixed voice choir. NOTE Section players can only hold one instrument. By using the concept of players, Dorico makes it much easier to handle, for example, instrument changes, divisi, and condensing music for multiple players onto a smaller number of staves. You can also group players together; for example, to separate off-stage players from on-stage players in a large-scale work.
Dorico concepts Popovers Popovers Popovers allow you to input different notations and perform tasks, such as transposing a selection of notes, using only your computer keyboard. They are temporary value fields that use text entries for different items and tasks, and there are specific popovers for different purposes.
Dorico concepts Rhythmic position 2. Implicit rests automatically fill the gaps between the notes you input. In combination with time signatures and Dorico’s understanding of their corresponding meters, this allows you to input only the notes you want with the duration required. It is not necessary to input rests between notes or input ties for notes that cross the half-bar, for example.
Dorico concepts Layouts in Dorico Similarly, you can easily push notes to later rhythmic positions or pull them in to earlier ones using Insert mode without the risk of them being incorrectly notated. It also means you can think of items existing in the music independently of notes, because items exist at a particular rhythmic position, rather than being attached to notes.
Dorico concepts Page templates in Dorico The default formatting of pages in layouts is determined by page templates. By default, full score layouts use a different page template set to part layouts; however, you can apply a different page template set to each layout. Deleting layouts does not delete any music from the project. RELATED LINKS Layouts on page 150 Players, layouts, and flows on page 104 Page formatting on page 505 Casting off on page 532 Condensing on page 540 Properties on page 557 Local vs.
Dorico concepts Key commands in Dorico project title. The running header on subsequent pages uses the flow title for the top flow on that page in scores, and the layout name in parts.
Dorico concepts Key commands in Dorico Changing the keyboard language on page 58 Changing the application language on page 48 26 Dorico SE 4.3.
User interface The user interface of Dorico SE is designed to keep all of the important tools at your fingertips. This chapter introduces you to key aspects of the user interface. Project window Dorico SE’s main project window allows you to access all the options and tools you need to work on a project. You can open multiple project windows for the same project or for different projects.
User interface Project window In Print mode, the print preview area shows a preview of how your project will appear when printed onto paper or exported into a graphics file format. 4 Zones Zones on the left, right, and lower edges of the project window contain panels that provide the notes, notations, and functions that you need to create and edit your music. Different panels are available in each zone according to the mode.
User interface Project window Allows you quick access to the main transport functions, including Play, Record, and Click. 6 Show Transport Bar Hides/Shows the Transport window, which contains playback and MIDI recording functions. 7 Undo Allows you to undo previous actions. 8 Redo Allows you to restore previous actions that were undone using Undo.
User interface Project window Mini transport The mini transport on the right of the toolbar provides quick access to the main transport functions of Dorico SE. Activate Project Activates/Deactivates playback in the project. When playback is deactivated, transport and playback functions are disabled.
User interface Project window ● You can change the tempo mode by clicking the beat unit. ● You can change the metronome mark value used in fixed tempo mode by clicking the number to show a slider, then dragging the slider to the right/left. Fixed Tempo Mode Follow Tempo Mode TIP The Transport window contains additional transport functions.
User interface Project window RELATED LINKS Preferences dialog on page 52 Project start area The project start area is displayed in the middle of the project window in Setup mode and Write mode when you set up a new empty project. When you add at least one player, the view changes into the music area. The project start area shows cards that allow you to add players to the project.
User interface Project window Music area showing a new choir piece in page view The music area displays layouts in either galley view or page view. The tab bar above the music area allows you to open multiple layouts in the project simultaneously and switch between them. The scroll bars to the right and to the bottom of the music area allow you to scroll within the layout. You can use the layout selector in the toolbar to show other layouts in the music area.
User interface Project window Print preview area The print preview area is the central part of the project window in Print mode that shows a preview of what will be printed or exported as a graphic. Print preview area displaying a score set to print 2-up The print preview area shows a preview of the first layout selected in the Layouts panel. You can scroll through the pages that are shown, but you cannot edit layouts. If you want to make changes, you must switch to Setup or Write mode.
User interface Project window Zones and panels Zones on the left, right, and lower edges of the project window contain panels that provide the notes, notations, and functions that you need to set up, write, edit, and format your music. Different panels are available in each zone according to the mode. You can hide/show each zone individually or all of them at the same time. 1 Left zone. In Write mode, this contains the Notes panel. 2 Right zone.
User interface Project window Hiding/Showing zones on page 41 Project window in Setup mode on page 92 Project window in Write mode on page 171 Project window in Play mode on page 437 Project window in Print mode on page 483 Players panel on page 93 Layouts panel (Setup mode) on page 100 Flows panel on page 103 Notes panel on page 176 Right zone (Write mode) on page 180 Lower zone (Write mode) on page 181 Properties panel on page 557 Track Inspector on page 439 Mixer panel on page 561 Layouts panel (Print mo
User interface Project window 3 ● The bar/range of bars of the current selection ● Summary of the selection; for example, the pitch and voice of a single selected note, or the implied chord of multiple selected notes Disclosure arrow Allows you to show/hide the lower zone in Setup mode and Write mode. 4 Selection tools Allow you to switch between using the Marquee Tool and the Hand Tool in Write mode.
User interface Project window TIP ● To use the other tool briefly without selecting it, you can press Shift in addition to using the mouse. ● You can change the default selection tool for all future projects on the Note Input and Editing page in Preferences.
User interface Project window Page arrangements for page view You can change the way pages are arranged for display in the music area. Spreads Horizontally Displays pages in pairs as two-page spreads, with each pair laid out from left to right in a row. Spreads Vertically Displays pages in pairs as two-page spreads, with each pair laid out from top to bottom in a column. Single Pages Horizontally Displays individual pages laid out from left to right.
User interface Workspace setup Disclosure arrows Disclosure arrows indicate that objects, areas, and menus can be expanded/collapsed, either vertically or horizontally. In Dorico SE, disclosure arrows are commonly used to expand/collapse sections in panels and cards, such as player cards in the Players panel in Setup mode.
User interface Workspace setup RESULT The selected layout is opened in the music area. It replaces the layout previously open in the tab. TIP You can assign a key command for Center Selection on the Key Commands page in Preferences. This command automatically brings the selection into view. RELATED LINKS Layouts on page 150 Implicit vs.
User interface Workspace setup 4. ● Press Ctrl/Cmd-8 . ● Click the disclosure arrow at the bottom of the main window. ● Choose Window > Show Lower Zone. Hide/Show all zones in any of the following ways: ● Press Ctrl/Cmd-0 . ● In the toolbar, click Hide/Restore Zones ● Choose Window > Hide/Restore Zones. . RESULT The corresponding zones are hidden/shown. In the menu, no tick beside the corresponding zone indicates it is hidden, and a tick indicates it is shown.
User interface Workspace setup 2. Select a layout to open in the new tab in any of the following ways: ● Click one of the icons. ● In the list at the bottom, select a layout. ● In the toolbar, click the layout selector and select a layout. RESULT The layout that you choose opens in the active tab. TIP You can also switch between different layouts within the same tab.
User interface Workspace setup ● Right-click the single tab you want to close and choose Close Tab from the context menu. ● Right-click the tab you do not want to close and choose Close Other Tabs from the context menu. NOTE You cannot close the last tab in a window. If only one tab is open and you no longer want to see the tabs, deactivate Show Tabs in the main toolbar. The tab is no longer displayed, but the corresponding layout is still shown.
User interface Workspace setup Showing multiple tabs in the same project window You can split your project window to display two tabs at the same time. The split can be either vertical or horizontal, allowing you to display different layouts either side by side or above one another. PROCEDURE 1. Select the tab of the layout that you want to move to a new tab group. 2. Split the view in one of the following ways: ● To show layouts side by side, choose Window > Vertical Split.
User interface Workspace setup Opening multiple project windows You can open multiple project windows for the same project; for example, if you want to work on multiple layouts at the same time. You can also show a different mode of the same project in each window, such as having one window show Write mode and another show Play mode. During playback, all windows that belong to the same project show the playhead and move the view to follow the music.
User interface Workspace setup Switching to galley/page view You can switch between different view types in the music area in Setup mode and Write mode. For example, if a flute player in your project is doubling piccolo, you can switch to galley view to see the piccolo staff in addition to the flute staff. PROCEDURE 1. 2. Switch to galley or page view in any of the following ways: ● To switch to galley view, press Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-2 . ● To switch to page view, press Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-1 .
User interface Workspace setup View types on page 38 Status bar on page 36 Switching between layouts on page 40 Page arrangements for page view on page 39 Changing the staff spacing in galley view on page 529 Per-layout vertical spacing options on page 527 Layout Options dialog on page 571 Preferences dialog on page 52 Key Commands page in the Preferences dialog on page 54 Moving the view in the music area on page 404 Hiding/Showing guide bar numbers on page 628 Renaming players on page 158 Changing the ap
User interface Color setup Color setup Dorico SE allows you to change the colors used in different contexts, including for project windows and pages in each type of layout. RELATED LINKS Annotations on page 504 Hiding/Showing voice colors on page 1082 Hiding/Showing colors for notes out of range on page 795 Changing the window color theme You can change the color theme used throughout Dorico SE; for example, you might switch to the light theme if you prefer to read dark text on a light background.
User interface Color setup PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-, to open Preferences. 2. In the category list, click Colors. 3. In the Page Colors section, change the page color for Full score layouts, Part layouts, and/or Custom score layouts in any of the following ways: 4. ● Click the corresponding color preview and select a color in the dialog that opens. ● Enter a color code into the corresponding value field. Click Apply, then Close.
User interface Color setup TIP ● The background color set for Write mode is also used in Setup mode. ● You can reset background colors back to the default factory settings by clicking Reset . Changing music area colors You can change the colors used for various purposes in the music area, including the first eight voice colors on each staff and the color of selected items. For example, if you find specific color combinations easier to read than others. PROCEDURE 1.
User interface Preferences dialog Inverting colors You can invert the colors used for music and pages in Dorico SE, which by default shows white music on black pages. You can then customize the inverted page color; for example, to show white music on a blue background. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-, to open Preferences. 2. In the category list, click Colors. 3. In the Page Colors section, activate Invert colors for music (white on black). 4.
User interface Preferences dialog The Preferences dialog contains the following: 1 Search categories field Allows you to filter categories and section titles according to your entry. TIP You can set the focus to the Search categories field by pressing Ctrl/Cmd-L . You can set the focus away by pressing Tab . 2 Category list Contains the categories of options that you can view and change in the dialog.
User interface Key Commands page in the Preferences dialog 6 ● Search pages field: Allows you to enter the term you want to search for. You can set the focus to the Search pages field by pressing Ctrl/Cmd-F . ● Previous match: Allows you to navigate to the previous match on the page. You can also navigate to the previous match by pressing Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-G . ● Next match: Allows you to navigate to the next match on the page. You can also navigate to the next match by pressing Ctrl/Cmd-G .
User interface Key Commands page in the Preferences dialog Allows you to search for functions to view, change, or add key commands. Because there are multiple levels of disclosure arrows before you reach many functions, this is often the quickest way to find what you are looking for. 2 Functions Displays the functions that can be assigned key commands. The list can be filtered using the Search field. Disclosure arrows beside options indicate that further options are available when the option is expanded.
User interface Key Commands page in the Preferences dialog Interactive Dorico key commands map The interactive Dorico Key Commands map shows a virtual computer keyboard, with keys that have been assigned key commands highlighted in different colors according to the modifier keys they contain. All key commands for the selected keyboard language layout are listed below, divided into global and mode-specific groups.
User interface Key Commands page in the Preferences dialog Searching for the key commands of functions You can search for key commands that are assigned to functions or menu items in Dorico SE. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-, to open Preferences. 2. In the category list, click Key Commands. 3. Enter the name of a function in the Search field. The entries that are listed below are filtered according to the words that you enter. 4.
User interface Key Commands page in the Preferences dialog Assigning MIDI commands You can assign specific keys or buttons on your MIDI keyboard to perform functions and access menu items. For example, if you want to navigate using MIDI keys during chord symbol input. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-, to open Preferences. 2. In the category list, click Key Commands. 3. Select the menu item or function to which you want to assign MIDI commands.
User interface Jump bar 3. Search for the name of a function and select it. 4. In the Key Commands section, click Remove Key Command. 5. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The key command is removed from the selected function. RELATED LINKS Searching for the key commands of functions on page 57 Removing jump bar aliases on page 62 Resetting key commands You can reset all the key commands in your project to their defaults. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-, to open Preferences. 2.
User interface Jump bar ● You can switch the jump bar to Commands mode by pressing Alt-C (Windows) or Ctrl-1 (macOS) . When you start entering text into the jump bar in Commands mode, a menu appears that shows valid commands containing the letters/words you enter. If you show the jump bar in Commands mode after performing a command, your previous entry is shown with its text selected. You can press Down Arrow to show a list of up to five commands that you perform most frequently.
User interface Jump bar Notations input on page 245 Layout Options dialog on page 571 Going to locations with the jump bar You can use the jump bar to go to bars, rehearsal marks, pages, and flows in Setup, Write, and Play modes. PROCEDURE 1. Press J to show the jump bar. 2. Optional: Press Alt-G (Windows) or Ctrl-2 (macOS) to switch to Go To mode. 3. Enter the appropriate entry for the location to which you want to go. For example, enter f3b20 to go to bar 20 in flow 3. 4. Press Return .
User interface Jump bar TIP To ensure the command is entered correctly, select it from the menu of valid commands by pressing Up Arrow / Down Arrow . 4. Immediately after the command, enter = followed by the characters you want to use as the jump bar alias. For example, to assign the jump bar alias rr to the Remove Rests command, enter Remove Rests=rr. 5. Do one of the following: ● To perform the command and assign the jump bar alias, press Return .
Project and file handling In addition to opening and importing/exporting projects and other file formats, project and file handling also includes auto-save and project backups. RELATED LINKS Starting new projects on page 65 Opening projects/files on page 66 File import and export on page 72 Auto-save on page 88 Project backups on page 90 Hub The Hub allows you to access recent projects, start new projects, and keep up-to-date with learning materials including tutorials, videos, and blog updates.
Project and file handling Hub ● List view When recent projects are shown in the grid view, you can click the menu button each project to access the following options: for ● Remove from Recent Projects: Removes the project from the Recent Projects page. ● Open Enclosing Folder: Opens the File Explorer/macOS Finder and shows the folder where the project is saved. Create New Allows you to start new projects from project templates or choose an empty project.
Project and file handling Starting new projects You can find more tutorial videos and information about new features on the Dorico YouTube channel. ● Forum: Links you to the Steinberg user forum. ● Manual: Links you to the online documentation. A PDF version is also available on steinberg.help. ● Dorico Blog: Displays recent entries in the Dorico blog. Clicking a blog entry opens it in a web browser.
Project and file handling Opening projects/files 6. Create a new project in any of the following ways: ● Click Create project. ● Double-click the project template. RESULT A new project is created using the selected project template. TIP ● You can start a new, empty project at any time by pressing Ctrl/Cmd-N or choosing File > New. ● You can also start a new project from a project template by choosing File > New From Project Template > [Project template category] > [Project template].
Project and file handling Projects from different versions of Dorico NOTE ● You can also import MusicXML and MIDI files as new flows in existing projects rather than opening them as separate projects. ● In Dorico SE, the maximum number of players you can have in a single project is two. If you open a project that contains more than two players, it opens in read-only mode.
Project and file handling Missing Fonts dialog RELATED LINKS Preferences dialog on page 52 Missing Fonts dialog The Missing Fonts dialog appears when you open a project that contains a font that you do not have installed on your computer. It allows you to select replacement fonts that are installed on your computer as substitutes.
Project and file handling Project Info dialog Allows you to select any of the available styles within the corresponding replacement font families. You can select replacement font styles by double-clicking entries, then either entering the font style you want or clicking the arrow and selecting a font style from the menu. Once selected, the styles are displayed in the corresponding entry. 6 Fonts Contains a list of all the available fonts installed on your computer.
Project and file handling Project Info dialog The Project Info dialog comprises the following: 1 Flows list Contains all the flows in the project, with a separate entry for the project as a whole at the top. You can select individual or multiple flows in the flows list. NOTE The flows list uses the names of flows as shown in the Flows panel in Setup mode, which can be different to their entry in the Title field if you have changed their flow title.
Project and file handling Project Info dialog 2 ● Move Up project. : Moves the selected flows up the flows list, which changes their order in the ● Delete Flow : Deletes the selected flows. Information fields Allow you to enter information about the currently selected flows or the whole project in the corresponding field, such as Composer and Lyricist. If you have selected multiple flows with different entries in the same fields, such as flows with different composers, those fields display Mixed.
Project and file handling Project templates Project templates Project templates allow you to start new projects that already contain a particular set of players and project library settings. For example, full score layouts in orchestral project templates have larger page sizes than in chamber ensemble project templates. Dorico SE provides the following project template categories: Band Ensembles containing mostly woodwind and brass instruments, such as brass band or pit band.
Project and file handling File import and export Importing flows You can import individual flows into existing projects; for example, if you want to bring together multiple existing pieces into one project for publishing, or if you have an empty project file with your preferred settings saved and want to reuse those settings. PROCEDURE 1. Choose File > Import > Flows to open the File Explorer/macOS Finder. 2. Locate and select the project files of the flows you want to import. 3.
Project and file handling File import and export The Flow Import Options dialog comprises the following: 1 Player handling Allows you to determine how imported flows are assigned to players. 2 ● Create All New Players adds separate players for each imported flow. ● Merge with Existing Players Where Possible merges players from imported flows with any existing compatible players in the project. Import flows Contains a list of all the flows in the selected project.
Project and file handling File import and export 4. Activate/Deactivate Export layouts as separate files. 5. Optional: If you activated Export layouts as separate files, activate the checkbox for each layout you want to export in the Select layouts to export list. You can also click Select All or Select None at the bottom of the list. 6. Click Choose Folder beside the Export to field to open the File Explorer/macOS Finder. 7. Locate and select the destination folder you want. 8.
Project and file handling File import and export 3 Export layouts as separate files Allows you to export each layout in the project as a separate file instead of as a single file. 4 Select layouts to export Contains a list of all the layouts in the project. Layouts are included in the export when their checkbox is activated. Only available if you have activated Export layouts as separate files. 5 Selection options Allow you to select/deselect all the flows/layouts in the corresponding list.
Project and file handling File import and export ● If you chose Merge with Existing Players Where Possible, any players that the imported MusicXML files and existing project have in common are merged; for example, if you imported a MusicXML file containing one piano into a project containing a piano and viola, the imported MusicXML file is added to the existing piano player. TIP You can also open MusicXML files directly if you want them to be separate projects rather than new flows in existing projects.
Project and file handling File import and export Exporting MusicXML files You can export flows and layouts as separate MusicXML files; for example, if you want to export just the soloist’s layout containing the first flow. PROCEDURE 1. Choose File > Export > MusicXML to open the Export MusicXML dialog. 2. Choose one of the following file format options: 3. ● Export compressed XML (.mxl) ● Export uncompressed XML (.
Project and file handling File import and export The Export MusicXML dialog contains the following options and lists: 1 File format options Allows you to choose the MusicXML file format you want to export. Compressed MusicXML files contain the same information as uncompressed MusicXML files but have a smaller file size. 2 Select flows to export Contains a list of all the flows in the project. Flows are included in the export when their checkbox is activated.
Project and file handling File import and export TIP You can also open MIDI files directly if you want them to be separate projects, rather than new flows in existing projects.
Project and file handling File import and export Fill gaps Allows you to determine whether Dorico SE fills in gaps between short notes. If you are importing already precisely quantized music, we recommend that you deactivate Fill gaps to ensure that note and rest durations are notated exactly as quantized. Detect grace notes Allows you to determine whether Dorico SE interprets grace notes. When deactivated, Dorico SE turns grace notes into normal notes.
Project and file handling File import and export The Export MIDI dialog comprises the following: 1 Select flows to export Contains a list of all the flows in the project. Flows are included in the export when their checkbox is activated. 2 Selection options Allow you to select/deselect all the flows in the project. For example, you can deselect all flows and then activate the checkbox of a single flow you want to export.
Project and file handling File import and export ● Markers ● System-attached Text 7. Optional: If you chose System Text for Markers as, activate/deactivate Show border around system-attached text markers. 8. Click OK to import the tempo track and close the dialog. RESULT The tempo track is imported into the selected flow. If you selected New Flow in the Import into flow list, a new flow is added to the project.
Project and file handling File import and export ● Timecode display offset sets the initial timecode position at the start of the flow. ● Tempo changes replaces all immediate and gradual tempo changes in the flow with the tempo changes from the MIDI file. ● Time signatures replaces all time signatures in the flow with time signatures from the MIDI file. ● Markers as adds any markers from the MIDI file to the flow as either Markers or System-attached Text.
Project and file handling File import and export The Export Tempo Track dialog comprises the following: 1 Select flows to export Contains a list of all the flows in the project. Flows are included in the export when their checkbox is activated. 2 Selection options Allow you to select/deselect all the flows in the project. For example, you can deselect all flows and then activate the checkbox of a single flow you want to export.
Project and file handling File import and export You can also click Select All or Select None at the bottom of the list. 4. Activate/Deactivate Export players as separate files. 5. Optional: If you activated Export players as separate files, activate the checkbox for each player you want to export in the Select players to export list. You can also click Select All or Select None at the bottom of the list. 6. Click Choose Folder 7. Locate and select the destination folder you want. 8.
Project and file handling File import and export The Export Audio dialog contains the following options and lists: 1 Export each selected flow as a separate file Allows you to export each flow in the project as a separate audio file instead of as a single audio file. 2 Select flows to export Contains a list of all the flows in the project. Flows are included in the export when their checkbox is activated.
Project and file handling Auto-save Contains the following options that allow you to control the audio file format and export: ● File format: Allows you to export audio as an MP3 (.mp3), FLAC (.flac) or WAV (.wav) file. ● Bit depth: Allows you to export FLAC files as 16-bit or 24-bit, and WAV files as 16-bit, 24-bit, or 32-bit. ● Broadcast WAVE: Allows you to export audio in Broadcast WAVE format, which includes start timecodes and markers.
Project and file handling Auto-save Recover Auto-saved Projects dialog The Recover Auto-saved Projects dialog allows you to recover individual auto-saved projects; for example, if you accidentally closed a project without saving, or if Dorico SE or your computer crashed. The Recover Auto-saved Projects dialog contains the following: Auto-saved projects list Contains all the auto-saved projects that are available for recovery. Displays the file name of each project and the date and time of the auto-save.
Project and file handling Project backups AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can save auto-saved projects permanently in any folder location and with new file names if required. Changing the auto-save frequency You can change how frequently Dorico SE auto-saves projects. By default, the auto-save interval is five minutes for the currently active project. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-, to open Preferences. 2. In the category list, click General. 3.
Project and file handling Read-only mode Changing the backup location You can change the folder that Dorico SE uses to store project backups. By default, Dorico SE uses the Backup Projects folder inside your Dorico Projects folder, whose default location is in the Documents folder for your user account. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-, to open Preferences. 2. In the category list, click General. 3.
Setup mode Setup mode allows you to set up the fundamental elements of the project: instruments and the players that hold them, flows, layouts, and videos. You can also determine how they interact with each other; for example, by changing the players assigned to layouts. You can view music in the music area and switch between viewing other tabs and layouts, but you cannot select or interact with anything in the music area in Setup mode.
Setup mode Project window in Setup mode Shows the flows in your project, ordered left to right. By default, flows contain all players and are assigned to all layouts. The three panels work together to allow you to control how and where the players, layouts, and flows in your project are used. When you select an item in one of the panels, that panel and the selected item are highlighted in a different color and checkboxes appear in cards in the other panels.
Setup mode Project window in Setup mode The order in which players are listed in the Players panel sets the default player order used in all layouts. You can also set a custom player order in each layout independently. In the Players panel, each player is shown as a card that contains the instruments held by that player. Each player card shows the following: 1 Disclosure arrow Expands/Collapses the player card.
Setup mode Project window in Setup mode Add Group Adds a player group to your project. If no players were selected, an empty player group is added. If existing players were selected, they are grouped together. Sort Players Sorts all players in the Players panel according to the current player sorting setting.
Setup mode Project window in Setup mode ● In the Players panel, select a player and press Shift-I . ● In the Players panel, select a player, then click Player Settings in the action bar and choose Add Instrument to Player. You can also right-click players and choose this option from the context menu. The instrument picker contains the following sections and options: 1 Search field Allows you to enter the instrument you are searching for directly.
Setup mode Project window in Setup mode You can cycle forwards through the instrument picker by pressing Tab , which navigates in the following order: Search field, Instrument, Instrument type, Instrument family. You can also cycle backwards by pressing Shift-Tab , which navigates in the opposite direction. An enclosure line shows which instrument family or instrument is selected when using the keyboard to navigate.
Setup mode Project window in Setup mode Build tab The Build tab contains the following: 1 Search field Allows you to specify the instruments you want to include in the ensemble in the following ways: ● Enter the name of an existing ensemble, such as String Section. ● Enter the names or abbreviations of instruments, with each name/abbreviation separated by a comma. You can prefix instruments with a number followed by a space.
Setup mode Project window in Setup mode Adds the players in the custom ensemble to the project. Choose tab The Choose tab contains the following: 1 Search field Allows you to enter the ensemble you are searching for directly. 2 Ensemble category column Contains ensemble categories to help you focus your ensemble search. 3 Ensemble column Contains the ensembles available in the selected instrument family. 4 Ensemble contents column Displays the instruments included in the selected ensemble.
Setup mode Project window in Setup mode Save Custom Ensemble dialog The Save Custom Ensemble dialog allows you to name and save custom ensembles for reuse in future projects. ● You can open the Save Custom Ensemble dialog in Setup mode from inside the ensemble picker by building a custom ensemble and clicking Save. The Save Custom Ensemble dialog contains the following options: Category Allows you to select an ensemble category for the custom ensemble.
Setup mode Project window in Setup mode In the Layouts panel, each layout is shown as a card. Each layout card shows the following: 1 Disclosure arrow Expands/Collapses the layout card. 2 Layout type Shows the type of layout from the following options: 3 ● Full score layout ● Instrumental part layout ● Custom score layout Layout name Shows the name of the layout.
Setup mode Project window in Setup mode Shows the size and orientation of the layout as set on the Page Setup page in Layout Options. 5 Space size Shows the space size between two staff lines in points, as set on the Page Setup page in Layout Options. This indicates the size of staves in the layout. 6 Layout number Allows you to set a unique number for the layout that can be used as part of its file name when exported as a graphic.
Setup mode Project window in Setup mode You can also access layout settings by right-clicking layouts. Delete Layout Deletes selected layouts from the project.
Setup mode Players, layouts, and flows Shows the number of the flow. The number increments with each new flow that you create or import. The number also indicates the position of the flow in a layout. The Flows panel contains the following options: Add Flow Adds a new flow to your project. By default, every new flow is included in all layouts, and every player is added to the new flow. Delete Flow Deletes the selected flows from the project.
Setup mode Players, layouts, and flows A piano player selected in the Players panel with connected flows and layouts highlighted in the Flows and Layouts panels EXAMPLE A work for string quartet and choir is divided into three movements. The string quartet is tacet for the third movement, which the choir sings a cappella.
Setup mode Players Players In Dorico SE, a player can represent an individual musician or multiple musicians in the same section. Players hold instruments, so you must add at least one player to your project before you can add instruments. In Dorico SE, there are the following types of players: Single player Represents an individual person who can play one or more instruments. For example, a clarinettist who doubles on alto saxophone or a percussionist who plays bass drum, clash cymbals, and triangle.
Setup mode Players Adding players You can add both single and section players to your project. Single players can hold multiple instruments, while section players can only hold one instrument. NOTE In Dorico SE, the maximum number of players you can have in a single project is two. PROCEDURE 1. In Setup mode, add an empty-handed player and open the instrument picker in any of the following ways: ● To add a single player, press Shift-P . ● To add a section player, press Shift-Alt/Opt-P .
Setup mode Players Instrument picker on page 95 Players, layouts, and flows on page 104 Player, layout, and instrument names on page 157 Staff labels on page 977 Showing instrument/player names in staff labels on page 980 Instrument numbering on page 114 Designating players as soloists on page 110 Changing the default player order on page 109 Adding instruments to players on page 119 Adding ensembles on page 112 Renaming players on page 158 Changing instrument names on page 159 Layouts on page 150 Project s
Setup mode Players Changing the default player order You can change the default order in which players’ staves appear in all layouts; for example, if your project requires an unconventional instrument order. PROCEDURE 1. In Setup mode, in the Players panel, select the players whose default position you want to change. 2. Click and drag the selected players upwards/downwards. An insertion line indicates where the players will be positioned. RESULT The default player order is changed.
Setup mode Players 6. Change its position relative to other players in one of the following ways: ● Click Move up. ● Click Move down. 7. Optional: Repeat steps 5 to 6 for other players in the selected layout whose position you want to change. 8. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The player order in the selected layout is changed. This overrides the default player order.
Setup mode Ensembles Staff labels on page 977 Staff label contents on page 980 Deleting players You can delete players from your project, which also deletes all instruments held by those players. IMPORTANT Deleting instruments permanently deletes any music that you have input on their staves. PROCEDURE 1. In Setup mode, in the Players panel, select the players that you want to delete. 2. Delete the selected players in any of the following ways: 3. ● Press Backspace or Delete .
Setup mode Ensembles RELATED LINKS Players on page 106 Ensemble picker on page 97 Save Custom Ensemble dialog on page 100 Project templates on page 72 Adding ensembles You can add multiple players simultaneously by adding ensembles, such as a complete string section or four-part choir. You can select existing ensembles and build new ones. NOTE In Dorico SE, the maximum number of players you can have in a single project is two. Only ensembles containing one or two players are available. PROCEDURE 1.
Setup mode Instruments Building and saving custom ensembles You can build custom ensembles in the ensemble picker and save them for reuse in future projects; for example, if you frequently write music for an ensemble with unusual instrumentation. PROCEDURE 1. In Setup mode, open the ensemble picker in any of the following ways: ● Press Shift-E . ● In the Players panel, click Add Ensemble . ● In an empty project, click Add Ensemble in the project start area. 2.
Setup mode Instruments This means that before you can add instruments to a project, you must first add players or ensembles, which may in turn also be assigned to groups if needed. If you add ensembles, the appropriate instruments for the ensemble are automatically added to the players. Each instrument automatically gets its own staff, but when instrument changes are allowed, the music for multiple instruments held by the same single player can appear on the same staff as long as no notes overlap.
Setup mode Instruments One violin with no number Adding a second violin automatically generates numbers for both violins Instrument numbering applies to individual instruments, rather than players.
Setup mode Instruments Instrument changes Instruments changes are when a player holding multiple instruments switches from playing one instrument to a different instrument. They are usually indicated in full scores and parts with text indications both after the last note before the change and at the first note after the change.
Setup mode Instruments and dragging across multiple layouts, Shift -clicking adjacent layouts, and Ctrl/Cmd -clicking individual layouts. 3. In the category list, click Players. 4. In the Instrument Changes section, activate/deactivate Allow instrument changes. 5. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT Instrument changes are allowed in the selected layouts when Allow instrument changes is activated, and disallowed when it is deactivated.
Setup mode Instruments 6. 7. Optional: If you chose Custom, enter the text you want in the following fields, individually or together: ● Custom prefix ● Custom suffix Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The length of instrument names and prefixes/suffixes in all instrument change labels in the selected layouts is changed.
Setup mode Instruments Adding instruments to players You can add instruments to both single and section players. Single players can hold multiple instruments, while section players can only hold one instrument. PREREQUISITE You have added at least one player. PROCEDURE 1. In Setup mode, in the Players panel, select the player to which you want to add instruments. NOTE 2. ● You can only add instruments to one player at a time.
Setup mode Instruments Adding empty percussion kits to players You can add empty percussion kits to players, to which you can then add unpitched percussion instruments. NOTE You cannot add percussion kits to section players that are already holding one instrument. PREREQUISITE You have added at least one player. PROCEDURE 1. 2.
Setup mode Instruments NOTE If the player was already holding one or more kit instruments, all individual instruments and any other kits are combined into the first kit. Changing instruments You can change the type of instruments without affecting any music already entered onto their staves; for example, if your Clarinet part is very low and you want to change it to a Bass Clarinet, or you want to change the tuning of a guitar.
Setup mode Instruments Moving instruments You can move individual instruments without affecting any music already input for those instruments. You can move instruments between players or to a different position in the instrument list for a single player; for example, if you want to change the order of staves in the score. PREREQUISITE You have added the players to which you want to move instruments. PROCEDURE 1.
Setup mode Instruments RELATED LINKS Players panel on page 93 Deleting players on page 111 Fretted instrument tuning Fretted instruments can have different numbers of strings and frets. In order to display tablature for fretted instruments in Dorico SE, you must specify information about the tuning of fretted instruments.
Setup mode Instruments The Edit Strings and Tuning dialog comprises the following: 1 Instrument Displays the name of the selected fretted instrument. 2 Compatible preset tunings Allows you to select preset fretted instrument tunings with the same number of strings as the selected fretted instrument. If your changes in the dialog match a preset tuning, it is automatically selected. 3 String editor Allows you to select and edit individual or all strings of the fretted instrument.
Setup mode Instruments 1 for a half-step and 2 for a whole step, with each step separated by a comma. For example, enter 2,2,1,2,2,2,1 to set the pattern for a major scale. 6 Action bar Contains options that allow you to change the number and arrangement of strings. 7 ● Add String : Adds a new string below the lowest currently selected string. The new string is a duplicate of the lowest currently selected string. ● Add String at Top : Adds a new string at the top of the fretboard.
Setup mode Instruments 3. Select the string whose open pitch you want to change. 4. Change the Open pitch value; for example, to G2. 5. Optional: Repeat steps 3 and 4 to change the open pitch of other strings. 6. Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. RESULT The open pitches of the selected strings are changed. This affects the tuning of the instrument and the pitch of all fret positions on those strings. The new tuning becomes available for chord diagrams.
Setup mode Instruments RESULT The tuning of the selected fretted instrument is exported and saved as a .doricotuning library file. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can import the library file into other projects to reuse the fretted instrument tuning. Capos Capos are devices that performers clamp onto the necks of fretted instruments to depress strings at a single fret position.
Setup mode Instruments Capo chord The chord that the fretted instrument must play in order to produce the desired main chord, according to the fret position of the capo. For example, if a guitarist with a capo on the second fret plays Gm7, the chord that sounds is Am7. Capo chords appear in italics when shown alongside main chords. RELATED LINKS Concert vs.
Setup mode Instruments EXAMPLE No capo Capo added to the third fret RELATED LINKS Players panel on page 93 Edit Strings and Tuning dialog on page 123 Fretboard panel on page 184 Changing fretted instrument transpositions on page 130 Defining capos for chord symbols/diagrams on page 132 Defining capos for used chord diagrams grids on page 134 Capo Definition dialog The Capo Definition dialog allows you to add full and partial capos to fretted instruments.
Setup mode Instruments Removing capos from fretted instruments You can remove capos from individual fretted instruments. This affects the pitches shown on tablature for the corresponding instruments. PROCEDURE 1. In Setup mode, in the Players panel, expand the card of the player holding the fretted instrument whose capo you want to remove. 2. In the instrument label, click the instrument menu open the Edit Strings and Tuning dialog. 3.
Setup mode Instruments Using fretted instrument transpositions You can show transposed pitches on notation staves and in main chord symbols, according to the corresponding fretted instrument’s transposition, in each layout independently and for each player holding at least one fretted instrument independently.
Setup mode Instruments Players on page 106 Capo vs. main chords on page 127 Chord symbols on page 661 Hiding/Showing notation staves and tablature on page 997 Hiding/Showing capo chord symbols on page 132 Defining capos for chord symbols/diagrams You can define capos for chord symbols and chord diagrams on a per-player basis. This affects chord diagram shapes and the transposition of capo chord symbols.
Setup mode Instruments ● To show capo chords above main chords, choose Chord Symbols > Show Capo Chord Symbol Above Main. ● To show capo chords below main chords, choose Chord Symbols > Show Capo Chord Symbol Below Main. TIP You can also right-click players and choose these options from the context menu. RESULT Main and/or capo chords are shown in chord symbols, according to the instrument staves and layouts set to show chord symbols for the selected player.
Setup mode Instruments PROCEDURE 1. Select the chord symbols whose shown chords you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Show only in the Chord Symbols group. 3. Choose one of the following options: ● Main Chord ● Capo Chord RESULT The selected chord symbols show only main or capo chords. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
Setup mode Instruments RELATED LINKS Hiding/Showing used chord diagrams grids on page 679 Capo vs. main chords on page 127 Adding capos to fretted instruments on page 128 Inputting chord symbols on page 290 Hiding/Showing capo chord symbols in used chord diagrams grids You can show only main chords, only capo chords, or both in used chord symbol grids in each layout independently. For example, if you want to show both in the guitar part layout but only main chords in the vocal part layout.
Setup mode Instruments NOTE Percussion kit instrument labels are green in the Players panel in Setup mode. 1 Name Allows you to enter or change the full name for the percussion kit. This is used in Full staff labels for percussion kits that use the five-line staff presentation type. 2 Short name Allows you to enter or change the abbreviated name for the percussion kit. This is used in Abbreviated staff labels for percussion kits that use the five-line staff presentation type.
Setup mode Instruments 5 Editor Displays the current arrangement of instruments in the selected percussion kit presentation type. You can change the order of instruments and the layout of lines and spaces in the grid presentation type by using the controls. 6 Controls Allows you to change the order and stem direction of instruments in the selected percussion kit presentation type. It also allows you to add slash voices to the kit.
Setup mode Instruments Adding instruments to percussion kits You can add new instruments to percussion kits within the Edit Percussion Kit dialog. PROCEDURE 1. In Setup mode, in the Players panel, expand the card of the player holding the kit to which you want to add instruments. 2. In the kit instrument label, click the instrument menu open the Edit Percussion Kit dialog. 3. Click Add New Instrument 4. Select the percussion instrument you want in the instrument picker. 5.
Setup mode Instruments Defining percussion kits as drum sets You can define individual percussion kits as drum sets. Drum sets use a different voicing than percussion kits when using the five-line staff presentation. PROCEDURE 1. In Setup mode, in the Players panel, expand the card of the player holding the kit you want to define as a drum set. 2. In the kit instrument label, click the instrument menu open the Edit Percussion Kit dialog. 3. Activate Drum set in the top right of the dialog. 4.
Setup mode Instruments 6. Click Add . RESULT A group is created containing the selected instruments. The group is given a default name that you can change. RELATED LINKS Players panel on page 93 Percussion kit presentation types on page 1073 Renaming groups in grid presentation percussion kits Group names are shown as instrument labels. You can change the names of groups in percussion kits using the grid presentation type. PROCEDURE 1.
Setup mode Instruments EXAMPLE Ungrouped grid presentation percussion kit Grid presentation percussion kit with wood blocks grouped RELATED LINKS Staff labels for percussion kits on page 985 Deleting groups within grid presentation percussion kits You can delete groups in percussion kits using the grid presentation type without deleting the instruments within the group. PROCEDURE 1.
Setup mode Instruments 4. Click the percussion instruments and/or slash voices whose position you want to change. NOTE When using the mouse, you can only move one instrument or slash voice at a time. 5. Change the position of the selected instruments/slash voices in any of the following ways: ● Click Move up arrow to move them upwards. ● Click Move down arrow to move them downwards. ● Click and drag a single instrument upwards/downwards (five-line staff presentation only). 6.
Setup mode Player groups Removing individual instruments from percussion kits You can remove individual instruments from percussion kits without affecting other instruments in the kit. For example, if you want to move an instrument from one percussion kit to another player. PROCEDURE 1. In Setup mode, in the Players panel, expand the card of the player holding the kit from which you want to remove instruments. 2. In the kit instrument label, click the instrument menu open the Edit Percussion Kit dialog.
Setup mode Player groups Setting custom player orders on page 109 Player group labels on page 984 Player, layout, and instrument names on page 157 Adding player groups You can organize players into groups; for example, if you want to bracket them together. Players in different groups are also numbered separately. PROCEDURE 1. Optional: If you want to add a group that includes existing players, select those players in the Players panel in Setup mode. 2. In the Players panel, click Add Group .
Setup mode Player groups 4. Press Return to add the selected instrument. RESULT The corresponding type of player is added to the selected group. TIP You can also move existing players to, from, or between groups. RELATED LINKS Players panel on page 93 Instrument picker on page 95 Adding players on page 107 Moving players between groups on page 146 Player group labels on page 984 Renaming player groups You can change the name of player groups after you have added them.
Setup mode Player groups Deleting player groups You can delete groups of players; for example, if you no longer need a group of players that you created when importing a MIDI file. When deleting player groups, you can choose to keep the players within the group or delete them as well. PROCEDURE 1. In Setup mode, in the Players panel, select the groups that you want to delete. 2. Delete the selected groups in any of the following ways: 3. ● Press Backspace or Delete .
Setup mode Flows ● Select one player, then click Player Settings in the action bar and choose Remove Player from Group. You can also right-click players and choose this option from the context menu. RESULT The players are removed from their groups but remain in the project as individual players.
Setup mode Flows ● In the Flows panel, click Add Flow . RESULT A new flow is added to your project. All existing players are assigned to new flows, and new flows are automatically assigned to all existing full score and part layouts. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK ● You can rename the flow. ● You can change the players assigned to the flow and the layouts to which the flow is assigned.
Setup mode Flows TIP You can Shift -click to activate/deactivate the checkboxes in multiple player cards at once. RESULT Players are assigned to the selected flow when the checkbox in their player card is activated, and removed from the flow when the checkbox is deactivated.
Setup mode Layouts Deleting flows You can delete flows that you no longer need. This deletes all music for all instruments and players in the flows. PROCEDURE 1. In Setup mode, in the Flows panel, select the flows you want to delete. 2. Delete the selected flows in any of the following ways: ● Press Backspace or Delete . ● In the Flows panel, click Delete Flow .
Setup mode Layouts Custom score A custom score layout initially does not contain any players or flows. This allows you to create your score manually and, for example, assign only one flow instead of all flows or only vocal and piano players to create a vocal score. Custom score layouts are concert pitch by default. TIP ● You can create as many layouts of each type in each project as required. ● You can combine players, layouts, and flows together in any combination.
Setup mode Layouts Creating layouts You can create any number of full score, custom score, and part layouts in each project. By default, Dorico SE creates a single full score layout and a part layout for each player. PROCEDURE ● In Setup mode, in the Layouts panel, click one of the following layout types: ● Add Full Score Layout ● Add Instrumental Part Layout ● Add Custom Score Layout RESULT The layout is added to the list of layouts in the Layouts panel.
Setup mode Layouts TIP You can Shift -click to activate/deactivate the checkboxes in multiple player cards at once. RESULT Players are assigned to the selected layout when the checkbox in their player card is activated, and removed from the layout when the checkbox is deactivated. If you have not changed the name of the layout, it is automatically updated to reflect the players included in the layout.
Setup mode Layouts Making layouts transposing/concert pitch You can change whether each layout in your project is transposing or concert pitch. In Dorico SE, full score layouts are concert pitch and part layouts are transposing by default. For example, full scores are often concert pitch, to show notes at their sounding pitch, but part layouts are transposing so the player can read the notes they must play in order to achieve the desired sounding pitch. PROCEDURE 1.
Setup mode Layouts Transposed pitch When music is in transposed pitch, the notes written are the ones each instrument must play in order to produce the desired sounding pitch. For example, if a clarinet in B♭ reads a D in transposed pitch, the pitch that sounds from the instrument is C. Transposed pitch layouts automatically transpose key signatures and chord symbols according to the transposition of the instrument. Transposing and concert pitch layouts can also use different clefs.
Setup mode Layouts TIP You can also right-click layouts and choose this option from the context menu. RESULT All layouts are renumbered according to their current position in the panel. Full score layouts, custom score layouts, and part layouts are all numbered separately. Deleting layouts You can delete layouts without removing the corresponding music from the project. For example, if you only want to use a combined Violin I and II part layout, you can delete their separate part layouts. PROCEDURE 1.
Setup mode Player, layout, and instrument names Player, layout, and instrument names In Dorico SE, you can use three different names to refer to the same player in different contexts. This allows you to show relevant information in different places, such as in staff labels and at the top of part layouts. The following names relate to players and instruments: Player name The name of each player in the Players panel. They can be used in staff labels instead of instrument names.
Setup mode Player, layout, and instrument names Renaming player groups on page 145 Renaming players You can change the player names of players, and reset renamed players to their default names. Player names appear in guide instrument labels in galley view for players holding multiple instruments and can appear in staff labels. PROCEDURE 1. In Setup mode, in the Players panel, select the player you want to rename. 2. In the action bar, click Player Settings Player dialog.
Setup mode Player, layout, and instrument names 2. Press Return to open the layout name text field. 3. Rename the layout in any of the following ways: ● Enter a new layout name or edit the existing name. ● To revert the layout name to the player name, click Reset to Default . TIP If you want to include an accidental in the instrument transposition, you can enter the appropriate token, such as {@flat@} for ♭. 4. Press Return . RESULT The selected layout is renamed, or reverted to its default name.
Setup mode Player, layout, and instrument names 5. Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. RESULT The instrument names for the selected instrument are changed. If you have not already renamed the corresponding player, its player name is updated. ● If you did not save your changes as default, only the names of the selected instrument are changed. Any instruments of the same type added later or in future projects use the original default names.
Setup mode Player, layout, and instrument names The Edit Instrument Names dialog contains the following options and sections: 1 Editing instrument Displays the permanent underlying name of the instrument. 2 Editing Allows you to switch between editing the Singular names and Plural names of the selected instrument. Singular names are used when the staff contains one player, Plural names are used when the staff contains multiple players.
Setup mode Player, layout, and instrument names Allows you to customize the font, size, and formatting of the selected part of the short instrument name. 8 Short name text editing area Shows the current short staff label for the selected instrument, as it appears in Abbreviated staff labels. You can select any part of the instrument name and edit it independently of other parts; for example, if you want to add additional information on a new line and in italics.
Setup mode Flow names and flow titles PROCEDURE 1. In Setup mode, in the Players panel, click the disclosure arrow in the card of the player holding the instrument whose names you want to reset. This expands the card to show the instruments held by the player. 2. In the instrument label, click the instrument menu Edit Instrument Names dialog. 3. Click Reset to Default. 4. Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog.
Setup mode Flow names and flow titles Project Info dialog on page 69 Flows panel on page 103 Renaming flows You can change the names of flows in Setup mode. This automatically updates the title of the corresponding flow until you change the title in the Project Info dialog. PROCEDURE 1. In Setup mode, in the Flows panel, double-click the card of the flow you want to rename to open the flow name text field. 2. Enter a new name for the flow or edit the existing name. 3. Press Return .
Setup mode Videos Videos Dorico SE supports the use of videos within the program as well as the associated notations, such as markers and timecodes, and allows you to find appropriate tempos based on where important markers occur. Videos are a fast sequence of images that create the impression of a moving image. They can be any length, from only a few seconds up to several hours for feature-length films. Videos in Dorico SE are shown in a separate Video window and play back in sync with the music.
Setup mode Videos Video Properties dialog The Video Properties dialog allows you to change video-related settings, including their frame rate and start position. ● You can open the Video Properties dialog in Setup mode by right-clicking a flow in the Flows panel and choosing Video > Properties from the context menu. It also opens automatically when you add a new video. The Video Properties dialog contains the following fields and options: Video file Shows the location of the video file on your computer.
Setup mode Videos NOTE Flow timecodes are shown in their flow cards in the Flows panel. RELATED LINKS Timecodes on page 919 Flows panel on page 103 Adding videos You can add a video to each flow in your project. You can also follow these steps to reload videos previously added to the project that Dorico SE can no longer locate. Flows with missing videos show a warning icon instead of the video icon in the flow card in the Flows panel.
Setup mode Videos ● 2. 3. In the Flows panel, right-click a flow and choose Video > Properties from the context menu. Change the values for the following options, individually or together: ● Flow attachment position ● Video start offset Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. RESULT Changing the value for Flow attachment position changes the rhythmic position in the music at which the video starts.
Setup mode Videos ● Shift -click and drag a corner/edge to change the size without changing the shape. RESULT The size of the Video window is changed. Dorico SE saves the new size and shape and uses this for all projects until you change the size again. Removing videos You can remove videos from each flow independently. PROCEDURE ● In Setup mode, in the Flows panel, right-click the flow from which you want to remove a video and choose Video > Detach from the context menu.
Setup mode Videos Frame rates The frame rate of a video is the number of still images that are used per unit of time in order to create the impression of a moving image, commonly measured in frames per second, or “fps”. The number of frames per second required to create the impression of a moving image is determined by how fast the human eye processes movement, and so the most common frame rate is around 24 fps. However, recent major films have been released at 48 fps, which results in sharper images.
Write mode Write mode allows you to input and edit your music, including changing the rhythmic positions of items, changing the pitch of notes, and deleting notes and items. The available toolboxes and panels allow you to input all the notes and notation items that are most commonly used. By design, you cannot move notes and items graphically in Write mode. Graphical adjustments are only possible in Engrave mode in Dorico Pro.
Write mode Project window in Write mode Can display different panels, according to the current selection in the Notations toolbox. Panels in the right zone contain notation items that you can add to your music, such as dynamics and playing techniques, divided into separate categories. 4 Notations toolbox Contains either panel or popover buttons, depending on whether Panels is active.
Write mode Project window in Write mode When this option is activated, you can select the pitch before specifying the duration during note input. This allows you to experiment with pitches without having to stop note input because you only input the note when you specify the duration. You can also activate/deactivate Pitch Before Duration by pressing K . Chords Allows you to add multiple notes at the same rhythmic position in order to build a chord during note input.
Write mode Project window in Write mode IMPORTANT You can get unexpected results if you force the duration of notes and later change the time signature or move barlines, for example. You can remove Force Duration from selected notes by resetting their appearance. You can also activate/deactivate Force Duration by pressing O . Create Voice Allows you to create a new voice on the current staff into which you can input notes during note input.
Write mode Project window in Write mode NOTE If Force Duration is not activated, Dorico SE automatically combines adjacent rests as appropriate for their position in relation to notes and according to the current meter. Tuplets Inputs a triplet based on the currently selected note duration at the caret position or at the selected rhythmic position. You can click and hold or right-click Tuplets to access the following options: ● 2:3 : Inputs a duplet; that is, two notes in the space of three.
Write mode Project window in Write mode RELATED LINKS Key Commands page in the Preferences dialog on page 54 Activating/Deactivating mouse input on page 204 Inputting notes with rhythm dots on page 204 Inputting chords on page 225 Inputting grace notes on page 224 Inputting tuplets on page 228 Tuplets popover on page 229 Input methods for time signatures and pick-up bars on page 257 Resetting the appearance of items on page 400 Notes panel The Notes panel contains buttons that allow you to select note and
Write mode Project window in Write mode Inputting accidentals on page 218 Inputting articulations on page 245 Inputting slurs on page 247 Inputting nested slurs on page 973 Deleting notes/items on page 411 Deleting accidentals on page 604 Deleting articulations on page 611 Notations toolbox The Notations toolbox allows you to access panels and popovers, which you can use to input the different notations available. It is located on the right of the window in Write mode.
Write mode Project window in Write mode Hides/Shows the Tempo panel, which contains sections for the different types of tempo changes, including gradual tempo changes, metronome marks, and tempo equations. Dynamics Hides/Shows the Dynamics panel, which contains sections for the different types of dynamics, including immediate, gradual, and custom combined dynamics. Ornaments Hides/Shows the Ornaments panel, which contains sections for ornaments, arpeggio signs, glissando lines, and guitar techniques.
Write mode Project window in Write mode Popover and direct input buttons Clefs Opens the clefs and octave lines popover. Key Signatures, Tonality Systems, and Accidentals Opens the key signatures popover. Time Signatures (Meter) Opens the time signatures popover. Tempo Opens the tempo popover. Dynamics Opens the dynamics popover. Ornaments Opens the ornaments popover. Repeat Structures Opens the repeats popover. Bars and Barlines Opens the bars and barlines popover.
Write mode Project window in Write mode Text Opens the text editor for inputting text items. Lyrics Opens the lyrics popover. Chord Symbols Opens the chord symbols popover. Note Tools Opens the note tools popover. Fingering Opens the fingerings popover. Figured Bass Opens the figured bass popover.
Write mode Project window in Write mode Time Signatures (Meter) panel on page 259 Tempo panel on page 270 Dynamics panel on page 285 Ornaments panel on page 314 Repeat Structures panel on page 375 Bars and Barlines panel on page 277 Holds and Pauses panel on page 307 Playing Techniques panel on page 339 Lines panel on page 352 Video panel on page 369 Comments panel on page 432 Lower zone (Write mode) The lower zone in Write mode can display different panels for inputting notes and editing notes/ items.
Write mode Project window in Write mode Key Editor Shows the Key Editor panel, which allows you to view and edit notes belonging to the selected instrument in a continuous piano roll.
Write mode Project window in Write mode You can also delete notes/items during note input by pressing Backspace . TIP You can delete notes/items outside of note input by pressing Backspace or Delete . Set Note Duration Allows you to select a note duration, both for the next notes you input during note input and to change the duration of existing notes outside of note input.
Write mode Project window in Write mode Hiding/Showing zones on page 41 Inputting notes on page 196 Inputting chords on page 225 Deleting notes/items on page 411 Selecting note/rest durations on page 234 Inputting slurs on page 247 Inputting articulations on page 245 Respelling notes on page 426 Fretboard panel The Fretboard panel allows you to input notes for fretted instruments using the corresponding fretboard layout for the selected instrument type, and displays the pitches of the earliest selected not
Write mode Project window in Write mode TIP You can delete notes/items outside of note input by pressing Backspace or Delete . Set Note Duration Allows you to select a note duration, both for the next notes you input during note input and to change the duration of existing notes outside of note input. You can also select note durations by pressing the corresponding key command or by clicking note durations in the Notes panel in the left zone.
Write mode Inputting vs. editing You can also advance the caret by pressing Space . Delete Left Deletes notes at the previous rhythmic position and moves the caret back to that position. Only available during note input. You can also delete notes/items during note input by pressing Backspace . TIP You can delete notes/items outside of note input by pressing Backspace or Delete .
Write mode Inputting vs. editing note into the score, by pressing the letter name of the note on your computer keyboard, or by playing the note or chord on your MIDI keyboard. When the caret is activated, notes and notations are input at the caret position. If no notes or chords are selected in the music area and you select a duration, either by pressing its key command or by clicking it in the Notes panel, mouse input is activated.
Write mode Inputting vs. editing ● Create item at selection: Items are input at the position of selected items or notes in the music area. ● Load pointer with item: Items are loaded onto the mouse pointer so you can click in the music area where you want to input the item. You can also activate/deactivate Allow multiple items to be created with the mouse.
Write mode Rhythmic grid Rhythmic grid The rhythmic grid is a unit of rhythmic duration whose value affects certain aspects of inputting and editing, such as the amount by which items move. However, it does not control the duration of notes and items that you input. Rhythmic grid set to eighth notes (quavers) shown above the staff The current rhythmic grid resolution is shown by the note value in the status bar, and by ruler markings above the staff on which the caret is active.
Write mode Caret ● Select a value from the Rhythmic Grid selector in the status bar. RESULT Decreasing the rhythmic grid resolution makes it finer by making the note value shorter. Increasing the rhythmic grid resolution makes it coarser by making the note value longer. TIP You can assign your own key commands for increasing and decreasing the rhythmic grid resolution.
Write mode Caret Caret when inputting notes onto multiple staves Insert The caret shows V and inverted V shapes at the top and bottom. Dotted lines are shown on staves affected by the Insert mode scope across which the caret does not already extend. In Insert mode, inserted notes shift existing notes after the caret along by the input duration instead of overwriting them.
Write mode Caret NOTE Chord mode also affects some edits outside of note input, such as copying/pasting and lengthening/shortening notes and items. Lock to Duration The caret is dashed. Lock to Duration allows you to repitch notes without changing their duration or rhythm. Caret when Lock to Duration is activated Grace Notes The caret is shorter than the default caret. It allows you to input grace notes at the caret position.
Write mode Caret ● A plus symbol on the left at the bottom, if the slash voice is new Caret when inputting notes into an up-stem slash voice Caret when inputting notes into a new, second up-stem slash voice Caret when inputting notes into a new, stemless slash voice Percussion kits The caret appears significantly smaller than usual when inputting notes into percussion kits. The name of the kit instrument into which you are currently inputting notes is shown above the rhythmic grid.
Write mode Caret Activating/Deactivating the caret When the caret is activated, you can input notes and notations at the caret position; for example, if you want to input a dynamic in the middle of a tie chain. When the caret is deactivated, you cannot input notes, instead you can select and edit items in the music area. PROCEDURE 1. 2. In Write mode, activate the caret and start note input in any of the following ways: ● Select an item and press Shift-N .
Write mode Note input Moving the caret manually During normal note input, the caret moves automatically as you input notes, but you can also move it manually. For example, the caret does not move automatically when inputting chords or when using the Fretboard panel. PROCEDURE ● In Write mode, move the caret in any of the following ways: ● To move the caret according to the current rhythmic grid resolution or to the next/ previous note/rest, whichever is closest, press Right Arrow / Left Arrow .
Write mode Note input Drum Pads panel on page 185 Notations input on page 245 Arranging tools on page 411 Inputting notes You can input notes into your project during note input, which is when the caret is activated. You can input notes with a computer keyboard, with the mouse, using panels in the lower zone, or by playing notes with a MIDI keyboard. NOTE ● These steps describe inputting notes with the default preference of duration before pitch.
Write mode Note input For example, press 6 for quarter notes (crotchets). Press smaller numbers for smaller durations, such as 5 for eighth notes (quavers) and 4 for 16th notes (semiquavers). Press larger numbers for larger durations, such as 7 for half notes (minims). ● In the Notes panel, click the duration you want. ● In the Keyboard, Fretboard, or Drum Pads panel toolbar, click the duration you want. 4. Optional: Select any required rhythm dots. 5.
Write mode Note input Dorico SE notates and beams notes appropriately according to their duration, the prevailing time signature, and their position in the bar. This includes showing notes as tie chains if required. If you advance the caret without inputting notes, Dorico SE fills the gaps between notes with implicit rests of the appropriate duration.
Write mode Note input Enabling/Disabling MIDI input devices on page 245 Implicit vs. explicit rests on page 957 Ties on page 1022 Key signatures on page 763 Arranging tools on page 411 Bracketed noteheads on page 797 Register selection during note input Dorico SE automatically selects the register of pitches during note input, but you can override this and select the register manually.
Write mode Note input ● When inputting notes on tablature using pitch before duration, you must select note durations by clicking them in the Notes panel. ● You do not have to input rests between notes, as Dorico SE automatically shows implicit rests of the appropriate duration between the notes you input. Similarly, you do not have to input ties, as Dorico SE shows notes as tie chains if necessary. ● You can also input notations alongside notes without deactivating note input.
Write mode Note input ● To input a note below the previously input note, press Ctrl-Alt (Windows) or Ctrl (macOS) as well as the letter for the note; for example, Ctrl-Alt-A (Windows) or Ctrl-A (macOS) . When inputting notes using pitch before duration, you can press these key commands multiple times to select higher/lower octaves. ● Click the staff at the rhythmic position of each note you want to input. A shadow notehead appears when inputting with the mouse to indicate where the note will be input.
Write mode Note input If you advance the caret without inputting notes, Dorico SE fills the gaps between notes with implicit rests of the appropriate duration. If you input notes on notation staves belonging to fretted instruments, Dorico SE automatically allocates these notes to the strings on which they can be played closest to the nut. Because this calculation is done for each note separately, multiple notes can be allocated to the same string.
Write mode Note input PROCEDURE ● In Write mode, choose one of the following input pitch settings: ● To input/record notes at their written pitch, choose Write > Input Pitch > Written Pitch. ● To input/record notes at their sounding pitch, choose Write > Input Pitch > Sounding Pitch. RESULT The resulting pitch notated or recorded is changed. For example, if you input a C in a Horn in F transposing part layout with the input pitch set to Sounding Pitch, the note is written as a G.
Write mode Note input Activating/Deactivating mouse input You can activate/deactivate mouse input; for example, if you only want to input notes using your computer keyboard or MIDI device. Deactivating mouse input also allows you to click other items to stop note input. PROCEDURE ● In Write mode, in the Notes toolbox, activate/deactivate Select . RESULT is deactivated. Mouse input is Mouse input is activated in the current project when Select deactivated in the current project when Select is activated.
Write mode Note input ● 4. 5. In the Keyboard, Fretboard, or Drum Pads panel toolbar, click the duration you want. Activate Dotted Notes in any of the following ways: ● Press . . ● In the Notes toolbox, click Dotted Notes . Optional: Change the number of rhythm dots in any of the following ways: ● Press Alt/Opt-. to cycle through different numbers of rhythm dots. ● In the Notes toolbox, click and hold Dotted Notes dots you want.
Write mode Note input Activating/Deactivating the caret on page 194 Extending the caret to multiple staves on page 194 Inputting notes in Insert mode on page 211 Changing the note-based notation input setting on page 203 Inputting notes into multiple voices By default, notes are input into the first up-stem voice, as indicated by the symbol of an up-stem quarter note beside the caret. You can input notes directly into other voices during note input, and switch between voices as required.
Write mode Note input down-stem voices, the order is: first up-stem voice, first down-stem voice, second down-stem voice, second up-stem voice. 4. Input the notes you want. 5. Stop note input in any of the following ways: ● Press Esc or Return . ● In the Notes toolbox, click Start Note Input . RESULT Notes are input into the voice indicated by the quarter note symbol beside the caret.
Write mode Note input Inputting notes into slash voices You can input notes into multiple slash voices; for example, if you want to indicate a precise rhythm without specifying pitches. By default, the first slash voice is up-stem, but you can add extra slash voices both with and without stems, and switch between them as often as you want. You can also input notes into new slash voices on a staff with existing notes.
Write mode Note input ● In the Notes toolbox, click Start Note Input . RESULT Notes are input into new slash voices, as indicated by the caret indicator. The slash note symbol beside the caret changes to indicate which voice is currently selected and into which notes are input. You can switch between voices as often as you like.
Write mode Note input PREREQUISITE If you want to explode individual notes in chords onto multiple staves during note input, you have connected a MIDI keyboard. You can only input the different notes in chords onto separate staves when using a MIDI keyboard. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select an item at the rhythmic position where you want to input notes/ notations onto multiple staves. 2. Start note input in any of the following ways: 3. ● Press Shift-N .
Write mode Note input Inputting notes in Insert mode In Insert mode, you can input notes before existing notes in a single voice without overriding them. This allows you to push existing notes ahead at the same time as inputting new notes at their previous positions. NOTE ● These steps describe inputting notes with the default preference of duration before pitch. However, you can also specify the pitch before duration instead. ● You can only input chords in Insert mode when using a MIDI keyboard.
Write mode Note input Changing the Insert mode scope on page 409 Notes toolbox on page 172 Rhythmic grid on page 189 Inputting notes on page 196 Inputting chords on page 225 Moving the caret manually on page 195 Inputting notes for unpitched percussion You can input notes for individual unpitched percussion instruments and on all percussion instruments in percussion kits using any presentation type, including selecting playing technique-specific noteheads for individual instruments.
Write mode Note input 3. 4. Optional: When inputting into percussion kits, move the caret up/down to other instruments in the kit in any of the following ways: ● To move it up, press Up Arrow . ● To move it down, press Down Arrow . Select a note duration in any of the following ways: ● Press the number on your computer keyboard that corresponds to the duration you want. For example, press 6 for quarter notes (crotchets).
Write mode Note input TIP You can also move the caret in different ways and by different increments. 8. Stop note input in any of the following ways: ● Press Esc or Return . ● In the Notes toolbox, click Start Note Input . RESULT Notes are input at the caret position or where you click with the selected duration and are played back as you input them by default.
Write mode Note input The main choice affects input via MIDI keyboards and computer keyboards. Use percussion map A percussion map defines which MIDI notes produce which sound for a particular patch in a sound library. For example, in General MIDI percussion, C2 (note 36) produces bass drum, and D2 (note 38) produces snare drum, and so on. If you know a particular mapping well, you may find it helpful to use the mapping directly for input.
Write mode Note input Default note selection during note input for percussion kits During note input in percussion kits, you can press the letters on a computer keyboard that correspond to staff positions for kits using the five-line staff presentation type. For example, you can press F to input a note on the F space or line. In Preferences, you can set options for inputting notes into percussion kits in the Note Input section of the Note Input and Editing page.
Write mode Note input staves and behaves as if chord input is always active, meaning you must advance the caret manually to input notes at other rhythmic positions. NOTE These steps describe inputting notes with the default preference of duration before pitch. However, you can also specify the pitch before duration instead. When inputting notes on tablature using pitch before duration, you must select note durations by clicking them in the Notes panel. PROCEDURE 1.
Write mode Note input ● To advance the caret according to the note duration currently selected, press Space or click Advance Caret in the Fretboard panel toolbar. ● To move the caret to the next/previous bar, press Ctrl/Cmd-Right Arrow / Ctrl/CmdLeft Arrow . RESULT Notes are input at the caret position with the selected duration on the string indicated by the caret and are played back as you input them by default.
Write mode Note input ● For a natural accidental, press 0 . ● In the Notes panel, click the accidental you want. TIP You can find more accidentals, such as double sharps/flats or microtonal accidentals, in the Accidentals section of the Key Signatures, Tonality Systems, and Accidentals panel on the right of the window. 3. Optional: During note input, input the note you want with your selected accidental. RESULT The accidental is added to the selected existing notes.
Write mode Note input By default, Dorico SE makes retrospective changes to how it has spelled accidentals, depending on how your music develops. For example, in C major, if you input a sequence of pitches C-E-G♯, but then input a G♭, the G♯ is respelled as an A♭. Inputting rests Dorico SE automatically shows rests as appropriate in the gaps between the notes you input. However, you can also input rests manually; for example, to show fermatas on specific beats for players without notes in that bar.
Write mode Note input RESULT Rests of the selected duration are input. If Force Duration is not activated, Dorico SE automatically combines adjacent rests as appropriate for their position in relation to notes and according to the current meter. RELATED LINKS Rests on page 956 Implicit vs.
Write mode Note input NOTE Alternatively, you can click Insert Bar Rest in the Insert Bar Rest section of the Bars and Barlines panel to input bar rests during note input. RELATED LINKS Bars on page 615 Bars and barlines popover on page 275 Hiding/Showing bar rests in empty bars on page 962 Inputting notes into multiple voices on page 206 Caret on page 190 Inputting ties You can input ties manually to join two notes of the same pitch, both during note input and by joining two existing notes with a tie.
Write mode Note input ● 4. In the Notes toolbox, click Tie . Optional: During note input, input the note that you want at the end of the tie. NOTE The second note must be the same pitch as the first note. RESULT During note input, the two notes input are joined by a tie. If you selected a single existing note, it is joined by a tie to the next note of the same pitch in the same voice and staff.
Write mode Note input Inputting grace notes You input grace notes in the same ways as normal notes, and they can have any rhythmic note value, accidental, and articulation. NOTE ● These steps describe inputting notes with the default preference of duration before pitch. However, you can also specify the pitch before duration instead. ● You cannot add rhythm dots to grace notes. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select an item on the staff and at the rhythmic position where you want to input grace notes. 2.
Write mode Note input RELATED LINKS Grace notes on page 751 Grace notes in playback on page 756 Notes toolbox on page 172 Notes panel on page 176 Keyboard panel on page 182 Fretboard panel on page 184 Drum Pads panel on page 185 Caret on page 190 Extending the caret to multiple staves on page 194 Inputting notes on page 196 Selecting note/rest durations on page 234 Inputting ties on page 222 Inputting accidentals on page 218 Inputting articulations on page 245 Changing the type of grace notes on page 755 Tu
Write mode Note input 4. Optional: If you want to input chords onto multiple staves at once, extend the caret to those staves. 5. Select a note duration in any of the following ways: ● Press the number on your computer keyboard that corresponds to the duration you want. For example, press 6 for quarter notes (crotchets). Press smaller numbers for smaller durations, such as 5 for eighth notes (quavers) and 4 for 16th notes (semiquavers).
Write mode Note input RESULT Multiple notes are input at the caret position. ● If entering pitches by clicking with the mouse, you can put the same pitch into the chord twice by clicking again on the same line. ● If entering pitches with the keyboard, repeated notes are automatically input an octave above. You can change the register of notes by forcing the register selection during note input, or by transposing them after they have been input.
Write mode Note input RELATED LINKS Insert mode on page 407 Caret on page 190 Copying and pasting notes/items on page 413 Changing the duration of notes on page 235 Inputting notes with rhythm dots on page 204 Inputting tuplets You can input all types of tuplets using the tuplets popover. Tuplets can contain notes of any duration, such as a quarter note at the start of an eighth note triplet. NOTE These steps describe inputting notes with the default preference of duration before pitch.
Write mode Note input 8. Enter or play in the pitches you want. When inputting tuplets with the keyboard, Dorico SE automatically continues inputting notes as the specified tuplet. 9. Optional: Advance the caret to continue inputting tuplets of the same ratio at later rhythmic positions in any of the following ways: ● Press Space . ● In the Keyboard, Fretboard, or Drum Pads panel toolbar, click Advance Caret . 10.
Write mode Note input ● Choose Write > Create Tuplet. The icon on the left-hand side of the popover matches the corresponding button in the Notes toolbox on the right of the window. Tuplets button in the Notes toolbox Tuplets popover with an example entry When inputting tuplets with the keyboard, Dorico SE continues to input notes as the specified tuplet until any of the following happens: ● You press : to return to inputting normal notes. ● You move the caret with the arrow keys.
Write mode Note input This list is not comprehensive. It is intended to illustrate how you can structure your entry to input different tuplets. NOTE Unless you specify a beat unit in your entry, the total duration of the tuplet depends on the note value selected when you open the popover. For example, if a quarter note is selected when you input a triplet, the triplet input is three quarter notes in the space of two.
Write mode Note input 4. Press Return to close the popover. RESULT Notes are added to the selected notes according to the intervals specified. RELATED LINKS Notations toolbox on page 177 Note tools popover on page 232 Note tools popover The note tools popover allows you to add notes above and below existing notes, and also transpose existing notes. You can open the note tools popover in Write mode in any of the following ways when notes are selected, including during note input: ● Press Shift-I .
Write mode Note input Interval or quality Popover entry [n] half-steps (semitones) in 12-EDO [n] s, [n] st, [n] semi, or [n] semitones [n] quarter tones in 24-EDO [n] q, [n] qt, or [n] quartertones NOTE ● You must include an interval degree before a specified total number of octave divisions, such as 5 8 div. Together, they specify the desired note name and accidental. ● M and m entries for major and minor are case-sensitive.
Write mode Note durations Transposition Example transposition Popover entry Transpose notes upwards by a third t3 Transpose notes downwards by a sixth t-6 Transpose notes upwards by [n] octave divisions, using the note name a fifth above t 5 8 div in any tonality system t 5 8 st in 12-EDO t 5 16 qt in 24-EDO Transpose notes downwards by [n] octave divisions, using the note name a sixth below t -6 9 div in any tonality system t -6 9 st in 12-EDO t -6 18 qt in 24-EDO EXAMPLE To transpose C♮ upwards
Write mode Note durations ● Press the number on your computer keyboard that corresponds to the duration you want. For example, press 6 for quarter notes (crotchets). Press smaller numbers for smaller durations, such as 5 for eighth notes (quavers) and 4 for 16th notes (semiquavers). Press larger numbers for larger durations, such as 7 for half notes (minims). 3. ● In the Notes panel, click the duration you want. ● In the Keyboard, Fretboard, or Drum Pads panel toolbar, click the duration you want.
Write mode Note durations ● To shorten notes by the current rhythmic grid resolution, press Shift-Alt/OptLeft Arrow . ● To double the length of notes, press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-Alt/Opt-Right Arrow . ● To halve the length of notes, press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-Alt/Opt-Left Arrow . ● To lengthen notes by the current rhythmic grid resolution, choose Write > Edit Duration > Lengthen Duration by Grid Value.
Write mode Note durations Splitting notes by duration You can split notes by either a specific duration, the current rhythmic grid resolution, or the duration between the start of the note and the caret position; for example, to turn a long tie chain into a sequence of eighth notes. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the notes you want to split. 2.
Write mode Note durations TIP If you want to force the duration of all notes on a staff to imply a different meter, for example, to show three quarter note groups in 6/8 to indicate a hemiola, you can also input a time signature only on those staves to group notes according to that meter. You can then hide the time signatures if required. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input. ● Select existing notes whose duration you want to force.
Write mode MIDI recording EXAMPLE Default notation of notes in 6/8 Notes in the down-stem voice input with forced durations RELATED LINKS Implicit vs.
Write mode MIDI recording Quantization options on page 80 Voices on page 1081 Pedal lines on page 873 Slurs on page 964 Tremolos on page 1046 Trills on page 818 Tuplets on page 1051 Grace notes on page 751 Inputting notes using MIDI recording You can input notes by recording what you play on a MIDI device in real time. You can record notes in both concert and transposed pitch. PREREQUISITE ● You have connected the MIDI device you want to use.
Write mode MIDI recording In Write mode, no music appears on the staff until you stop recording. In Play mode, notes appear in the piano roll in real time. 6. Press Space or Enter or Ctrl/Cmd-R to stop recording. RESULT The notes you played on the MIDI device are input onto the selected staff. If you did not specify the voice, notes are recorded into voices according to what you played. For example, if you played notes in rhythmic unison, they are recorded into a single voice.
Write mode MIDI recording RESULT All the notes you played on your MIDI device during the previous playback are input on the selected staff, starting from the selected rhythmic position. They are input into the first available voice on the staff and overwrite any existing notes in that voice by default. If you activated Chords, the retrieved notes are merged into the first available voice on the staff without overwriting any existing notes.
Write mode MIDI recording Because there can be a time latency between you pressing keys on a MIDI device and the notes being picked up by Dorico SE, we recommend that you check the latency by inputting a simple rhythm against the click; for example, recording quarter notes in a 4/4 time signature.
Write mode MIDI recording Decreasing the latency compensation value decreases the time between pressing the key and the note being notated. This is useful if the notes you record were previously notated behind the beat. Changing the audio device buffer size You can change the audio buffer size; for example, if the current buffer size is causing notes input using MIDI recording appear significantly after the beat.
Write mode Notations input RESULT When Import CC64 as pedal lines is activated, the MIDI controller CC64 is interpreted as pedal lines. When Snap pedal lines to previous beat is activated, the start of pedal lines is automatically moved back to the start of the beat. RELATED LINKS Preferences dialog on page 52 Enabling/Disabling MIDI input devices By default, Dorico SE accepts MIDI input from all connected MIDI devices, including virtual MIDI cables and inter-application buses.
Write mode Notations input 4. ● Press the key commands for the articulations you want. ● In the Notes panel, click the articulations you want. ● In the Keyboard panel toolbar, click the articulations you want. Optional: During note input, input the notes or chords you want with your selected articulations. RESULT The selected articulations are added to the selected notes.
Write mode Notations input Type of articulation Key command Staccato: ] Tenuto: # (Windows) or \ (macOS) Staccatissimo: , , or } Combined tenuto and staccato: ~ (Windows) or | (macOS) Inputting slurs You can input slurs, both during note input and by adding them to existing notes.
Write mode Notations input ● In the Keyboard panel toolbar, click Slur . RESULT During note input, slurs begin from the currently selected note on all staves across which the caret extends, not from the caret position. Slurs extend automatically as you input notes, and end on the currently selected note. When adding slurs to existing notes, the selected notes are connected by slurs.
Write mode Notations input ● Although they contain two numbers, substitution fingerings are considered one fingering, meaning you can add substitution fingerings to single notes. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input. ● Select an existing note on a single staff to which you want to add fingering. If you want to add fingerings to all notes in a chord, select all the notes in the chord. 2. Optional: During note input, input at least one note. 3.
Write mode Notations input RESULT The fingerings are input on the selected notes, including during note input. The popover advances through notes in the voice as indicated by the caret or in the same voice as your initial selection.
Write mode Notations input Type of fingering Example popover entry Single fingerings for each note in chords 1,3,5 For keyboard instruments, Dorico SE automatically orders numbers appropriately according to the hand playing the notes.
Write mode Notations input Type of fingering Example popover entries Right-hand pinky finger e, x, c, o, or 5 These lists are not comprehensive as there are many possible fingerings. It is intended to illustrate how you can structure your entries to input different types of fingerings. NOTE Finger substitutions are shown as immediate by default, but you can change the rhythmic position of the substitution by changing the deferral duration.
Write mode Notations input Type of key signature Popover entry Major keys (capital letters) C, D, G#, Ab, and so on Minor keys (lowercase letters) g, d, f#, bb, and so on Number of sharps 3s, 2#, and so on NOTE Assumes the major key for that many sharps. Number of flats 4f, 5b, and so on NOTE Assumes the major key for that many flats. This list is not comprehensive as you can input every possible key signature.
Write mode Notations input The Key Signatures section contains the following parts: 1 Major/Minor Allow you to choose whether your key signature is Major or Minor. 2 More Sharps/Fewer Flats Each time you click, you add one sharp accidental to the key signature, or remove one flat accidental from the key signature. 3 Fewer Sharps/More Flats Each time you click, you remove one sharp accidental from the key signature, or add one flat accidental to the key signature.
Write mode Notations input 2. Optional: If you want to input key signatures onto multiple specific staves at once, extend the caret to those staves. 3. Open the key signatures popover in any of the following ways: 4. ● Press Shift-K . ● In the Notations toolbox, click Popovers , then Key Signatures . Enter the key signature you want into the popover. For example, enter: 5. ● G or 1s for G major. ● g for G minor. ● open for an atonal key signature.
Write mode Notations input Inputting key signatures with the panel You can input key signatures using the Key Signatures, Tonality Systems, and Accidentals panel, both during note input and by adding them to existing music. You can also input key signatures only on single staves. NOTE ● These steps describe inputting with the default mouse input preference Create item at selection.
Write mode Notations input RELATED LINKS Notations toolbox on page 177 Key Signatures, Tonality Systems, and Accidentals panel on page 253 Key signatures on page 763 Accidental selection during MIDI input on page 219 Moving notes/items rhythmically on page 416 Changing your mouse input settings on page 188 Transposing instruments on page 118 Making layouts transposing/concert pitch on page 154 Respelling notes on page 426 Changing the pitch of individual notes on page 422 Transposing selections on page 423
Write mode Notations input Time signatures Type of time signature Popover entry Simple time signatures 2/2, 2/4, 6/8, 3/4, 5/4, and so on For example, 2/2 (two half notes per bar), 2/4 (two quarter notes per bar), 6/8 (six eighth notes per bar), 3/4, 5/4, and so on Alternating time signatures, such as 6/8+3/4 6/8 + 3/4 NOTE You must include spaces either side of the plus sign.
Write mode Notations input Type of time signature Popover entry Interchangeable time signature with different styles: parenthesized, slash, equals sign, and dashed 2/4 (6/8), 2/4 / 6/8, 2/4 = 6/8, or 2/4 – 6/8 NOTE You must include spaces either side of the slashes, equals signs, or dashes, and before opening parentheses. Pick-up bars Example time signature with pick-up bar Popover entry 4/4 time signature with a dotted quarter note pick-up 4/4,1.
Write mode Notations input The Time Signatures (Meter) panel contains the following sections: Used in This Flow Contains any time signatures already used in the current flow. Common Contains common time signatures, such as 4/4, 3/4, 6/8, and 7/8. Create Time Signature Allows you to design your own time signatures, including alternating time signatures and aggregate time signatures.
Write mode Notations input 4 ● 2 beats ● 3 beats Input time signature button Click the button that displays the time signature to input it. If nothing in the project is selected, the time signature is loaded onto the mouse pointer.
Write mode Notations input RESULT During note input, time signatures are added at the caret position, even if this is in the middle of an existing bar. When adding time signatures to existing music, they are added at the rhythmic position of the earliest selected item. They appear to the right of barlines, key signatures, and clefs, and to the left of other items, even if this is in the middle of an existing bar.
Write mode Notations input 3. In the Notations toolbox, click Panels Signatures (Meter) panel. , then Time Signatures (Meter) to show the Time 4. Optional: If you want to input a time signature that is not available in the Used in This Flow or Common sections, select the type of time signature you want to input from the menu in the Create Time Signature section. 5. Optional: Enter the time signatures you want into the available spaces. 6.
Write mode Notations input PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input. ● Select an item at the rhythmic position where you want to input a pick-up bar. If you want to input a pick-up bar on a single staff, select an item that belongs to that staff only. 2. Optional: If you want to input a pick-up bar onto multiple specific staves at once, extend the caret to those staves. 3.
Write mode Notations input ● You can use the Global Adjustment of Current Bar Insert mode scope to create and delete pick-up bars by deleting notes/rests in the first bar in the flow. You can also use it to shorten the last bar in flows that start with a pick-up bar.
Write mode Notations input ● 2 beats ● 3 beats NOTE Not all pick-up bar lengths are possible when using the panel. For example, you cannot produce a single eighth note upbeat in 6/8 with the available options. In such cases, you must use the time signatures popover. 7. Input the pick-up bar in one of the following ways: ● To input a pick-up bar on all staves, click the input time signature button in the Create Time Signature section.
Write mode Notations input Ending interchangeable time signatures on page 1044 Changing your mouse input settings on page 188 Input methods for tempo marks You can input tempo marks with the keyboard by using the tempo popover, with the mouse by using the Tempo panel, and in the Tempo track in Play mode. You can input a tempo mark containing just a text instruction, just a metronome mark, or a combination of the two.
Write mode Notations input Example tempo mark Popover entry = 84 q. = 84, q.=84, 6. = 84, or 6.=84 = 60 h = 60, h=60, 7 = 60, or 7=60 = 120 e = 120, e=120, 5 = 120, or 5=120 rit. rit. or rit ritardando ritardando accel. accel. or accel accelerando accelerando più più meno meno Rubato Rubato Faster, with energy Faster, with energy This list is not comprehensive as you can enter tempos freely and there are many possible metronome marks and tempo marks.
Write mode Notations input Metronome mark beat unit Popover entry Double whole note 2w or 9 Rhythm dot . (period) Tempo equations Example tempo equation Popover entry = e = e. or e=e. = q = e or q=e = q. = h or q.=h This list is not comprehensive as there are many possible tempo equations. It is intended to illustrate how you can structure your entry to input different tempo equations. NOTE Tempo equations do not yet include tuplet durations. This is planned for future versions.
Write mode Notations input RELATED LINKS Notations toolbox on page 177 Tempo marks on page 1000 Types of tempo marks on page 1001 Tempo mark components on page 1002 Swing playback on page 462 Enabling swing playback on page 463 Changing the order of metronome marks on page 1009 Tempo panel The Tempo panel contains the different types of tempo marks available in Dorico SE, organized into sections. It is located in the right zone in Write mode. ● You can hide/show the Tempo panel by clicking Panels toolbox.
Write mode Notations input Gradual Tempo Change Contains tempo marks that indicate a change in tempo over a defined period of time, such as rallentando or accelerando. You can add modifiers to gradual tempo changes. Available modifiers are shown at the top of the section. Relative Tempo Change Contains tempo marks that indicate a change in tempo that is relative to the previous tempo, such as mosso (movement, or with movement).
Write mode Notations input RELATED LINKS Notations toolbox on page 177 Tempo marks on page 1000 Types of tempo marks on page 1001 Tempo mark components on page 1002 Changing the metronome mark value on page 1007 Inputting tempo marks with the popover You can input tempo marks using the tempo popover, both during note input and by adding them to existing music. PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input.
Write mode Notations input NOTE If you want to show gradual tempo changes separated into syllables spread across their duration, such as rit-e-nu-to, we recommend selecting a suggested entry from the menu. Only gradual tempo changes with valid full text appear separated into syllables. 4. Press Return to close the popover. RESULT During note input, tempo marks are input at the caret position.
Write mode Notations input ● Select an item at the rhythmic position where you want to input a tempo mark. If you want to input a gradual tempo change across a duration, select items that span that duration. 2. In the Notations toolbox, click Panels , then Tempo 3. In the Tempo panel, click the tempo mark you want. to show the Tempo panel. TIP If you want Dorico SE to calculate the metronome mark for you, you can click Tap in the Tap Tempo section multiple times at the required speed. 4.
Write mode Notations input System track on page 389 Inputting bar rests into specific voices on page 221 Repeats in playback on page 460 Bars and barlines popover The following tables contain examples of what you can enter into the bars and barlines popover to add and delete bars and beats, and the entries you can use to input the different barlines available.
Write mode Notations input or hyphen. You can also specify beats in the form of a time signature, such as 3/4 for three quarter note beats.
Write mode Notations input Type of barline Popover entry Start repeat |: or start End repeat :| or end End/Start repeat :|:, :||:, end-start, or endstart RELATED LINKS Notations toolbox on page 177 Inputting bar rests into specific voices on page 221 Bars on page 615 Barlines on page 620 Deleting bars/beats on page 615 Repeats in playback on page 460 Bars and Barlines panel The Bars and Barlines panel allows you to input bars, bar rests, and different types of barlines.
Write mode Notations input ● Select an item at the rhythmic position where you want to add bars/beats. If you want to add bars/beats to a single staff, select an item that belongs to that staff only. Bars/Beats are added after selected barlines and before other selected items, including time signatures. 2. Optional: If you want to input bars/beats onto multiple specific staves at once, extend the caret to those staves. 3. Open the bars and barlines popover in any of the following ways: 4.
Write mode Notations input ● Select an existing item before which you want to input bars. 2. In the Notations toolbox, click Panels Barlines panel. , then Bars and Barlines to show the Bars and 3. In the Insert Bars section of the Bars and Barlines panel, change the number of bars you want to input by changing the value in the value field. 4. Select one of the following options for where you want to input bars: ● Start of Flow: Bars are input at the beginning of the flow.
Write mode Notations input Add button above the system track The Add button is highlighted when you hover over it RESULT The rhythmic duration selected in the system track is added immediately after the end of the selection. Existing music after the selection is pushed back after the inserted bars/beats.
Write mode Notations input NOTE You can only input barlines onto single staves that already have an independent time signature. RESULT During note input, barlines are input at the caret position. When you add barlines to existing music, they are added at the rhythmic position of the earliest selected item. They appear to the right of clefs and to the left of other items. If you selected an existing barline, the new barline directly replaces the existing one.
Write mode Notations input ● Select an item at the rhythmic position where you want to input a barline. If you want to input a barline on a single staff, select an item that belongs to that staff only. TIP If you want to add repeat barlines at the start/end of a region simultaneously, select items that span the required duration. 2. In the Notations toolbox, click Panels Barlines panel. , then Bars and Barlines 3.
Write mode Notations input Input methods for dynamics You can input dynamics with the keyboard by using the dynamics popover, and with the mouse by using the Dynamics panel.
Write mode Notations input Dynamic or modifier Popover entry fortepiano with separator, such as - f-p, f:p, or f/p subito subito, sub, or sub. possibile possibile, poss, or poss. poco poco molto molto più piu or più meno meno mosso mosso crescendo: < cresc. (text) cresc diminuendo: > dim.
Write mode Notations input NOTE ● Pairs of separate hairpins are treated differently than messa di voce hairpins. For example, separate hairpins each have start and end handles in Write mode, whereas messa di voce hairpins share a single center handle. ● You can input hairpins and messa di voce hairpins directly, without using the popover. ● ● For a crescendo hairpin, press < . ● For a diminuendo hairpin, press > . ● For a crescendo/diminuendo messa di voce hairpin, press Shift-Alt/Opt-, .
Write mode Notations input Gradual Dynamics Contains dynamics such as and , and modifiers, such as poco and niente. Available modifiers are shown at the top of the section in boxes. You can only input modifiers alongside a dynamic. NOTE Pairs of separate hairpins are treated differently than messa di voce hairpins. For example, separate hairpins each have start and end handles in Write mode, whereas messa di voce hairpins share a single center handle.
Write mode Notations input PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input. NOTE If you want to input voice-specific dynamics, the caret must be active. ● Select an item on each staff and at the rhythmic position where you want to input dynamics. If you want to input dynamics across a duration, select items on the staff that span that duration. 2. Optional: If you want to input notes and dynamics onto multiple staves at once, extend the caret to those staves. 3.
Write mode Notations input NOTE ● If you entered a dynamic phrase into the popover during note input, such as pp, each gradual dynamic lasts a quarter note (crotchet). You can lengthen/shorten gradual dynamics and groups of dynamics later. ● Some modifiers, such as molto, appear before immediate dynamics rather than after them, even if you do not enter them in that order. This follows the generally accepted practice for the placement of that text.
Write mode Notations input Inputting dynamics with the panel You can input dynamics and modifiers using the Dynamics panel, both during note input and by adding them to existing music. You can also input different dynamics into each voice independently in multiple-voice contexts; for example, to give the separate staves of grand staff instruments different dynamics. NOTE ● If you want to input dynamics in the middle of tie chains, start note input, then move the caret to the required rhythmic position.
Write mode Notations input During note input, dynamics are input at the caret position. Gradual dynamics are input with a default duration of a quarter note. Voice-specific dynamics are input in the voice indicated by the quarter note symbol beside the caret. Outside of note input, immediate dynamics are added to the first selected item on each selected staff, while gradual dynamics are added across each selection on each selected staff.
Write mode Notations input ● In the Notations toolbox, click Popovers , then Chord Symbols . NOTE If you selected an item on a staff that has local chord symbols at earlier rhythmic positions, the chord symbols popover is automatically set to input local chord symbols when it opens. 3. Optional: Change the type of chord symbol you want to enter in one of the following ways: ● To input local chord symbols, press Alt/Opt-L . ● To input global chord symbols, press Alt/Opt-G .
Write mode Notations input 7. Press Return to close the popover. RESULT The chord symbol specified is input. If you selected an item belonging to an instrument that was not already set to show chord symbols in the current layout, the corresponding player is automatically updated to show chord symbols for all instruments. Global chord symbols apply to all instruments in the project and appear on all staves set to show chord symbols. Local chord symbols only apply to the selected instrument.
Write mode Notations input Chord symbols popover with an example entry for a global chord symbol Chord symbols popover with an example entry for a local chord symbol Chord Symbols button in the Notations toolbox NOTE You can combine multiple types of entries to create more complex chord symbols if you enter them one after another into the chord symbols popover without spaces between them.
Write mode Notations input Chord symbol quality Popover entry Diminished dim, di, or o Augmented aug, au, ag, or + Half-diminished half-dim, halfdim, or hd 6/9 6/9, 69, or % NOTE M and m entries for major and minor are case-sensitive.
Write mode Notations input TIP When using a MIDI keyboard, you can also indicate altered bass notes in any of the following ways: ● Play all notes of the chord together with the altered bass note at the bottom. ● Play the chord and its altered bass note separately: Hold down the keys for the chord, then play the altered bass note while keeping the rest of the keys of the chord depressed.
Write mode Notations input Modal chord symbol Popover entry Melodic minor melodicminor Harmonic minor harmonicminor Whole tone wholetone Half-whole diminished or octatonic diminishedhalfwhole, diminishedsemitonetone, octatonichalfwhole, or octatonicsemitonetone Whole-half diminished or octatonic diminishedwholehalf, diminishedtonesemitone, octatonicwholehalf, or octatonictonesemitone This list is not comprehensive, as there are many possible chord symbols.
Write mode Notations input Navigation during chord symbol input You can move the chord symbols popover manually by different amounts to input chord symbols at other positions without closing and reopening the popover each time. Navigating with a computer keyboard Popover navigation Key command Advance the popover to the next beat, according to the prevailing time signature. Space Move the popover back to the previous beat, according to the prevailing time signature.
Write mode Notations input Inputting chord symbol regions You can input specific regions in which you want to show chord symbols; for example, if an instrument that does not need chord symbols for most of the project has an improvisation section that requires chord symbols to be shown. PROCEDURE 1. 2. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input. ● Select the region on the staff where you want to show chord symbols.
Write mode Notations input Clefs and octave lines popover The following tables contain the entries for the clefs and octave lines popover that you can use to input the different clefs and octave lines available. You can open the clefs and octave lines popover in Write mode in any of the following ways when either an item is selected or the caret is active: ● Press Shift-C . ● In the Notations toolbox, click Popovers ● Select an existing clef or octave line and press Return .
Write mode Notations input Octave shifts for clefs Function of octave shifts Popover entry Shift notes up by one octave +1 Shift notes up by two octaves +2 Shift notes down by one octave -1 Shift notes down by two octaves -2 Set octave shift for concert pitch c Set octave shift for transposed pitch t For example, enter treble+1t for a treble clef shifted up one octave in transposed pitch layouts, causing notes after the clef in transposed pitch layouts to appear an octave lower than they appe
Write mode Notations input Clefs panel The Clefs panel contains the different types of clefs and octave lines available in Dorico SE. It is located in the right zone in Write mode. ● You can hide/show the Clefs panel by clicking Panels toolbox. , then Clefs in the Notations You can also hide/show the right zone by pressing Ctrl/Cmd-9 . The Clefs panel contains the following sections: Common Clefs Contains the clefs you are most likely to need, including treble clef and bass clef.
Write mode Notations input 5. Press Return to close the popover. RESULT During note input, clefs are input at the caret position. Note input continues after inputting the clef, so you can continue inputting notes and clefs as required. When you add clefs to existing music, clefs are added directly before a selected notehead, and apply to all notes on that staff until the next clef, or the end of the flow.
Write mode Notations input Clefs apply to all notes on the staff until the next clef or the end of the flow, whichever comes first. RELATED LINKS Notations toolbox on page 177 Clefs on page 686 Changing your mouse input settings on page 188 Universal Indian Drum Notation on page 1080 Inputting octave lines with the popover You can input octave lines using the clefs and octave lines popover, both during note input and by adding them to existing music.
Write mode Notations input TIP You can also lengthen/shorten octave lines after they have been input.
Write mode Notations input TIP You can also lengthen/shorten octave lines after they have been input. RELATED LINKS Notations toolbox on page 177 Octave lines on page 690 Lengthening/Shortening items on page 395 Changing the pitch of individual notes on page 422 Changing your mouse input settings on page 188 Input methods for holds and pauses You can input holds and pauses with the keyboard by using the holds and pauses popover in Write mode, and with the mouse by using the Holds and Pauses panel.
Write mode Notations input Type of fermata Popover entry Short fermata fermatashort Very short fermata fermataveryshort Short fermata (Henze) fermatashorthenze Long fermata (Henze) fermatalonghenze Curlew (Britten) curlew NOTE The Curlew mark was originally devised by Benjamin Britten for “Curlew River”, a parable for church performance inspired by Japanese Noh theater. It indicates that a player should hold a note or a rest until a synchronization point in asynchronous music.
Write mode Notations input Types of fermatas on page 758 Types of caesuras on page 759 Types of breath marks on page 759 Holds and Pauses panel The Holds and Pauses panel allows you to input all the different types of holds and pauses available in Dorico SE, including alternative versions of fermatas. It is located in the right zone in Write mode. ● You can hide/show the Holds and Pauses panel by clicking Panels Pauses in the Notations toolbox.
Write mode Notations input ● 4. In the Notations toolbox, click Popovers , then Holds and Pauses . Enter the hold or pause you want into the popover. For example, enter fermata for a pause or caesura for a caesura. 5. Press Return to close the popover. RESULT During note input, the specified hold or pause is input at the caret position. When adding holds or pauses to existing music, they are input at the rhythmic position of the earliest selected item.
Write mode Notations input ● Fermatas appear on all staves at the rhythmic position of the note, chord, or rest that corresponds with the end of the fermata. ● Breath marks appear to the right of the caret or selected note. ● Caesuras appear on all staves to the left of the caret or selected note.
Write mode Notations input RELATED LINKS Ornaments on page 815 Arpeggio signs on page 831 Glissando lines on page 837 Jazz articulations on page 859 Jazz ornaments on page 860 Lines on page 894 Input methods for lines on page 351 Ornaments popover The following tables contain the entries for the ornaments popover that you can use to input the different ornaments, arpeggio signs, glissando lines, and jazz articulations available.
Write mode Notations input Trill intervals Trill interval or quality Popover entry Interval degree 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 Unison, second, third, fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh, octave Major M, maj, or major Minor m, min, or minor Perfect p, per, or perf Diminished d, dim, or diminished Augmented a, aug, or augmented EXAMPLE To input a trill with a perfect fifth interval, enter tr p5.
Write mode Notations input Type of jazz articulation Popover entry Fall (bend) fall Fall (smooth) fallsmooth TIP Other ornaments are available in the Ornaments panel. You can specify the type/length of jazz articulations when using the Ornaments panel but not when using the ornaments popover.
Write mode Notations input Type of guitar technique Popover entry Vibrato bar line wbar or w/bar NOTE Must have duration to show its line. Hammer-on ho or hammer NOTE You must select at least two notes assigned to the same string with ascending pitch directions, such as C-D. Pull-off po or pull NOTE You must select at least two notes assigned to the same string with descending pitch directions, such as D-C.
Write mode Notations input Type of guitar technique Popover entry Left-hand tapping with pull-off lhtappull NOTE You must select at least two notes assigned to the same string with descending pitch directions, such as D-C.
Write mode Notations input Arpeggiation Contains the different types of arpeggio signs. NOTE You cannot input arpeggio signs with the mouse during note input. Glissandi Contains the different types of glissando lines. Guitar Contains techniques and pitch alterations commonly associated with guitars, such as guitar bends and vibrato bar scoops.
Write mode Notations input context. If you specified an interval for your trill, the interval applies only to the first note in the selection, but you can also change the interval partway through trills. When adding ornaments to existing music, they are input at the rhythmic position of the earliest selected item. Trills are input at the rhythmic position of the earliest selected item, with an extender line across the rest of the selection.
Write mode Notations input Inputting jazz articulations with the panel on page 321 Changing your mouse input settings on page 188 Inputting arpeggio signs with the popover You can input arpeggio signs using the ornaments popover, both during note input and by adding them to existing notes. You can also input arpeggio signs across notes in multiple voices and on different staves that belong to the same instrument, such as piano or harp. NOTE You can only input one arpeggio sign at a time. PROCEDURE 1.
Write mode Notations input Inputting chords on page 225 Inputting arpeggio signs with the panel You can input arpeggio signs on existing notes using the Ornaments panel. You can also input arpeggio signs across notes in multiple voices and on different staves that belong to the same instrument, such as piano or harp. NOTE ● You can only input one arpeggio sign at a time, and you cannot input arpeggio signs with the mouse during note input.
Write mode Notations input PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the two notes you want to join with a glissando line. For example, select a grace note and a normal note, two notes in different voices, or two notes on different staves belonging to the same instrument. 2. 3. 4. Open the ornaments popover in any of the following ways: ● Press Shift-O . ● In the Notations toolbox, click Popovers , then Ornaments . Enter the appropriate entry for the glissando line you want into the popover.
Write mode Notations input PREREQUISITE You have input at least two notes that you want to join with a glissando. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the two notes you want to join with a glissando line. For example, select a grace note and a normal note, two notes in different voices, or two notes on different staves belonging to the same instrument. 2. In the Notations toolbox, click Panels 3. In the Glissandi section, click the style of glissando line you want.
Write mode Notations input TIP During note input, you can select additional notes before/after the last input note without deactivating the caret by pressing Shift-Right Arrow / Shift-Left Arrow . ● Select the notes to which you want to add jazz articulations. 2. Optional: If you want to input jazz articulations onto multiple staves at once, extend the caret to those staves. 3. Optional: During note input, input at least one note. 4. Open the ornaments popover in any of the following ways: 5.
Write mode Notations input ● These steps describe inputting with the default mouse input preference Create item at selection. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input. TIP During note input, you can select additional notes before/after the last input note without deactivating the caret by pressing Shift-Right Arrow / Shift-Left Arrow . ● Select the notes to which you want to add jazz articulations. 2.
Write mode Notations input Ornaments panel on page 314 Guitar bends on page 842 Guitar pre-bends and pre-dives on page 844 Guitar post-bends on page 845 Vibrato bar dives and returns on page 847 Vibrato bar techniques on page 852 Tapping on page 853 Hammer-ons and pull-offs on page 854 Inputting guitar bends with the popover You can input guitar bends between existing notes, including between grace notes and normal notes, using the ornaments popover.
Write mode Notations input Inputting guitar bends with the panel You can input guitar bends between existing notes, including between grace notes and normal notes, using the Ornaments panel. You can input guitar bends between both adjacent and non-adjacent notes. NOTE ● These steps describe inputting with the default mouse input preference Create item at selection.
Write mode Notations input PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes before which you want to input guitar pre-bends/pre-dives. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Pre-bend interval in the Guitar Pre-bends group. 3. Change the interval as required. 4. Optional: To turn the guitar pre-bends into guitar pre-dives, activate Vibrato bar pre-bend and the corresponding checkbox in the Guitar Pre-bends group. RESULT Guitar pre-bends of the specified interval are input before the selected notes.
Write mode Notations input PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input. TIP During note input, you can select additional notes before/after the last input note without deactivating the caret by pressing Shift-Right Arrow / Shift-Left Arrow . ● Select the notes to which you want to add vibrato bar dives. 2. Optional: If you want to input vibrato bar dives onto multiple staves at once, extend the caret to those staves. 3.
Write mode Notations input RELATED LINKS Vibrato bar techniques on page 852 Notations toolbox on page 177 Ornaments popover on page 310 Ornaments panel on page 314 Extending the caret to multiple staves on page 194 Moving the caret manually on page 195 Jazz articulations on page 859 Inputting jazz articulations with the popover on page 320 Inputting jazz articulations with the panel on page 321 Changing the type/length of existing jazz articulations on page 861 Changing the line style of smooth jazz articul
Write mode Notations input 8. Press Return to close the popover. RESULT Vibrato bar dives are input between notes with descending pitch directions, and vibrato bar returns are input between notes with ascending pitch directions. If a vibrato bar dive ends on the same note that a vibrato bar return starts on, they appear as a V on tablature with the bend interval shown at the point.
Write mode Notations input RESULT Vibrato bar dives are input between notes with descending pitch directions, and vibrato bar returns are input between notes with ascending pitch directions. If a vibrato bar dive ends on the same note that a vibrato bar return starts on, they appear as a V on tablature with the bend interval shown at the point.
Write mode Notations input AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can input vibrato bar indications to clarify the vibrato bar scoops should be played using the vibrato bar.
Write mode Notations input Inputting vibrato bar dips with the popover You can input vibrato bar dips using the ornaments popover, both during note input and by adding them to existing music. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input. ● Select an item on the staff at the rhythmic position where you want to input a vibrato bar dip. 2. Optional: If you want to input vibrato bar dips onto multiple staves at once, extend the caret to those staves. 3.
Write mode Notations input RESULT During note input, vibrato bar dips are input at the caret position. When adding vibrato bar dips to existing music, they are input at the position of the earliest selected item. By default, vibrato bar dips have half step intervals, are placed above the staff, and only appear on notation staves, not tablature.
Write mode Notations input Extending the caret to multiple staves on page 194 Lengthening/Shortening items on page 395 Playing technique duration on page 889 Inputting vibrato bar indications/lines with the panel You can input vibrato bar indications/lines using the Ornaments panel, both during note input and by adding them to existing music. When vibrato bar indications are input across a range of items, they are input with duration and show a duration line, which is dashed by default. PROCEDURE 1.
Write mode Notations input NOTE ● If you want to input hammer-ons, you must select at least two notes assigned to the same string with ascending pitch directions, such as C-D. ● If you want to input pull-offs or tapping with pull-offs, you must select at least two notes assigned to the same string with descending pitch directions, such as D-C.
Write mode Notations input Inputting tapping You can input right-hand and left-hand tapping indications on any notes belonging to fretted instruments using the ornaments popover, both during note input and by adding them to existing notes. You can also add tapping with hammer-ons/pull-offs to existing notes. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input.
Write mode Notations input Deleting guitar techniques on page 858 Input methods for playing techniques, pedal lines, string indicators, and harp pedal diagrams You can input playing techniques with the keyboard by using the playing techniques popover, and with the mouse by using the Playing Techniques panel. Pedal lines are considered playing techniques in Dorico SE because both affect the sound that the instrument produces.
Write mode Notations input Playing Techniques button in the Notations toolbox Playing techniques popover with an example entry for inputting a playing technique Playing techniques popover with an example entry for inputting a pedal line Playing techniques Playing technique Popover entry Vibrato vibrato Senza vibrato senza vibrato Naturale (nat.) nat Con sord.
Write mode Notations input Playing technique Popover entry Damp damp Damp (large) damp large Full barré full barre Half barré half barre Strum up strum up Strum down strum down Left hand lh Right hand rh This list is not comprehensive as there are many valid playing techniques. It is intended to illustrate how you can structure your entry to input different types of common playing techniques.
Write mode Notations input Type of pedal line or retake Popover entry Una corda pedal line unacorda Stop una corda pedal line u* Harp pedaling Example harp pedaling Popover entry D, C, B♭, E♭, F, G, A DCBbEbFGA, BbEb, or --^|^--- D, C♯, B, E, F♯, G♯, A DC#BEF#G#A, C#F#G#, or -v-|-vv- TIP The pipe character is optional.
Write mode Notations input Common Contains commonly used playing techniques that also apply to multiple different instrument families, such as “mute” and “legato”. Wind Contains playing techniques typically only used for wind instruments, such as “key clicks” and “whistle tones”. Brass Contains playing techniques typically only used for brass instruments, such as “cup mute” and “stopped”.
Write mode Notations input ● If you want to input playing techniques in the middle of tie chains, start note input, then move the caret to the required rhythmic position. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input. ● Select an item on the staff and at the rhythmic position where you want to input a playing technique. If you want to input playing techniques with duration, select items on the staff that span that duration. 2.
Write mode Notations input Adjoining playing techniques, or playing techniques that were input together or in sequence, are automatically grouped together, both during note input and when adding playing techniques to existing notes. During note input, playing techniques are input at the caret position and extend automatically if you included an open-ended playing technique with duration.
Write mode Notations input 2. In the Notations toolbox, click Panels Techniques panel. , then Playing Techniques 3. In the Playing Techniques panel, click the playing technique you want. to show the Playing RESULT The specified playing technique is input. It is considered voice-specific by default, meaning it only applies to the voice indicated by the caret indicator during step input or the selected voice when adding playing techniques to existing notes.
Write mode Notations input When you start entering a pedal line into the playing techniques popover, a menu appears that shows valid pedal lines containing the letters/words you enter, which you can select. 4. Press Return to close the popover. The pedal line is input. 5. Optional: During note input, advance the caret and extend the pedal line in any of the following ways: ● Press Space . ● In the Keyboard, Fretboard, or Drum Pads panel toolbar, click Advance Caret .
Write mode Notations input NOTE You cannot add retakes to sostenuto or una corda pedal lines. Retakes only appear for sustain pedal lines with the Line continuation type. PREREQUISITE You have input a sustain pedal line. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input. ● Select an item on each staff and at each rhythmic position where you want to input retakes. 2.
Write mode Notations input PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select items on the staff where you want to input a pedal line that span the required duration. 2. In the Notations toolbox, click Panels Techniques panel. 3. In the Playing Techniques panel, expand the Keyboard section. 4. Click the pedal line you want. , then Playing Techniques to show the Playing RESULT The pedal line is input across the selected range.
Write mode Notations input 4. Click Retake Pedal . RESULT The retake is input at each selected rhythmic position on each selected staff. TIP ● Alternatively, when nothing is selected in the music area, you can click Retake Pedal in the Keyboard section of the Playing Techniques panel, and then click at each rhythmic position where you want to input the retake.
Write mode Notations input RELATED LINKS Playing techniques popover on page 336 Harp pedaling on page 866 Hiding/Showing harp pedaling in layouts on page 868 Changing the appearance of harp pedal diagrams on page 867 Hiding/Showing colors for notes out of range on page 795 Calculating harp pedal diagrams based on existing music You can automatically calculate suitable harp pedal diagrams based on the notes you have already input, either from a single point onwards or within a selected region.
Write mode Notations input For example, enter string1 for just a string 1 indicator or string3-> for a string 3 indicator with duration. 5. Press Return to close the popover. Open-ended string indicators, such as string3->, automatically extend during note input as you continue inputting notes, or if you advance the caret by pressing Space or clicking Advance Caret in the Keyboard, Fretboard, or Drum Pads panel toolbar. 6.
Write mode Notations input mouse input preference to Load pointer with item so that you do not have to reselect the string indicator for each note. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input. ● Select an item on the staff and at the rhythmic position where you want to input a string indicator outside the staff. If you want to input a string indicator with a duration line, select items on the staff that span that duration. 2.
Write mode Notations input ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes belonging to fretted instruments beside which you want to show string indicators. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Show in the String Indicators group. RESULT String indicators are shown in the staff beside each selected note. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
Write mode Notations input Lines panel The Lines panel contains the different types of lines available in Dorico SE. It is located in the right zone in Write mode. ● You can hide/show the Lines panel by clicking Panels toolbox. , then Lines in the Notations You can also hide/show the right zone by pressing Ctrl/Cmd-9 . The Lines panel contains the following sections: Horizontal Contains the different horizontal lines available.
Write mode Notations input ● If you want to input a barline-/rhythmic position-attached line, select items that span the required duration of the line. ● If you want to input a horizontal line that is attached to noteheads at one end but barlines/rhythmic positions at the other end, select the required note and any item at the required rhythmic position of the other end. 2. In the Notations toolbox, click Panels 3.
Write mode Notations input ● These steps describe inputting with the default mouse input preference Create item at selection. You cannot create cross-staff and cross-voice vertical lines if your preference is set to Load pointer with item. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select at least one note at the same rhythmic position in each voice to which you want to add a vertical line.
Write mode Notations input ● 2. 3. Select an item on the staff and at the rhythmic position where you want to input text. Open the text editor in any of the following ways: ● To input staff-attached text, press Shift-X or click Popovers Notations toolbox. , then Text in the ● To input staff-attached text with a specific paragraph style, choose Write > Create Text > [Paragraph style]. ● To input system-attached text, press Shift-Alt/Opt-X .
Write mode Notations input Text editor options in Write mode The text editor allows you to add and format text. In Write mode, it opens when you add or edit text items. The text editor provides the following options: 1 Character Style Allows you to change the appearance of selected text within paragraphs. This overrides the paragraph style applied to the corresponding paragraph. 2 Paragraph Style Allows you to change the paragraph style applied to the whole text item.
Write mode Notations input Allows you to choose one of the following alignments for the text item relative to its rhythmic position: ● Align Left ● Align Center ● Align Right 11 Line Types Allows you to show any of the following types of lines, in any combination, on selected text: ● Underline ● Overline ● Strikethrough TIP You can also make selected text underlined by pressing Ctrl/Cmd-U .
Write mode Notations input The Insert Music Text dialog comprises the following: 1 Search field Allows you to search for music symbols by their SMuFL name. When you start entering text, a menu appears that shows valid music symbols containing the letters/words you enter, which you can select. 2 Range menu Allows you to select which SMuFL glyph range is available in the music symbol selector.
Write mode Notations input Inputting lyrics You can input lyrics by entering text into the lyrics popover, and you can advance the lyrics popover to the next note on the staff without closing and reopening it for every note. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the note on the staff from which you want to start inputting lyrics. 2. Open the lyrics popover in any of the following ways: 3. 4. 5. ● Press Shift-L . ● In the Notations toolbox, click Popovers , then Lyrics .
Write mode Notations input TIP ● You can later change whether a gap or a hyphen appears between lyrics by changing their syllable type. ● You can also input lyrics by copying and pasting them; for example, from an external text editor.
Write mode Notations input Chorus lines You can input chorus lines by pressing Up Arrow when the lyrics popover is open. You can do this when inputting lyrics below the staff and above the staff. A c, for “chorus lines”, is shown on the left-hand side of the popover. The lyrics popover with an example entry for a chorus line Lyric line translations You can input lyric line translations by pressing Alt/Opt - Down Arrow when the lyrics popover is open.
Write mode Notations input Inputting figured bass You can input figured bass using the figured bass popover, both for all instruments or only for individual instruments. You can also open the figured bass popover during note input; however, inputting a figure stops note input. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select an item on the staff and at the rhythmic position where you want to start inputting figured bass. 2. Open the figured bass popover in any of the following ways: ● Press Shift-G .
Write mode Notations input Dorico SE calculates and saves the pitches implied by the figures you enter in relation to the lowest note at that rhythmic position. This semantic understanding of the harmony implied by figures allows Dorico SE to update the displayed figures on different staves and if you transpose or change the pitch of notes. Global figures apply to all instruments in the project and appear on all staves whose players are set to show figured bass.
Write mode Notations input ● Choose Write > Create Figured Bass. When inputting global figured bass, the icon on the left-hand side of the popover matches the corresponding button in the Notations toolbox. When inputting local figured bass, the icon on the left-hand side of the popover appears smaller and includes the icon for a single player.
Write mode Notations input Type of figure Example popover entry Follow Engraving Options for this figure only R, r, V, v, or ? NOTE Must be at the start of the popover entry. Follow input literally for this figure only O, o, or ! NOTE Must be at the start of the popover entry. This list is not comprehensive. It is intended to illustrate how you can structure your entry to input different figures.
Write mode Notations input Type of accidental/alteration Popover entry Double flat bb or db Triple flat bbb or tb Raise figure by a half-step (semitone) + Lower figure by a half-step (semitone) - Diminished figure d Unaltered figure u RELATED LINKS Notations toolbox on page 177 Figured bass on page 719 Figured bass hold lines on page 722 Hiding/Showing figured bass hold/suspension lines on page 723 Lengthening/Shortening figured bass hold lines on page 724 Showing brackets on figured bass hol
Write mode Notations input Popover navigation Key command Move the popover to the next/previous figure. Ctrl/Cmd-Right Arrow / Ctrl/Cmd-Left Arrow RELATED LINKS Key Commands page in the Preferences dialog on page 54 Inputting rehearsal marks You can input rehearsal marks with the mouse and the keyboard. You can input rehearsal marks during note input and later by adding them to existing music. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input.
Write mode Notations input Inputting markers/timecodes You can input markers at specific positions in time. In Dorico SE, timecodes are automatically shown alongside markers. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, move the playhead to the time position where you want to input a marker. 2. Press Shift-Alt/Opt-M to open the Add Marker dialog. 3. Enter the marker text you want into the Text field. 4. Optional: Change the timecode in the Timecode field. 5. Click OK to input the marker and close the dialog.
Write mode Notations input Text Allows you to enter custom text that is shown in the marker. Timecode Allows you to specify the timecode at which you want to input the marker. For example, if you already know the timecodes for each marker, you can enter them directly rather than positioning the playhead at the position of each marker. Valid range Displays the timecode range of the flow.
Write mode Notations input Find Tempo dialog The Find Tempo dialog allows you to calculate tempos that best accommodate your important markers; for example, by identifying which tempos cause markers to coincide as closely as possible with strong beats. ● You can open the Find Tempo dialog in Write mode by clicking Find Tempo in the Markers section of the Video panel. NOTE ● The Find Tempo dialog only considers markers in a single flow.
Write mode Notations input Tempos found Contains a list of possible tempos that you can select to see how they affect the position of your markers relative to beats. The list is updated automatically when you change options such as Tempo range and Beat unit. The list contains columns for the following information: ● BPM: Stands for “beats per minute”. Lists different possible tempos according to their metronome mark value. ● IFO: Stands for “important frames off”.
Write mode Notations input TIP To indicate repeats using repeat barlines, you can input repeat barlines using the available input methods for barlines.
Write mode Notations input Repeat markers Type of repeat marker Popover entry D.C. dc, D.C., da capo, and so on D.C. al Fine dcalf, DC al Fine, D.C. al Fine, and so on D.C. al Coda dcalc, DC al Coda, D.C. al Coda, and so on D.S. ds, D.S., dal segno, and so on D.S. al Fine dsalf, DS al Fine, D.S. al Fine, and so on D.S. al Coda dsalc, DS al Coda, D.S.
Write mode Notations input Multi-note tremolos Type of tremolo Popover entry One stroke /2, \2, or 12 Two strokes //2, \\2, or 22 Three strokes ///2, \\\2, or 32 Four strokes ////2, \\\\2, or 42 Remove all tremolos 0 or clear Slash regions Slash region Popover entry New slash region slash Numbered bar regions Numbered bar region Popover entry New numbered bar region nb, num, numbars, or number bars Bar repeats Type of bar repeat Popover entry Repeat last bar % or %1 Repeat last 2 ba
Write mode Notations input Inputting tremolos with the popover on page 380 Inputting slash regions on page 383 Inputting bar repeats on page 384 Inputting numbered bar regions on page 385 Bars and barlines popover on page 275 Repeat endings on page 923 Repeat markers on page 927 Tremolos on page 1046 Rhythm slashes on page 945 Bar repeats on page 933 Numbered bar regions on page 940 Repeat Structures panel The Repeat Structures panel contains the different types of repeat notations available in Dorico SE,
Write mode Notations input RELATED LINKS Notations toolbox on page 177 Repeats popover on page 372 Inputting repeat endings with the popover You can input repeat endings using the repeats popover, both during note input and by adding them to existing music. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input. TIP During note input, you can select additional notes before/after the last input note without deactivating the caret by pressing Shift-Right Arrow / Shift-Left Arrow . ● 2.
Write mode Notations input NOTE Your selection must start from the first bar following the previous repeat ending segment. 2. Open the repeats popover in any of the following ways: ● Press Shift-R . ● In the Notations toolbox, click Popovers , then Repeats . 3. Enter add into the popover. 4. Press Return to close the popover. 5. Optional: Repeat these steps as many times as required for the number of additional endings you want. RESULT A new repeat ending segment is added.
Write mode Notations input 2. In the Notations toolbox, click Panels Structures panel. , then Repeat Structures 3. In the Repeat Endings section, click Create Repeat Ending to show the Repeat . RESULT The repeat ending is input, with the first ending segment covering the bars in which you selected items, and a second ending segment created automatically in the following bar. An end repeat barline is created at the end of the first ending if none exists already.
Write mode Notations input TIP You can also add additional repeat ending segments by selecting the repeat ending and changing the value for No. endings in the Repeat Endings group of the Properties panel. However, No. endings only adds additional repeat ending segments that contain one bar, and does not automatically input or reposition repeat barlines. You must input repeat barlines as appropriate manually.
Write mode Notations input Repeat markers that indicate the end of a section, such as Fine and D.C. al Coda, are right-aligned with the selected rhythmic position. RELATED LINKS Repeats popover on page 372 Repeat markers on page 927 Repeats in playback on page 460 Hiding/Showing repeat markers on page 929 Inputting repeat markers with the panel You can input repeat markers using the Repeat Structures panel, both during note input and by adding them to existing music. PROCEDURE 1.
Write mode Notations input TIP During note input, you can select additional notes before/after the last input note without deactivating the caret by pressing Shift-Right Arrow / Shift-Left Arrow . ● Select the notes to which you want to add tremolos. NOTE If you want to input multi-note tremolos, you must select at least two notes that are in the same voice, have the same duration, and are notated using a single notehead. The notes can also be tuplets and cross-staff notes. 2. 3.
Write mode Notations input AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can enable independent voice playback for individual instruments to hear different sounds in different voices simultaneously; for example, if you have tremolos in one voice and slurs in another voice.
Write mode Notations input Tremolos with release show single-note tremolo strokes on all notes in tie chains apart from the last note. Tremolos with attack show single-note tremolo strokes on all notes in tie chains apart from the first note. Multi-note tremolos with the number of tremolo strokes specified are input between selected individual notes and the notes immediately after them, or between selected pairs of notes. The notated duration of notes in multi-note tremolos is automatically updated.
Write mode Notations input RESULT During note input, slash regions are input spanning the duration of the selected note or item, which is usually the last input note. When adding slash regions to existing music, they span the selected duration. Slash regions are automatically formatted as appropriate for the meter. If you later change the time signature, slash regions retain their duration but the appearance of slashes within them automatically updates.
Write mode Notations input NOTE ● You can also input bar repeat regions during note input; however, this inputs bar repeat regions from the bar containing the currently selected note. As bar repeats are mostly shown in empty bars, this is likely to produce unintended results. ● You can also input one-bar repeat regions by clicking Create Bar Repeat Region in the Bar Repeats section of the Repeat Structures panel, or by choosing Write > Create Bar Repeat Region.
Write mode Selecting notes/items Repeat Structures panel on page 375 Numbered bar regions on page 940 Numbered bar region counts on page 941 Hiding/Showing numbered bar regions on page 941 Lengthening/Shortening items on page 395 Selecting notes/items In Dorico SE, there are multiple different ways you can select notes and items in your project, from selecting items individually to making large selections covering multiple staves. You can also change whether notes play back during note input/selection.
Write mode Selecting notes/items ● Press Ctrl/Cmd-D . ● Choose Edit > Select None. ● Click outside of the staves within the music area.
Write mode Selecting notes/items Selecting multiple items using marquee selections You can use a marquee selection to select multiple notes and notations at the same time within a specific area in Write mode and Play mode. PROCEDURE 1. In the status bar, click Marquee Tool . 2. In the music area, click and drag across the area where you want to select everything. A gray rectangle indicates which notes and notations will be selected.
Write mode Selecting notes/items Select more of the currently selected types of items You can use Edit > Select More ( Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-A ) to expand your current selection horizontally and incrementally to other items of the same types and in the selected voices and staves in Write mode. For items that span multiple bars and systems, they are selected in the earliest bar/system in which they exist. 1. The first expansion is to the boundaries of the current bar, both to the left and right.
Write mode Selecting notes/items The system track when the mouse pointer hovers over it The system track with a region selected When you have selected a region in the system track, the following options are available: 1 Set Edit Stop Position Allows you to set and delete Insert mode stop positions. 2 Delete Allows you to delete the selected region. NOTE When you hover over Delete, the highlight color of the selected region changes.
Write mode Selecting notes/items Hiding/Showing the system track The system track is shown by default in new projects, but you can hide/show it in Write mode at any time. PROCEDURE ● Hide/Show the system track in any of the following ways: ● Press Alt/Opt-T . ● Choose View > System Track. RESULT The system track is hidden/shown.
Write mode Selecting notes/items Selecting beats with the system track The system track allows you to select all items, including system objects, on all staves in the system across the selected beats. PREREQUISITE The system track is shown. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, press and hold Alt/Opt . Grid lines that match the current rhythmic grid resolution appear in the system track. 2. Without releasing Alt/Opt , click and drag to the right/left along the system track.
Write mode Selecting notes/items Voices Allows you to filter voices according to their stem direction. You can also filter slash voices. Dynamics Allows you to filter all dynamics, or just gradual or immediate dynamics. Tempos Allows you to filter all tempo marks, or just absolute, relative, or gradual tempo changes. Lyrics Allows you to filter all lyrics, or just lyrics with a specific line number, type, or staffrelative placement. NOTE There is no filter for barlines.
Write mode Editing items 4. Optional: If you want notes to play back with a fixed volume instead of the prevailing dynamic, activate Use fixed volume to play selected notes and change the value in the value field. 5. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT When the option is activated, notes play back as you input them during note input and when you select them. When it is deactivated, notes do not play back. When Use fixed volume to play selected notes is activated, notes play back with the set volume.
Write mode Editing items Lengthening/Shortening items You can lengthen/shorten items with duration rhythmically after they have been input; for example, if you want an octave line to cover more/fewer notes. Lengthening figured bass or playing techniques, including string indicators outside the staff and vibrato bar indications, that were input without a specified duration gives them duration and shows duration or hold lines if required. PREREQUISITE You have chosen the appropriate rhythmic grid resolution.
Write mode Editing items RESULT The selected items are lengthened/shortened by moving their end rhythmically to the right/left. Most items are lengthened/shortened either by the current rhythmic grid resolution or to the next/previous notehead, whichever is closer, or directly to the next/previous notehead. Bar repeat regions are lengthened/shortened by the duration of their grouping. Numbered bar regions are lengthened/shortened by bars. Slurs are lengthened/shortened to notes.
Write mode Editing items Playing technique continuation lines on page 888 Playing technique duration on page 889 Pedal line start signs, hooks, and continuation lines on page 878 Sustain pedal retakes and pedal level changes on page 874 Slashes in multiple-voice contexts on page 947 Cross-staff and cross-voice slurs on page 972 Groups of dynamics on page 714 Hiding/Showing figured bass hold/suspension lines on page 723 Changing existing items You can change all items that have an associated popover, rather
Write mode Editing items Changing the size of notes/items You can change the size of individual notes and items using the default scale sizes for cues, grace notes, a custom scale size, or a custom scale size in addition to a default scale size. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. TIP If you want to change the size of notes because you want them to be grace notes or cues, you can input them as either grace notes or cues instead.
Write mode Editing items Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 544 Changing the staff-relative placement of items You can flip any item that can be placed both above/below the staff to change their staff-relative placement; for example, if you want to change the stem direction of notes quickly. For many items, you can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. NOTE These steps do not apply to text in text frames or pedal lines.
Write mode Editing items Resetting the appearance of items You can reset all changes you have made to the appearance of individual items, which returns them to the default settings. For some items, you can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. Properties relating to the appearance of items include those that change their style, type, and some additions, such as poco a poco text for dynamics.
Write mode Hiding non-printing elements RESULT All properties that affect the position of the selected items are reset to their default settings. If the property scope was set to Locally, any properties that are layout-specific and frame chain-specific are only reset in the current layout and frame chain. Hiding non-printing elements You can temporarily hide all visible elements that do not print, such as signposts and selection highlights.
Write mode Navigation Navigating to other items in the music area You can navigate to other notes and items in the music area after you have selected a note/item; for example, if you want to move the selection to other notes along the staff without using the mouse. PROCEDURE 1. Select an item in the music area. ● If you want to navigate through notes, select a note. ● If you want to navigate through a particular type of item, such as rehearsal marks, select an item of that type.
Write mode Navigation Going to flows You can go to the next/previous flow in the current layout, which automatically brings the start of that flow into view in the music area. This is particularly useful when navigating around layouts that contain many flows. These steps function in Setup mode and Write mode. PROCEDURE ● Go to a different flow in one of the following ways: ● To go to the previous flow in the layout, choose Edit > Go To > Go To Previous Flow.
Write mode Navigation Going to bars You can go to any specific bar in any flow in the current layout; for example, to jump quickly to the exact bar that requires changes when editing music. These steps function in Setup, Write, and Play modes. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-G to open the Go To Bar dialog. 2. Select the flow containing the bar to which you want to go from the Flow menu. 3. Enter the bar number to which you want to go into the Bar field. 4. Click OK.
Write mode Navigation ● To move the view to the right/left, Shift -scroll upwards/downwards on a mouse wheel or swipe to the right/left on a touchpad. ● To navigate to the next page, press End (horizontal page arrangements) or Page Down (vertical page arrangements) . ● To navigate to the previous page, press Home (horizontal page arrangements) or Page Up (vertical page arrangements) . ● To navigate to the first page, press Ctrl/Cmd-Home . ● To navigate to the last page, press Ctrl/Cmd-End .
Write mode Signposts RESULT The zoom level in the music area is changed. If you had anything selected, Dorico SE uses your selection as the focal point of the zoom. If you had nothing selected, Dorico SE focuses on the area previously in the center of the view.
Write mode Insert mode PROCEDURE ● Hide/Show signposts in any of the following ways: ● To hide/show all signposts, choose View > Signposts > Hide Signposts. ● To hide/show signposts for specific items, choose View > Signposts > [Type of item]. Insert mode Insert mode changes how notes are input and how edits you make outside of note input affect the music.
Write mode Insert mode Changing the duration of notes on page 235 Inputting notes with rhythm dots on page 204 Deleting notes/items on page 411 Insert mode scopes Insert mode has different scopes, from affecting only selected voices to affecting all players and changing the duration of the current bar. All scopes apply until the Insert mode stop position or the end of the flow, whichever comes first.
Write mode Insert mode Deleting notes/items on page 411 Arranging tools on page 411 Players on page 106 Voices on page 1081 Time signatures on page 1032 Pick-up bars on page 1036 Changing the Insert mode scope You can change the Insert mode scope; for example, if you want to switch from inserting notes into the selected voice only to inserting rhythmic time for all players. The current Insert mode scope is indicated in the Notes toolbox and by the caret during note input.
Write mode Insert mode When Insert mode is activated, existing notes that would otherwise be pushed beyond the stop position are deleted. TIP You can also move stop positions to barlines by clicking the top handle and dragging to the right/left. EXAMPLE Insert mode stop position across two piano staves RELATED LINKS System track on page 389 Deleting Insert mode stop positions You can delete Insert mode stop positions after they have been set.
Write mode Arranging tools TIP When the mouse pointer is in the correct position, the stop position appears as a dotted line. Arranging tools Arranging tools in Dorico SE allow you to allocate notes to different staves and voices quickly and efficiently. These tools include copying notes and items to multiple staves at the same time, and multiple times within a selected range, moving notes between staves, and changing the voices of notes.
Write mode Arranging tools RESULT All selected notes/items are deleted from your project. Dorico SE moves your selection to the most logical and nearby item to the deleted items. For example, if you deleted a note, Dorico SE’s first choice is the nearest note in the same voice. If Insert mode was activated, notes following deleted notes move up to fill the gap. If Insert mode was deactivated, deleted notes are replaced by implicit rests as appropriate.
Write mode Arranging tools RELATED LINKS Signposts on page 406 Editing items on page 394 Selecting notes/items on page 386 Filters on page 392 Selecting lyrics using filters on page 775 Deleting rests on page 960 Note and rest grouping on page 653 Turning existing notes into tuplets on page 1053 Turning tuplets into normal notes on page 1053 Insert mode on page 407 Insert mode scopes on page 408 Groups of dynamics on page 714 Linked dynamics on page 715 Accidental duration rules on page 609 Changing the reh
Write mode Arranging tools RELATED LINKS Copying and pasting lyrics on page 772 Filters on page 392 Large selections on page 388 Selecting/Deselecting notes and items individually on page 386 Moving notes/items to other staves on page 419 Resetting notes crossed to other staves on page 649 Moving notes/items rhythmically on page 416 Lengthening/Shortening items on page 395 Changing the duration of notes on page 235 Splitting notes by duration on page 237 Disabling automatic linking of dynamics and slurs whe
Write mode Arranging tools RELATED LINKS Filters on page 392 Large selections on page 388 Linked dynamics on page 715 Linked slurs on page 975 Resetting notes crossed to other staves on page 649 Copying and pasting notes/items to fill a selected range You can copy and paste items, including notes and notations, multiple times within a selected range at once; for example, if you want to fill multiple bars with the same phrase. NOTE You can only copy and paste items that have a duration to fill a selection.
Write mode Arranging tools 2. In the category list, click Note Input and Editing. 3. In the Editing section, deactivate Link dynamics and slurs to existing items when pasting. 4. Click Apply, then Close. RELATED LINKS Linked dynamics on page 715 Linked slurs on page 975 Moving notes/items rhythmically You can move notes and items to new rhythmic positions to the right/left along staves after they have been input. For example, if you want a cresc. dynamic to start a beat later.
Write mode Arranging tools ● 2. Moving multiple playing techniques or dynamics in the same group at the same time ungroups them. Optional: If you selected notes and do not want them to overwrite existing notes they pass over as part of their move, activate one of the following: ● If you want the selected notes to overlap with existing notes, activate Chord mode by in the Notes toolbox.
Write mode Arranging tools Items that can have multiple instances at the same rhythmic position on the same staff include dynamics, octave lines, playing techniques, horizontal lines, slash regions, and text items. However, if you move multiple items together, any existing items of the same type between the selected items or that they pass over as part of the move are deleted or shortened accordingly unless Insert mode is activated.
Write mode Arranging tools Splitting pedal lines on page 877 Hiding/Showing colors for notes out of range on page 795 Groups of dynamics on page 714 Groups of playing techniques on page 891 Deleting notes/items on page 411 Input methods for lines on page 351 Input methods for ornaments, arpeggio signs, glissando lines, and jazz articulations on page 309 Input methods for guitar bends and guitar techniques on page 322 Input methods for clefs and octave lines on page 298 Input methods for repeats and tremolos
Write mode Arranging tools RELATED LINKS Filters on page 392 Large selections on page 388 Creating cross-staff beams/tremolos on page 645 Moving notes/items rhythmically on page 416 Copying and pasting notes/items to multiple staves on page 414 Changing the duration of notes on page 235 Changing the pitch of individual notes on page 422 Changing the positions of system objects on page 993 Input methods for playing techniques, pedal lines, string indicators, and harp pedal diagrams on page 336 Changing the
Write mode Arranging tools Inputting notes into slash voices on page 208 Large selections on page 388 Filters on page 392 Implicit rests in multiple-voice contexts on page 958 Deleting rests on page 960 Changing the stem direction of notes on page 804 Changing the slash voice type on page 954 Changing the duration of notes on page 235 Tuplets on page 1051 Signposts on page 406 Swapping the contents of voices You can swap the contents of two voices that contain musical material. PROCEDURE 1.
Write mode Transposing tools Transposing tools In Dorico SE, you can change the pitches of existing notes in a variety of ways. RELATED LINKS Arranging tools on page 411 Transposing instruments on page 118 Concert vs. transposed pitch on page 154 Changing the pitch of individual notes You can raise/lower the pitch and register of individual notes, including grace notes, after they have been input by octave divisions, staff position, and octaves. PROCEDURE 1.
Write mode Transposing tools Transposing selections You can transpose whole flows or specific selections, including selected key signatures, using the Transpose dialog. TIP Dorico SE automatically shows the appropriate key signatures for transposing instruments in transposing layouts. PROCEDURE 1. Optional: In Write mode, select the region you want to transpose. NOTE ● If you want to transpose key signatures, you must include them in your selection.
Write mode Transposing tools Transpose dialog The Transpose dialog allows you to transpose whole flows or selections of notes, including key signatures. You can transpose according to an interval and quality or by a set number of octave divisions. ● You can open the Transpose dialog in Write mode by choosing Write > Transpose. The Transpose dialog contains the following sections: 1 Transposition options Contains options that allow you to specify the transposition you want.
Write mode Transposing tools NOTE The Transpose dialog does not allow transpositions that would result in impossible notations, such as sharper than a triple sharp, or that require a microtonal accidental that does not exist in the tonality system in place at the position of your selection.
Write mode Transposing tools 4. Activate Lock to Duration in any of the following ways: ● Press L . ● In the Notes toolbox, click Lock to Duration 5. Enter the pitches you want. 6. Optional: Press L or click Lock to Duration . again to deactivate Lock to Duration. NOTE Lock to Duration automatically deactivates when you reach the last existing note on the staff. By default, normal note input continues using the previous note value selected before you activated Lock to Duration.
Write mode Transposing tools 3. 4. Respell the selected notes in any of the following ways: ● To respell them upwards, press Alt/Opt-= or click Respell Using Note Name Above in the Keyboard panel toolbar. ● To respell them downwards, press Alt/Opt-- or click Respell Using Note Name Below in the Keyboard panel toolbar. ● To respell them automatically, choose Write > Respell > Respell Notes Automatically to open the Respell Notes Automatically dialog.
Write mode Transposing tools The Respell Notes Automatically dialog contains the following options: Additional context at start Allows you to specify additional musical context before the selected notes that you want Dorico SE to consider when calculating automatic note spellings. ● None: Only notes in the selection. ● To start of bar: Includes notes back to the start of the earliest selected bar. ● Previous bar: Includes notes back to the start of the previous bar.
Write mode Transposing tools flow. Useful in tonality systems that contain multiple accidentals with the same pitch delta.
Write mode Splitting flows RELATED LINKS Switching between layouts on page 40 Respelling notes on page 426 Transposing selections on page 423 Splitting flows You can split flows at specific rhythmic positions. For example, if you want the music from a specific bar onwards to be a new flow, separate from the preceding music. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select a note or item at the position where you want to split the flow. 2. Choose Write > Split Flow.
Write mode Comments By default, comments are shown in the music area. They appear as speech bubble symbols as close as possible to their attached position. Comments that are replies are stacked vertically below the original comment. All comments in the current layout are listed in the Comments panel in Write mode. Clicking a comment, either in the Comments panel or in the music area, automatically moves the view to bring that rhythmic position into focus.
Write mode Comments Comments panel The Comments panel shows all the comments in the current layout as a list. Replies to comments are indented to indicate their relationship to the original comment. The Comments panel is located in the right zone in Write mode. ● You can hide/show the Comments panel by clicking Panels Notations toolbox. , then Comments in the You can also hide/show the right zone by pressing Ctrl/Cmd-9 .
Write mode Comments The action bar at the bottom of the panel contains the following options: Create Comment Adds a comment to the selected rhythmic position and staff. Edit Comment Opens the selected comment in the Comment dialog and allows you to change its content. Reply to Comment Adds a comment that is a reply to the selected comment. Replies are shown indented in the Comments panel and stacked in the music area.
Write mode Comments TIP You can also add comments by clicking Create Comment choosing Write > Create Comment. in the Comments panel, or by EXAMPLE A comment in the music area Replying to comments You can add replies to existing comments, which is useful when co-ordinating with others as this organizes the list of comments in the Comments panel into clear sections. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the comment to which you want to reply. You can do this in the music area and in the Comments panel. 2.
Write mode Comments Editing existing comments You can change the contents of existing comments after you have added them; for example, to correct misspellings or add further information. PROCEDURE 1. Double-click the comment you want to edit to open the Comment dialog. You can do this in the music area and in the Comments panel. 2. Change the text in the dialog. 3. Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog.
Write mode Comments The HTML file is automatically saved in the same location as the project. Its file name includes the layout name. RELATED LINKS Switching between layouts on page 40 Annotations on page 504 Printing layouts on page 488 Exporting layouts as graphics files on page 492 Exporting lyrics on page 774 Hiding/Showing comments You can hide/show comments at their positions in the music; for example, if you want to hide them when inputting music but show them when engraving.
Play mode Play mode allows you to change how your music sounds in playback, including by adjusting the mix, changing the playback template, and assigning VST instruments. Project window in Play mode The project window in Play mode contains all the tools and functions for setting up your project for playback. In Play mode, your project appears in a similar way to that used in a digital audio workstation, or “DAW”, such as Cubase.
Play mode Project window in Play mode Can display either the Key Editor panel or Mixer panel, according to the current selection in the lower zone toolbar.
Play mode Project window in Play mode 7 Tracks Rows that display an overview of the corresponding musical element, such as notes in instrument tracks and chord symbols in the chord symbols track. 8 Playhead Shows the current rhythmic position in playback.
Play mode Project window in Play mode Routing Allows you to change the sound routing of the selected track. The following routing controls are available: Audio plug-in menu Allows you to select the VST or MIDI instrument plug-in you want to use for the selected track. Only plug-ins already loaded in the project are available. Port field Allows you to change the endpoint to which the selected track is assigned by entering the port you want to use.
Play mode Project window in Play mode Allows you to disable independent voice playback for the selected instrument track and return it to using a single endpoint for all voices. Endpoint Setup Opens the Endpoint Setup dialog for the corresponding plug-in instance. Edit Instrument Opens the corresponding VST or MIDI instrument in a window, which allows you to edit its settings.
Play mode Project window in Play mode ● For more information about the plug-ins included with Dorico SE, see the separate document Plug-in Reference. Channel Shows the Mixer channel strip for the selected track and allows you to adjust the channel. TIP You can also access all channels in the Mixer.
Play mode Project window in Play mode NOTE Dorico SE only shows VST 3 instruments in the VST Instruments section by default. If you also want VST 2 instruments to be available, you must allow them. Only Kontakt and NotePerformer are allowed by default. Each VST plug-in instance contains the following: 1 Activate Instance Activates/Deactivates the plug-in instance. 2 Name Displays the number and name of the plug-in instance.
Play mode Project window in Play mode TIP We recommend plugging MIDI devices into your computer before starting Dorico SE. Similarly, if your device is not recognized, we recommend restarting Dorico SE. Each MIDI plug-in instance contains the following: 1 Name Displays the number and name of the plug-in instance. Plug-in instances are automatically numbered to help you differentiate between instances when you have multiple instances of the same plug-in.
Play mode Tracks TIP We recommend plugging MIDI devices into your computer before starting Dorico SE. Similarly, if your device is not recognized, we recommend restarting Dorico SE. PROCEDURE 1. In Play mode, choose VST and MIDI in the left zone to show the VST and MIDI panel. 2. Optional: If you want to load a VST/MIDI instrument into a new plug-in instance, click Add in the corresponding section of the VST and MIDI panel. 3.
Play mode Tracks In modern programs, such as Cubase, tracks can contain many types of sounds, including audio recordings and software instruments. Tracks containing audio recordings often display the waveform of the audio, while tracks containing software instruments often display the pitches as rectangular note events positioned horizontally in time and vertically in pitch on a piano roll.
Play mode Tracks ● View and edit its notes and data in the Key Editor panel. ● Use the Track Inspector to change the routing of the track. Piano instrument track with two voice tracks below Each instrument track comprises the following: 1 Track name Shows the name of the track. 2 ● Instrument tracks display the full instrument name set for the instrument. ● Voice tracks display the stem direction and number of the corresponding voice.
Play mode Tracks RELATED LINKS Track Inspector on page 439 Hiding/Showing tracks on page 451 Rhythmic grid on page 189 Tempo marks on page 1000 Input methods for tempo marks on page 267 Changing the type and appearance of absolute tempo changes on page 1003 Signposts on page 406 Hiding/Showing tempo marks on page 1006 Exporting MIDI on page 81 Markers track The Markers track displays markers in the selected flow and allows you to input new markers.
Play mode Tracks 5. Click OK to input the marker and close the dialog. RESULT A marker is input at the position of the playhead. It shows the text you entered, or the default text “Marker” if you did not change the marker text.
Play mode Tracks PROCEDURE ● In Play mode, activate Enable Chords Playback in the Chords track header. RELATED LINKS Hiding/Showing tracks on page 451 Track overview on page 438 Changing the sound used for chord symbol playback You can change the sound used for chord symbol playback by assigning the Chords track to the required endpoint, including loading a new sound manually if required; for example, if you want to use a sound that is not used by any of the instrument tracks in your project.
Play mode Tracks 2. Choose Edit > Notations > Chord Symbols and Diagrams > Clear Chord Symbol Played Pitches. You can also choose this option from the context menu. RELATED LINKS Inputting chord symbols on page 290 Hiding/Showing tracks You can hide/show the Tempo, Markers, and Chords tracks at the top of the track overview independently of each other. NOTE You cannot hide/show player and instrument tracks.
Play mode Playhead ● To make tracks narrower, either click in the ruler and drag downwards, Ctrl/Cmd -scroll downwards, or Ctrl/Cmd -swipe downwards on a touchpad. RELATED LINKS Tracks on page 445 Track overview on page 438 Playhead The playhead is a vertical line that moves during playback, showing the current rhythmic position. It is also known as a “playback line”.
Play mode Playhead PROCEDURE ● Move the playhead in any of the following ways: ● To move the playhead forwards, press Num + (plus on a numeric keypad) or click Fast Forward in the Transport window. ● To move the playhead backwards, press Num - (minus on a numeric keypad) or click Rewind in the Transport window. ● To move the playhead back to the start of the flow, press Num . (period on a numeric keypad) or click Rewind to Beginning of Flow in the Transport window or mini transport.
Play mode Playing back music Playing back music You can listen to the music you have written from the beginning of your project or from a specific point. You can use playback key commands in any mode. PREREQUISITE ● You have applied a playback template to the project that includes sounds for the instruments in your project. ● If you want to use different sounds for different voices, you have enabled independent voice playback for those instruments. PROCEDURE 1.
Play mode Playing back music TIP If you notice a change in sound when stopping playback, you can deactivate Reset controllers and send ‘all notes off’ when stopping playback on the Play page in Preferences.
Play mode Playing back music In fixed tempo mode, the tempo for playback and recording is a single tempo, as determined by the Fixed Tempo Mode metronome mark value. RELATED LINKS Toolbar on page 28 Tempo marks on page 1000 Tempo track on page 447 MIDI recording on page 239 Playing back music on page 454 Transport window on page 465 Allowing/Blocking VST plug-ins You can allow individual VST 2 instrument plug-ins that you want to use in Dorico SE and block plug-ins you want to prevent Dorico SE from using.
Play mode Enabling independent voice playback Enabling independent voice playback By default, all voices belonging to a single instrument, including divisi staves, use the same endpoint for playback. You can enable independent voice playback for individual instruments; for example, to hear the different playing techniques in playback for a string divisi where some parts are pizzicato and some parts are arco.
Play mode Muting/Soloing tracks NOTE You must select the instrument track, not any of its voice tracks. 2. In the Track Inspector, click Disable Independent Voice Playback in the Routing section. RESULT Independent voice playback is disabled for the selected instrument. Its voice tracks disappear from the track overview, and all voices belonging to the instrument return to using a single endpoint for playback.
Play mode Muting/Soloing tracks Mixer on page 561 Playing back music on page 454 Deactivating mute/solo instrument states You can deactivate the mute and solo states of all instruments in your project; for example, if you want to hear all instruments in playback after soloing a small selection. PROCEDURE ● Deactivate mute/solo instrument states in the following ways: ● To deactivate all mute instrument states, press Alt/Opt-U or click Deactivate All Mute States in the Mixer.
Play mode Repeats in playback Hiding/Showing voice colors on page 1082 Repeats in playback Dorico SE supports the playback of repeat structures, including repeat endings, repeat barlines, and repeat markers, provided all the correct jumps and sections are in place. There is no limit to the number of repeat structures you can have in a single flow and still obtain correct playback.
Play mode Repeats in playback RESULT Repeats are included in playback after the selected repeat jumps when the checkbox is activated, and excluded from playback when the checkbox is deactivated. Changing the number of playthroughs at repeat barlines End repeat barlines typically indicate that the preceding music is played through twice. You can change the number of playthroughs for each end repeat barline individually. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown.
Play mode Swing playback Swing playback Swing is a style of performance where equally-notated notes are played in a regular pattern of alternating longer and shorter notes, which commonly entails eighth notes being played as a quarter note triplet followed by an eighth note triplet.
Play mode Swing playback 2:1 swing 8ths (fixed) Extends the first note in a pair of eighth notes to be twice as long as the second, creating a strict triplet 2:1 ratio. This is also known as a “triplet swing”. This ratio is maintained regardless of the tempo by default. 3:1 swing 16ths (fixed) Extends the first note in a pair of 16th notes to be three times as long as the second, creating a dotted 16th-32nd ratio (dotted semiquaver-demisemiquaver).
Play mode Swing playback ● If you want to enable swing playback within a section then return to straight playback, select multiple items that span the duration where you want swing playback/a different rhythmic feel. NOTE 2. 3. ● If you want to enable swing playback for a single instrument, select items that belong to that instrument only. ● If you select an item in the middle of a bar, the rhythmic feel change only takes effect from the start of the next bar.
Play mode Transport window Deleting rhythmic feel changes You can delete rhythmic feel changes you have enabled for specific sections or for individual players only. PREREQUISITE Rhythmic change signposts are shown. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the signposts of the rhythmic changes you want to delete. 2. Press Backspace or Delete . RESULT The rhythmic changes are deleted. The affected staves return to the default non-swing playback until the next existing rhythmic change signpost, if applicable.
Play mode Transport window Activate Project Activates/Deactivates playback in the project. When playback is deactivated, transport and playback functions are disabled. Rewind to Beginning of Flow Moves the playhead back to the beginning of the flow. Rewind Moves the playhead back by a half note each time you click. Fast Forward Moves the playhead forwards by a half note each time you click. Stop Stops playback. Play From Playhead Position Plays back from the position of the playhead.
Play mode Transport window Tempo Mode Displays the tempo used for both playback and recording. The value changes according to the playhead position, and its appearance changes according to its mode. ● You can change the tempo mode by clicking the beat unit. ● You can change the metronome mark value used in fixed tempo mode by clicking the number to show a slider, then dragging the slider to the right/left.
Play mode Playback templates Playback templates Dorico SE uses playback templates to allocate sounds from VST instruments and MIDI devices to the instruments in your project.
Play mode Playback templates Apply Playback Template dialog The Apply Playback Template dialog allows you to change the playback template applied to the current project and to import/export playback templates. It also allows you to access the Edit Playback Template dialog. ● You can open the Apply Playback Template dialog by choosing Play > Playback Template. The Apply Playback Template dialog shows all the playback templates available on your computer in a table.
Play mode Playback templates Contains the following options for playback templates: ● Add Playback Template : Opens the Edit Playback Template dialog and allows you to create a new playback template. ● Duplicate Playback Template : Opens the Edit Playback Template dialog and allows you to create a new playback template that starts as a duplicate of the selected one. ● Edit Playback Template : Opens the Edit Playback Template dialog and allows you to edit the existing selected playback template.
Play mode Playback templates The Edit Playback Template dialog contains the following sections and options: 1 Playback template data Allows you to specify the following identifying information for the selected custom playback template: ● Name: Allows you to set the name of the playback template that appears in the program; for example, in the Apply Playback Template dialog. ● ID: Allows you to set the unique ID of the playback template.
Play mode Playback templates always include a factory default playback template at the bottom of the list as a fallback to ensure that all instruments are assigned sounds. In most cases, listing entries in your order of preference in the Entries section is sufficient to achieve your desired playback.
Play mode Playback templates Applying/Resetting playback templates You can change the playback template applied to the current project; for example, if you want to use a different sound library for playback. Re-selecting playback templates resets them to their default settings. PROCEDURE 1. Choose Play > Playback Template to open the Apply Playback Template dialog. 2. Select the playback template you want to use. 3. Click Apply and Close.
Play mode Playback templates TIP We recommend that you always include a factory default playback template at the bottom of the list as a fallback to ensure that all instruments are assigned sounds. 6. Optional: To change the order of entries and their order of preference in the playback template, select an entry and click one of the following options in the action bar: ● To move the selected entry upwards, click Move Up . ● To move the selected entry downwards, click Move Down . 7.
Play mode Endpoints RESULT The selected playback template is imported. It becomes available in the current project and all projects you create/open on your computer. TIP You can also import playback templates by dragging .dorico_pt files into a Dorico SE project window. Exporting playback templates You can export playback templates so you can send them to other users or use them on other computers. By default, any playback templates you create are available in all projects on your computer. PROCEDURE 1.
Play mode Endpoints NOTE Any changes you make within plug-ins are not communicated to Dorico SE; for example, changing a sound that the expression map expects to use a modulation wheel for dynamics to one that uses note velocity instead. This can lead to unexpected low notes sounding in playback because Dorico SE is still using the expression and percussion maps for the original sounds.
Play mode Endpoints 2 Number of MIDI ports Displays the number of MIDI ports the corresponding plug-in instance currently uses. You can change the number of MIDI ports; for example, if you are using a plug-in that uses more than one port. Dorico SE does not load multiple MIDI ports by default. 3 Number of MIDI channels Displays the number of MIDI channels the corresponding plug-in instance currently uses.
Play mode Endpoints 6 Number of audio outputs to show in Mixer Allows you to change the number of audio outputs shown in the Mixer; for example, if you want to hide unused outputs when using plug-ins that provide more audio outputs than Dorico SE uses. 7 Save Endpoint Configuration Opens the Save Endpoint Configuration dialog, which allows you to enter a name for the current endpoint configuration and save it as a custom endpoint configuration.
Play mode Endpoints ● 4. To save a custom endpoint configuration that includes all VST instrument or MIDI instrument plug-in instances, click Save Endpoint Configuration in the action bar of the corresponding section of the VST and MIDI panel. Enter a name for your custom endpoint configuration in the Name field. NOTE If you enter a name that already exists, or select an existing custom endpoint configuration from the menu, the existing custom endpoint configuration is overwritten. 5.
Play mode Endpoints Edit Endpoint Configurations dialog The Edit Endpoint Configurations dialog allows you to rename and delete custom endpoint configurations, and view the plug-ins and players they contain. ● You can open the Edit Endpoint Configurations dialog by clicking Endpoint Configurations in the Edit Playback Template dialog. The Edit Endpoint Configurations dialog comprises the following: 1 Endpoint configurations list Contains all the endpoint configurations on your computer.
Play mode Endpoints 2. Optional: If you selected a voice track, choose one of the following options for Edits apply to in the Routing section of the Track Inspector: ● To change the assigned endpoint for the selected voice in the current flow only, choose This flow. ● To change the assigned endpoint for the selected voice in all flows, choose All flows. 3.
Play mode Endpoints 4. Select the expression/percussion map you want from the menu. 5. Press Return . 6. Optional: Repeat steps 2 to 5 for any other endpoints whose assigned expression/percussion maps you want to change. 7. Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. RELATED LINKS VST and MIDI panel on page 442 Expression maps on page 574 Percussion maps on page 592 482 Dorico SE 4.3.
Print mode Print mode allows you to print your layouts or to export them as graphics files, such as PDF and SVG. ● When printing layouts, you can specify the paper size and other options, such as duplex or booklet printing. ● When exporting layouts, you can specify different graphics file types and the information you want to include in their exported file names.
Print mode Project window in Print mode NOTE The layout selector in the toolbar is disabled in Print mode. To show a different layout in the print preview area, select it in the Layouts panel. 2 Print Options panel Contains options for printing or exporting your layouts. 3 System Dialogs (macOS only) Contains macOS-specific printing options.
Print mode Project window in Print mode The Layouts panel contains all the layouts in your project, displayed as cards. Each layout card shows the following: 1 Disclosure arrow Expands/Collapses the layout card. 2 Layout type Shows the type of layout from the following options: 3 ● Full score layout ● Instrumental part layout ● Custom score layout Layout name Shows the name of the layout.
Print mode Project window in Print mode ● Press Ctrl/Cmd-9 . ● Click the disclosure arrow on the right edge of the main window. ● Choose Window > Show Right Zone. All the options that you set in the Print Options panel are saved with your project. The options are divided into the following sections: Destination Allows you to select a physical printer for printing or a file location for exporting a graphics file. ● For layouts set to print, you can change the number of copies.
Print mode Project window in Print mode Duplex Printing Allows you to specify whether to print on one or on both sides of each sheet of paper. Only available when Printer is selected in the Destination section. Annotations Allows you to activate options that are often required by publishing houses or printing agencies, such as crop marks or a border around the printed image. 487 Dorico SE 4.3.
Print mode Printing layouts Print button Allows you to print/export selected layouts according to the settings you have set in the Print Options panel. Depending on your selection, the print button can appear in one of the following ways: ● Print ● Export ● Print and Export For example, if you selected layouts that are all set to print, Print is shown. If you selected some layouts set to export graphics and some layouts set to print, Print and Export is shown.
Print mode Printing layouts NOTE The layout selector in the toolbar is disabled in Print mode. To show a different layout in the print preview area, select it in the Layouts panel. 2. In the Print Options panel, enter the number of copies you want into the Copies field in the Destination section. NOTE The Copies field appears blank when you have selected layouts with different values. 3. Activate/Deactivate Collate copies. 4.
Print mode Printing layouts RELATED LINKS Preferences dialog on page 52 Key Commands page in the Preferences dialog on page 54 Printers on page 496 Paper size and orientation setup on page 501 Export File Names dialog on page 495 Page arrangements for printing/exporting on page 497 Print Options panel on page 485 Duplex printing on page 499 Annotations on page 504 Changing the page size and/or orientation on page 507 Exporting layouts as graphics files on page 492 Specifying ranges of pages/flows By defaul
Print mode Printing layouts Print Flows dialog The Print Flows dialog allows you to select the flows you want to print/export from the selected layouts. Ranges of flows include all pages on which those flows appear, in full or in part. ● You can open the Print Flows dialog in Print mode by clicking Choose in the Job Type section of the Print Options panel. Choose is available when the selected layouts are set to print/export a range of flows.
Print mode Exporting layouts as graphics files Exporting layouts as graphics files You can export layouts as a variety of graphics files, such as PDF or PNG. TIP You can export layouts with different image settings and export paths simultaneously. PROCEDURE 1. In the Layouts panel, select the layouts you want to export. NOTE The layout selector in the toolbar is disabled in Print mode. To show a different layout in the print preview area, select it in the Layouts panel. 2.
Print mode Exporting layouts as graphics files TIP ● You can choose to show a warning when printing/exporting concert or transposed pitch full score and custom score layouts in Preferences > General > Files. ● You can assign key commands to different printing and exporting commands on the Key Commands page in Preferences.
Print mode Exporting layouts as graphics files RESULT The image settings for the selected layouts are changed. This also changes the file name recipe used for the corresponding layouts when you export them.
Print mode Exporting layouts as graphics files Export File Names dialog The Export File Names dialog allows you to determine the contents of file names for each graphics file format independently. You can use universal ingredients that update to show the correct information for each layout automatically, and you can enter text that is the same for all layouts.
Print mode Printers 4 Reset to Default Resets the file name recipe to the default for the selected graphics file format. 5 Copy to All Copies the file name recipe to all layouts in the project. 6 File name ingredients Allow you to add ingredients to the file name recipe quickly that are automatically populated as appropriate for each layout. For example, the ingredient $l becomes Piano when used to export a piano part layout.
Print mode Page arrangements for printing/exporting Page arrangements for printing/exporting Dorico SE provides several page arrangements that you can use for printing/exporting your layouts. In the Job Type section of the Print Options panel, you can specify how you want the layouts to be printed/exported. You can select the following job types from the Job Type menu: Normal Prints one page on each sheet of paper.
Print mode Page arrangements for printing/exporting Pages Allows you to set a range of pages to be printed/exported. Choosing Pages makes the value field available. ● To specify a range, enter the first page and last page separated with a dash, such as 1-4. ● To specify individual pages or separate ranges, enter each page/range separated with commas, such as 1,3,5-8. Flows Allows you to set a range of flows to be printed/exported.
Print mode Duplex printing Duplex printing Dorico SE allows duplex printing, which means that you can print on both sides of each sheet of paper. If your printer supports automatic duplex printing, you can use this function in Dorico SE. If your printer can only print on one side of each sheet of paper, there is a manual duplex printing option. The Print on menu in the Duplex Printing section of the Print Options panel contains the following options: One side only Prints on one side of each sheet of paper.
Print mode Page vs. paper size Page vs. paper size In Dorico SE, page sizes and paper sizes use different settings. This means that you can print layouts with any page size onto paper with a different paper size. For each layout in your project, you can define a page size on the Page Setup page in Layout Options, which sets the dimensions of the layout. When exporting layouts as graphics files, the layout’s page size is always used.
Print mode Page vs. paper size RELATED LINKS Changing the page size and/or orientation on page 507 Paper size and orientation setup Layouts can have different paper sizes and orientation settings. NOTE If you have selected Graphics in the Destination section of the Print Options panel, you can only change the paper orientation. No other options are available.
Print mode Graphics file formats Graphics file formats Dorico SE supports multiple graphics file formats as which you can export your layouts. PDF Stands for Portable Document Format. Exporting layouts to PDF allows you to create a platform-independent document that contains a fixed version of each layout; for example, to send to someone who does not have access to Dorico SE. PNG Stands for Portable Network Graphics. PNG files are losslessly compressed, meaning they produce high-quality images.
Print mode Graphics file formats Monochrome and color graphics processing Dorico SE applies different settings when you export monochrome and color graphics. The most appropriate setting depends on your intended purpose for the graphics. Most musical scores are monochrome, meaning they use only black ink and are normally printed on white/near-white paper.
Print mode Annotations RELATED LINKS Exporting layouts as graphics files on page 492 Graphics file formats on page 502 Image resolution on page 502 Monochrome and color graphics processing on page 503 Annotations Annotations provide additional information for printed or exported documents, such as the date and time it was printed. Publishers and printing agencies can use these to identify and register printed images correctly or to embed exported graphics files into a desktop publishing application.
Layout and formatting There are various ways you can control the layout and formatting of pages in your project, including changing the size of pages and adjusting note spacing. NOTE In Dorico SE, you cannot edit all the objects and settings used to determine page formatting, such as frames and page templates. However, we have included basic information about these topics in this documentation for your information.
Layout and formatting Page formatting with them as a concept, so you are aware of how pages are formatted. For example, if you override a page template, such as by editing the title directly in the music area, empty pages that are no longer required might not be deleted automatically.
Layout and formatting Page formatting Changing the page size and/or orientation You can change the page size and/or orientation of each layout independently. For example, you can use a large, landscape page in full score layouts and a small, portrait page for part layouts. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to change the page size and/or orientation.
Layout and formatting Page formatting Changing page margins You can change the page margins of each layout independently; for example, if you want wider margins for layouts in your project that will be spiral bound. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to change the page margins. By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog.
Layout and formatting Page formatting 4. In the Page Template section, select the page template set you want from the Page template set menu. 5. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The selected page template set is applied to the selected layouts.
Layout and formatting Page formatting RELATED LINKS Staff size on page 524 Brackets and braces on page 655 System objects on page 992 Changing the default staff/system spacing You can change the default gaps between staves and systems in each layout independently. For example, you can have smaller gaps between staves in full score layouts to accommodate more staves, and larger gaps between systems in part layouts to give players space to add pencil markings.
Layout and formatting Page formatting You can also control whether staves and systems are both vertically justified or only systems are vertically justified. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to change the automatic vertical justification of staves/systems. By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog.
Layout and formatting Page formatting EXAMPLE A page with staves and systems both justified The same page with only systems justified RELATED LINKS Per-layout vertical spacing options on page 527 Hiding/Showing empty staves You can hide/show empty staves differently in each layout independently. For example, you can show all staves, including empty staves, in a full score layout for the conductor but hide empty staves in a full score layout intended for reference only. PROCEDURE 1.
Layout and formatting Page formatting 7. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT Empty staves in the selected layouts are hidden/shown according to your choice. If you activated Allow individual staves of multi-staff instruments to be hidden, any single empty staves in multi-staff instruments, such as piano or harp, can be hidden in the selected layouts.
Layout and formatting Page formatting Manual Staff Visibility dialog The Manual Staff Visibility dialog allows you to hide, show, and reset individual staves manually from system/frame breaks. You can open the Manual Staff Visibility dialog in Write mode in any of the following ways: ● Choose Edit > Notations > Staff > Manual Staff Visibility when an item is selected in the music area. You can also choose this option from the context menu.
Layout and formatting Page formatting staves between the final system and the bottom of the page when formatting part layouts for recording sessions. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to hide/show blank staves after the ends of flows. By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog.
Layout and formatting Page formatting Starting layouts on left-hand pages By default, all layouts start on a right-hand page, as convention dictates that odd numbered pages are always on the right-hand page. However, you can set individual layouts to start on a left-hand page; for example, to facilitate page turns better in that layout. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts you want to start on a left-hand page.
Layout and formatting Page formatting automatically shown above the start of flows if you have chosen to show flow headings in the selected layouts. NOTE Flows are not automatically split into separate music frames. You must insert frame breaks manually to divide flows into separate music frames if required.
Layout and formatting Page formatting Hiding/Showing flow headings You can hide/show flow headings in each layout independently; for example, if your project only contains a single flow and you only want to show the project title. You can also hide the heading for the first flow but show flow headings for subsequent flows. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to hide/show flow headings.
Layout and formatting Page formatting By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog. You can select other layouts by using the selection options in the action bar, clicking and dragging across multiple layouts, Shift -clicking adjacent layouts, and Ctrl/Cmd -clicking individual layouts. 3. In the category list, click Page Setup. 4. In the Flows section, choose one of the following options for Flow title in header: 5. 6. 7.
Layout and formatting Page formatting 4. 5. Change the justification of final systems in flows in one of the following ways: ● If you always want the final systems in flows to justify fully, deactivate Only justify final system in flow when more than [n]% full. ● If you want to change the minimum fullness of final systems before they justify, change the value for Only justify final system in flow when more than [n]% full. Click Apply, then Close.
Layout and formatting Margins Margins Margins determine the spacing around music on pages, such as on all four edges of each page and above/below flow headings. In Dorico SE, there are the following types of margins: 1 Page margins The gaps between the four edges of pages and the boundary of the content on them. For example, systems that are horizontally justified span the full width of pages between the left and right page margins. You cannot position frames beyond the page margins.
Layout and formatting Margins NOTE Notes and notations above the highest staff and below the lowest staff extend into margins.
Layout and formatting Margins EXAMPLE Flow heading with default margins above/below Flow heading with decreased margins above/below RELATED LINKS Flow headings on page 547 Per-layout vertical spacing options on page 527 Hiding/Showing used chord diagrams grids on page 679 Changing the margins above/below tacets on page 540 Changing the default music frame margins You can change the default margins in all music frames in each layout independently.
Layout and formatting Staff size NOTE Notes and notations above the highest staff and below the lowest staff extend into music frame margins. RELATED LINKS Changing page margins on page 508 Changing the default staff/system spacing on page 510 Hiding/Showing used chord diagrams grids on page 679 Staff size Staff size refers to the distance between the top and bottom lines of staves, and can be expressed as a point size or in another supported unit of measurement, such as millimeters.
Layout and formatting Staff size Changing the size of staves for individual players You can change the size of all staves belonging to individual players in each flow, independently of other players’ staves and your layout settings. For example, piano accompaniment parts often include the solo line of the instrument the piano is accompanying on a smaller staff. You can change the size of staves to a set scale size, expressed as a percentage of the normal staff size in the layout, or set a custom scale.
Layout and formatting Staff spacing System objects on page 992 Custom Staff Size dialog The Custom Staff Size dialog allows you to change the size of individual staves by a custom scale factor. ● You can open the Custom Staff Size dialog by selecting an item on a staff and choosing Edit > Notations > Staff Size > Custom Staff Size. The Custom Staff Size dialog contains the following options: Default staff size Displays the default size of staves in the current layout.
Layout and formatting Staff spacing RELATED LINKS Layout Options dialog on page 571 Staff size on page 524 Staves on page 988 Changing the default staff/system spacing on page 510 Changing the staff spacing in galley view on page 529 Changing the default staff size on page 509 Margins on page 521 Casting off on page 532 Frame breaks on page 536 Fixing the number of systems per frame on page 533 Note spacing on page 530 Per-layout vertical spacing options Dorico SE provides multiple options that you can use
Layout and formatting Staff spacing ● When calculating the number of systems that can fit in each frame in a layout, Dorico SE considers the height of staves, the minimum gaps between staves, the maximum distances between very high/low notes and staves, and other items that require vertical space, such as pedal lines and tempo marks. However, this calculation happens before horizontal spacing is finalized, which can result in either more or fewer systems being allocated to frames than ideally fit.
Layout and formatting Staff spacing ● Allow individual staves of multi-staff instruments to be hidden: Allows you to control whether individual empty staves belonging to multi-staff instruments can be hidden independently or all multi-staff instrument staves must always be shown. ● Players excluded from Hide Empty Staves: Allows you to identify specific players whose staves you always want to show, even if their staff is empty on systems where you have hidden empty staves.
Layout and formatting Note spacing Note spacing The positions of notes and rests relative to each other, and the automatic gaps between them, are known as note spacing. ● You can change the default note spacing values for each layout independently on the Note Spacing page in Layout Options. The options available include changing the default space for quarter notes (crotchets) and the scale space for grace notes and cues.
Layout and formatting Note spacing The Note Spacing page in Layout Options contains the following options: Default space for crotchet/quarter note Sets the default note spacing for quarter notes (crotchets). The spacing of other durations is scaled proportionally. Increasing the value increases note spacing, decreasing the value decreases note spacing. This is reflected in the preview as you change the value. Minimum space for short notes Sets the minimum note spacing for notes with short durations.
Layout and formatting Casting off Casting off “Casting off” is the term used to encompass fixing the layout of pages of music, such as setting the number of systems per page. When calculating how much music can fit in each system and on each page, Dorico SE considers multiple aspects of the layout, including note spacing and vertical spacing settings. You can change these settings to change the default casting off in each layout.
Layout and formatting Casting off Fixing the number of systems per frame You can define a fixed number of systems you want included in each music frame in each layout independently. Because the default page templates have a single music frame per page, fixing the number of systems per frame usually fixes the number of systems per page. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to fix the number of systems per frame.
Layout and formatting System breaks RELATED LINKS Preferences dialog on page 52 Frame breaks on page 536 Casting off on page 532 System breaks System breaks occur when musical material reaches the right page margin and must continue on a new system, usually below the previous system on the same page or on a new page. Dorico SE automatically arranges music across systems so that notes are correctly spaced and legible, but you can also control system breaks manually.
Layout and formatting System breaks PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select a note or item at the rhythmic position you want to appear at the start of the next system. 2. Choose Edit > System Break. RESULT A system break is inserted at the rhythmic position of the earliest selected item. If breaks are disallowed within bars, it snaps to the preceding barline. All notations after the system break are moved to the next system.
Layout and formatting Frame breaks Frame breaks Frame breaks occur when musical material reaches the right page margin at the bottom of a frame and must continue on a new system in the next frame in the music frame chain, which is usually on the next page. Dorico SE automatically arranges music in frames so that systems are correctly spaced and legible, but you can also control frame breaks manually; for example, to insert page turns at specific positions in part layouts.
Layout and formatting Frame breaks 2. Choose Edit > Frame Break. RESULT A frame break is inserted at the rhythmic position of the earliest selected item. If breaks are disallowed within bars, it snaps to the preceding barline. All notations after the frame break are moved to the next music frame.
Layout and formatting Tacets Tacets Tacet is the indication used to show that a player does not play anything in an entire flow, which might be a movement in a symphony or cue in a film score. In Dorico SE, you can generate tacets automatically. Dorico SE shows tacets for flows in part layouts when the following conditions are met: ● You have removed the player from the flows in which they do not play. ● The flows are assigned to the part layout.
Layout and formatting Tacets Hiding/Showing tacets You can hide/show tacets in each layout independently; for example, if you want to show empty bars or multi-bar rests in some layouts to allow those players to add in notes on those staves later. PREREQUISITE ● You have removed the player from the flows in which they do not play. ● The flows are assigned to the part layout. ● The flows are assigned to the page template frame chain in the part layout. PROCEDURE 1.
Layout and formatting Condensing 5. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The text shown in all tacets in the selected layouts is changed. Changing the margins above/below tacets You can change the margins both above/below tacets in each layout independently; for example, if you want smaller gaps between flow headings and tacets in some layouts to facilitate page turns better. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2.
Layout and formatting Part formatting propagation ● Condensing is never enabled in galley view, so you can switch to galley view to see all staves separately. This does not disable condensing in the current layout. ● Having condensing enabled in any layout in a project can cause Dorico SE to operate more slowly, due to the large number of calculations involved.
Layout and formatting Part formatting propagation 2. In the action bar, click Layout Settings the Propagate Part Formatting dialog. and choose Propagate Part Formatting to open TIP You can also right-click layouts and choose this option from the context menu. 3. In the Copy formatting from list, select the part layout whose part formatting you want to copy. By default, the layout whose card you used to open the dialog is selected. 4.
Layout and formatting Part formatting propagation The Propagate Part Formatting dialog contains the following sections and options: 1 Copy formatting from list Contains a list of all the part layouts in the project. You can only select a single part layout as the source layout. 2 Propagate formatting to list Contains a list of all the part layouts in the project. You can select multiple part layouts as destination layouts.
Layout and formatting Engrave mode Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains Local properties are layout- and frame chain-specific, meaning that by default, changing local properties for an item in one layout does not affect the same item in other layouts or other frame chains.
Layout and formatting Page templates NOTE ● In Dorico SE, you cannot edit page templates or create new ones; this is only available in Dorico Pro. ● Changing individual pages in layouts is considered a page template override in Dorico SE. This includes, for example, editing the title or running header in Write mode. Pages with page template overrides are not automatically deleted, even if they are empty because the layout became shorter.
Layout and formatting Page templates Types of page templates Page template sets contain different types of page templates, which are used in different circumstances. For example, First page templates are usually used for the first page of music in a layout. In Dorico SE, there are the following types of page templates: First A page template that is usually used for the first page of music in a layout.
Layout and formatting Flow headings Default page template open in the page template editor The Default page template contains the following tokens in text frames: 1 Page number 2 Default Full Score page template set: Flow title (optionally Project title for projects created from the Hub with Project will use multiple flows deactivated) Default Part page template set: Layout name RELATED LINKS Project Info dialog on page 69 Tokens on page 549 Page template sets on page 545 Changing when the First page
Layout and formatting Frames A flow heading above the third flow in a part layout Flow headings are automatically inserted inside music frames above the first system of the flow to which they apply, meaning they do not have a fixed vertical position on the page like other frames and follow the music if it moves. They also occupy vertical space within music frames. You can change the margins for the space above and below flow headings.
Layout and formatting Frames Graphics frames Graphics frames display the images that you load into them, which can be in a variety of formats. A graphics frame with image loaded EXAMPLE The first page of a piano piece. It contains a music frame, text frames for the title, dedication, and composer, a flow heading frame inside the top of the music frame, and graphics frames in the top corners.
Layout and formatting Frames NOTE ● You can only use tokens in text frames. You cannot use tokens in text items. Full text frame functionality is only available in Dorico Pro, but we have included the available tokens for your reference. ● Flow tokens refer to the nearest flow below the top edge of their text frame and on the same page. When the top edge of a text frame containing a flow token is in line with or above the top staff line of the first staff in a system, it then refers to that flow.
Layout and formatting Frames Staff label tokens Music symbol Token Full staff labels of the players in the current layout {@staffLabelsFull@} Abbreviated staff labels of the players in the current layout {@staffLabelsShort@} NOTE ● You can use staff label tokens as an alternative way to name part layouts, instead of using the default {@layoutName@} token shown at the top left of the first page in part layouts.
Layout and formatting Frames Project/Flow information tokens Field in the Project Info dialog Token for Project page Token for Flow pages Title {@projecttitle@} {@flowtitle@} Subtitle {@projectsubtitle@} {@flowsubtitle@} Dedication {@projectdedication@} {@flowdedication@} Composer {@projectcomposer@} {@flowcomposer@} Arranger {@projectarranger@} {@flowarranger@} Lyricist {@projectlyricist@} {@flowlyricist@} Artist {@projectartist@} {@flowartist@} Copyist {@projectcopyist@} {@flowc
Layout and formatting Frames Per-flow token function Token Flow number of the current flow shown in upper case Roman numerals, such as III or XVI {@flowNumberRomanUpper@} Duration of the current flow in minutes and seconds, using smart quotes {@flowDuration@} Duration of the current flow in minutes and seconds, using straight quotes {@flowDurationStraightQuotes@} Duration of the current flow in minutes and seconds, using primes {@flowDurationPrimes@} Duration of the specified flow “n” in minutes
Layout and formatting Frames Time/Date description Time/Date example Token Four-digit year 2017 {@projectdateyear@} Two-digit year 17 {@projectdateyearshort@} Full month name (locale dependent) October {@projectdatemonth@} Short month name (locale dependent) Oct {@projectdatemonthshort@} Month as a decimal number, range 1-12 10 {@projectdatemonthnum@} Full weekday name (locale dependent) Friday {@projectdateday@} Abbreviated weekday name (locale dependent) Fri {@projectdatedayshort@}
Layout and formatting Frames Time/Date tokens: current time and date Time/Date description Time/Date example Token Standard date and time string (locale dependent) Sun Dec 31 11:10:12 2017 {@date@} Four-digit year 2017 {@dateyear@} Two-digit year 17 {@dateyearshort@} Full month name (locale dependent) October {@datemonth@} Short month name (locale dependent) Oct {@datemonthshort@} Month as a decimal number, range 1-12 10 {@datemonthnum@} Full weekday name (locale dependent) Friday {@
Layout and formatting Music frame chains Time/Date description Time/Date example Token Second as decimal number, range 00-59 44 {@datetimesecond@} RELATED LINKS Project Info dialog on page 69 Player, layout, and instrument names on page 157 Flow names and flow titles on page 163 Insert Music Text dialog on page 357 Renumbering layouts on page 155 Reordering flows on page 149 Instrument transpositions in staff labels on page 981 Concert vs.
Properties Properties are settings that apply to individual notes and items and allow you to edit them, such as by changing their appearance or position. You can access properties in the Properties panel. Properties can affect items only in the current layout and frame chain, known as “local properties”, or in all layouts and frame chains, known as “global properties”.
Properties Local vs. global properties Search Allows you to filter properties according to your entry. Show (active status) Allows you to filter properties according to their activated status. ● Active: Shows only activated properties. ● All: Shows all properties. Show (property scope) Allows you to filter properties according to their property scope. ● Local Only: Shows only local properties. ● Global Only: Shows only global properties. ● All: Shows all properties.
Properties Changing the property scope local properties. You can also show only global properties in the Properties panel by using the property scope filter. RELATED LINKS Layouts on page 150 Music frame chains on page 556 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 544 Changing the property scope You can change the property scope of local properties; for example, if you want the subsequent properties you change to affect all layouts and frame chains.
Properties Changing values in numeric value fields PREREQUISITE For value fields that are only accessible when their corresponding property/option is activated, you have activated their property/option. PROCEDURE ● Change the value in numeric value fields in any of the following ways: ● Enter a number directly. ● To increase/decrease the value by 1/8 space, click the up/down buttons. ● To increase/decrease the value by 1/32 space, Ctrl/Cmd - Shift -click the up/down buttons.
Mixer The Mixer allows you to control the volume, panning, and sounds of channels in playback. You can access the Mixer in the following places: ● In the Mixer panel in the lower zone ● In the Mixer window RELATED LINKS Mixer window on page 562 Mixer channels on page 563 Zones and panels on page 35 Mixer panel The Mixer panel allows you to control the volume and panning of channels in playback. It is located in the lower zone at the bottom of the window in Write mode and Play mode.
Mixer Mixer window Mixer window The Mixer allows you to control the volume, panning, and sounds of channels in playback. It provides access to channel strips, which are not available in the Mixer panel. You can hide/show the Mixer window in any of the following ways: ● Press F3 . ● In the toolbar, click Show Mixer . The Mixer window comprises the following: 1 Channel type buttons Allow you to hide/show channels according to their type, and in any combination.
Mixer Mixer channels Muting/Soloing tracks on page 458 Changing the volume of channels on page 567 Hiding/Showing the Mixer window You can hide and show the Mixer window at any time; for example, if you do not want it in view when working on the music in the music area. PROCEDURE ● Hide/Show the Mixer window in any of the following ways: ● Press F3 . ● In the toolbar, click Show Mixer ● Choose Window > Mixer. .
Mixer Mixer channels 4 Channel meter Indicates the output volume of the channel in real time. 5 Mute Allows you to mute the channel. Indicates whether the channel has an active mute state. 6 Solo Allows you to solo the channel. Indicates whether the channel has an active solo state. 7 Channel name Displays the name of the channel. Instrument channels display the full instrument name set for that instrument in the Edit Instrument Names dialog and its instrument number, if applicable.
Mixer Mixer channels Mixer channel strips Each channel in the Mixer has its own channel strip, which contains the channel controls. Channel strips are located at the top of the Mixer window. Each channel strip contains the following types of controls: Inserts Each channel has four slots into which you can load an insert. You can select inserts from the menu. The header allows you to expand/collapse the section for all channels.
Mixer Hiding/Showing channels The indicator allows you to enable and disable to expand/collapse the section for all channels. the section. The header allows you The following controls are available for each EQ band: ● Enable EQ : Enables/Bypasses the corresponding band. ● Gain: Sets the amount of attenuation/boost for the corresponding band in dB. ● Frequency: Sets the frequency of the corresponding band in Hz.
Mixer Changing the height of channels ● Scroll upwards/downwards on a mouse wheel, or swipe upwards/downwards on a touchpad. ● Click and drag, anywhere outside of channel faders, to the right/left. Changing the height of channels You can change the vertical space occupied by channels and channel strips in the Mixer window; for example, to make channel strips taller when loading inserts or changing EQ settings. PREREQUISITE The Mixer window is shown.
Mixer Panning channels RESULT The volume of the corresponding channels is changed. TIP You can change the default output level for all future projects on the Play page in Preferences. By default, this is set to -6 dB to avoid clipping in projects with large ensembles.
Mixer Loading inserts into channels Loading inserts into channels You can load up to four inserts into each channel, excluding MIDI channels. For example, you can load specific EQ plug-ins instead of using the default EQ channel strips, and apply amp modeling plug-ins to clean guitar channels. TIP For more information about the plug-ins included with Dorico SE, see the separate document Plug-in Reference. PREREQUISITE The Mixer window is shown. PROCEDURE 1.
Mixer Changing the reverb plug-in ● Enabled inserts appear blue. ● Bypassed inserts appear yellow. Removing inserts You can remove individual inserts you have loaded into channels. PREREQUISITE The Mixer window is shown. PROCEDURE 1. In the Mixer, click Inserts in any channel strip to expand all inserts sections. 2. In the slot whose insert you want to remove, click the insert menu menu.
Library In Dorico SE, the library is the total compilation of visual items and options that are available in all projects on your computer. It combines factory default settings, custom items/options you have saved as default, and items/options only available in the current project. Layout Options dialog The Layout Options dialog allows you to change various aspects of each layout independently.
Library Layout Options dialog Contains the categories of options that you can view and change in the dialog. When you click a category in this list, any applicable section titles appear below the category in the list and its options appear as a page in the main body of the dialog. 3 Section titles Shows the titles of any sections on the selected category’s page. You can click these section titles to navigate directly to that section of the page.
Library Music Fonts dialog Resets all the options in the dialog for the selected layouts back to your saved defaults, according to their layout type. 10 Reset to Factory Resets all the options in the dialog for the selected layouts back to the default factory settings, according to their layout type. This only affects the current project and does not delete your saved defaults, meaning future projects still start with your saved defaults.
Library Expression maps Update text fonts when changing music fonts Allows you to include/exclude text fonts when changing the music font. For example, deactivating this option allows you to change the appearance of notes and notations without affecting the appearance of flow titles and staff labels. ● For the Bravura music font, the equivalent text font is Academico. ● For the Petaluma music font, the equivalent text font is Petaluma Script.
Library Expression maps NOTE Although Dorico SE approaches expression maps in a different way to Cubase, Dorico SE correctly imports many switches from expression maps you import from Cubase, such as pizzicato, harmonics, and flutter tongue.
Library Expression maps Expression maps list 1 Expression maps list: Contains the expression maps currently available in your project. 2 Search field: Allows you to filter expression maps according to your entry. 3 Show only expression maps used in this project: Allows you to filter the expression maps list so it only includes expression maps used in the current project.
Library Expression maps Name Allows you to set the name of the expression map that appears in the program; for example, in the Endpoint Setup dialog. ID Allows you to set the unique ID of the expression map. You can enter any content in the ID field. It can be useful to include the instrument and sound library for which you created the map, as well as your name; for example, xmap.user.paulsmith.hso.violinpizz. Creator Allows you to name the creator if you are sharing your expression map with other users.
Library Expression maps The Base and Add-on Switches section contains the following: 1 Switches table: Contains the switches in the currently selected expression map. Allows you to add new switches and edit existing ones. 2 Name: Allows you to change the name that appears for the currently selected switch in the Switches table; for example, so it appears the same as in your sound library.
Library Expression maps The Switches table comprises the following: 1 2 Type column: Displays the switch type. Switches can be any of the following types: ● Base ● Add-on ● Init Name column: Displays the name of the switch. By default, this is the same as the playback technique or playback technique combination it triggers. In simple cases, each switch triggers an individual playback technique, such as Staccato or Accent.
Library Expression maps ● Delete Technique : Deletes the selected switch. Selecting a switch in the Switches table allows you to edit its controls and actions. Different options are available in the Base and Add-on Switches section depending on the switch type. NOTE ● Most instruments have a “natural” playback technique, which is the most common way of playing the instrument. Dorico SE requires every instrument to have a defined natural playback technique.
Library Expression maps NOTE 4 ● You can change the values of cells in the Actions table by double-clicking them, or selecting them and pressing Return . ● You can only select one action at a time in the Actions table. Actions table action bar: Contains the following options: : Adds a control change action with default settings. ● Add Control Change Action ● Add Program Change Action : Adds a program change action with default settings.
Library Expression maps ● ● !=: Not equal to ● <: Less than ● <=: Less than or equal to ● >: More than ● >=: More than or equal to Third column: Controls the note length used by the condition. The following note length values are available: ● Very short: A dotted 16th note at 120 bpm, or 0.1875 seconds ● Short: A dotted eighth note at 120 bpm, or 0.375 seconds ● Medium: A dotted quarter note at 120 bpm, or 0.75 seconds ● Long: A dotted half note at 120 bpm, or 1.
Library Expression maps ● ● For notes a quarter note or shorter in duration, the value applies to the entire note. ● For notes longer than a quarter note, the value only applies to the last quarter note of their overall duration. Volume dynamic: Allows you to choose whether the volume dynamic for the selected switch is controlled by its Note velocity or a Control change. NOTE If you choose Control change, you must specify the controller by number.
Library Expression maps You can allow Dorico SE to define mutual exclusion groups automatically or define them yourself manually. Mutual exclusion groups apply only to the selected expression map. This allows you to set different mutual exclusion groups in each expression map; for example, if one of your sound libraries supports a particular playback technique combination for an instrument but another sound library does not.
Library Expression maps Expression map/Library management options At the bottom of the Expression Maps dialog, there are the following expression map and library management options: Reset to Library Defaults Allows you to revert any changes you have made to the expression maps from the Default Library. Import Library Opens the File Explorer/macOS Finder, where you can select the .doricolib files that you want to import as expression maps.
Library Expression maps 1 Techniques list Allows you to select playback techniques to include in a new switch or to change the playback techniques in an existing switch. You can select multiple playback techniques to combine by Ctrl/Cmd -clicking each playback technique. 2 Name Displays the name of the selected playback technique. If you select multiple playback techniques, each name is automatically separated by a + symbol.
Library Expression maps Add-on A switch that applies in addition to the existing base switch. For example, some sound libraries allow you to use the same legato switch in addition to different base switches. Add-on switches do not remove or change base switches. Add-on switches can only trigger simple key switch notes and controller values. Init A switch that sends instructions when playback starts, such as ensuring a MIDI controller always starts at a set value.
Library Expression maps and want to use the same switches for all four trumpets, you might use a relative channel change action to switch from the “natural” original channel to “muted” on the +1 relative channel. Relative channel numbers relate to the original channel number of the endpoint for the corresponding instrument. A 0 relative channel change switches back to the original channel. TIP You can add actions to individual switches in the Expression Maps dialog.
Library Expression maps Adding/Editing mutual exclusion groups in expression maps on page 590 Adding/Editing switches in expression maps You can create new and edit existing switches that trigger playback techniques or combinations of playback techniques in individual expression maps; for example, to add an add-on switch to an existing base switch, or to create a new base switch with note length conditions.
Library Expression maps 10. Choose one of the following pitches for Middle C (note 60): ● C3 ● C4 ● C5 NOTE Steps 11 to 15 only apply to base switches. For init and add-on switches, you can skip to step 16. 11. Optional: Repeat steps 6 to 10 for each action you require for the currently selected switch. 12. In the Conditions table, add a condition for the currently selected base switch in one of the following ways: ● To create a new condition, click Add Technique in the action bar.
Library Expression maps 7. In the Mutual Exclusion Groups column, select the mutual exclusion groups whose playback techniques you want to change. 8. Change the playback techniques in the selected mutual exclusion group in any of the following ways: 9. ● To add new playback techniques to the mutual exclusion group, click Add in the Has techniques column action bar to open the Playback Technique Combinations dialog, select the playback techniques you want to add, then click OK.
Library Percussion maps RESULT The selected expression maps are exported as a .doricolib file and saved in the selected location. Percussion maps Unpitched percussion instruments are played back using patches that map unpitched sounds onto different MIDI notes. The pitches required to produce different unpitched sounds vary by device, sound library, manufacturer, and so on, and have no connection to the position of percussion instruments on five-line staves.
Library Percussion maps The Percussion Maps dialog is divided into the following sections: 1 Percussion maps list Contains the percussion maps currently available in your project. You can add and delete percussion maps using the following buttons in the action bar at the bottom of the percussion maps list: ● Add Percussion Map ● Duplicate Percussion Map : Creates a copy of an existing percussion map that you can edit separately from the original.
Library Percussion maps ● ID: Allows you to set the unique ID of the percussion map. You can enter any content in the ID field. It can be useful to include the instrument and sound library for which you created the map, as well as your name; for example, xmap.user.paulsmith.hso.cowbell. ● Version: Allows you to indicate the percussion map version so you can identify the most recent one.
Library Percussion maps You can change the data for the currently selected drum kit note in the Edit Drum Kit Note subsection. 7 Edit Drum Kit Note subsection Allows you to specify data in the following fields for the drum kit note currently selected in the Drum Kit Note Map table: ● Name: The displayed name for the specific combination of instrument and playback technique. You may choose to input the name used in the manufacturer’s documentation for your VST instrument or MIDI output device.
Library Percussion maps It can be useful to include the instrument and sound library for which you created the map, as well as your name, in the identification name for percussion maps; for example, xmap.user.paulsmith.hso.cowbell. 6. Choose one of the following options for Map defines sounds for, as appropriate for the current percussion map: ● Multiple Instruments ● Single Instruments 7. In the Drum Kit Note Map section, click Show all to show unmapped notes. 8.
Library Percussion maps Importing percussion maps You can import percussion maps into projects. Percussion maps are saved as .doricolib files. PROCEDURE 1. Choose Library > Percussion Maps to open the Percussion Maps dialog. 2. Click Import Library to open the File Explorer/macOS Finder. 3. Locate and select the percussion map file you want to import. 4. Click Open. RESULT The selected percussion map is imported into your project. It appears in the percussion maps list.
Library Playback techniques 2. In the list at the top of the dialog, select the playing technique-specific notehead whose playback behaviors you want to define. 3. Click Add Technique 4. Click Choose Playing Techniques beside the Playback playing technique field to open the Playback Technique Combinations dialog. 5. Select the playback techniques you want. in the action bar at the bottom left of the dialog. TIP You can select a single playback technique or combine multiple playback techniques.
Library Playback techniques You can map playback techniques as required for different sound libraries in the Expression Maps dialog, including creating new combinations of existing playback techniques, such as Legato and Tremolo, which allows them to be used simultaneously. You can see which playback techniques are in use at any particular rhythmic position in the playing techniques lane for the corresponding instrument track.
Library Playback techniques The Edit Playback Techniques dialog contains the following sections and options: 1 Category menu Allows you to filter the list of playback techniques by selecting a category from the menu, such as Techniques or Dynamics. 2 Playback techniques list Contains all the playback techniques in the project within the currently selected category.
Library Playback techniques is found, such as a staccato articulation, while Direction applies to all following notes until it is replaced by another playing technique, such as pizzicato. RELATED LINKS Expression Maps dialog on page 575 Playback Technique Combinations dialog on page 585 Adding/Editing mutual exclusion groups in expression maps on page 590 601 Dorico SE 4.3.
Notation reference
Introduction This notation reference contains information about the accepted conventions for presenting different notations and how to change their appearance and placement in Dorico SE, both for individual items and by changing default settings. It also contains instructions for inputting more complex notations, such as cross-staff glissando lines, which are described in the corresponding chapter.
Accidentals Accidentals are shown beside notes to indicate their pitch, both when notated on a staff and written out in text. In music based in Western tonality, they usually show that the pitch of a note has been altered so that it does not conform to the prevailing key signature. In Dorico SE, each note has its own fixed pitch that is independent of the prevailing key signature, and accidentals are automatically hidden and shown as appropriate.
Accidentals Hiding/Showing or parenthesizing accidentals ● In the Notes panel, click the accidentals you want to delete. RESULT The corresponding accidentals are deleted from the selected notes. This changes their pitch. For example, deleting the sharp from a G♯ turns it into G♮. NOTE ● Deleting accidentals causes accidentals to appear on any subsequent notes of the same pitch in the same bar.
Accidentals Stacking of accidentals RESULT Accidentals on the selected notes are shown, hidden, or shown in round or square brackets. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. NOTE ● Hiding accidentals does not affect the pitch of notes in playback. ● You can assign key commands for different accidental hiding, showing, and parenthesizing commands on the Key Commands page in Preferences.
Accidentals Altered unisons Accidental stacking rules for dense chords Dorico SE uses special stacking calculations in dense chords with multiple accidentals to ensure legibility. Chords are considered dense when they have six or more accidentals within the span of an octave. For dense chords, accidentals are stacked as follows: 1. The highest accidental is inserted in the first column to the left of the notes. 2.
Accidentals Microtonal accidentals EXAMPLE A single stem altered unison A split stem altered unison RELATED LINKS Inputting chords on page 225 Changing how altered unisons appear You can change how individual altered unisons appear, including within chords containing other altered unisons. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown.
Accidentals Accidental duration rules Accidental duration rules Accidental duration rules determine how long accidentals apply, such as within a bar, at a different octave, or just for a single note. Dorico SE uses the common practice accidental duration rule. Common practice In common practice, an accidental affects all notes of the same pitch in the same octave within the same bar, unless it is cancelled by another accidental. If it is not cancelled, it is automatically cancelled in the following bar.
Articulations Articulations are markings that are drawn above or below notes and chords. Articulations tell a performer how to attack a note or how long to play a note relative to its notated duration. In Dorico SE, articulations are defined as something that alters the way a note is played, in a way that is consistent across all instruments.
Articulations Deleting articulations Deleting articulations Individual articulation markings cannot be selected and deleted separately from their notehead in Write mode, so articulations must be deleted by selecting the note or notes to which they are attached, and deselecting the articulation. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the notes whose articulations you want to delete. 2. Deselect the articulations in any of the following ways: ● Press the key commands of the articulations you want to delete.
Articulations Positions of articulations Order of articulations If there are multiple articulations on the same notes, their vertical position and proximity to noteheads/stems depends on their type. Articulations are positioned in the following order: 1. Articulations of duration are positioned closest to notehead/stems. 2. Articulations of force are positioned outside articulations of duration. 3. Articulations of stress are positioned furthest from noteheads/stems.
Articulations Positions of articulations 3. Choose one of the following options: ● First note ● Last note RESULT The position of articulations in the selected tie chains is changed. RELATED LINKS Hiding/Showing zones on page 41 Properties panel on page 557 Changing the placement of articulations relative to notes You can change whether individual articulations are placed on the notehead side or stem side of notes.
Articulations Articulations in playback PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. is selected in the lower zone toolbar. PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes/chords whose articulation placement you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Inside slur endpoint in the Articulations group. 3. Activate/Deactivate the corresponding checkbox.
Bars Bars indicate a usually regular pattern of beats, determined by the prevailing time signature. Bars are separated from adjacent bars by vertical barlines, and each bar has a unique bar number. Dorico SE automatically numbers bars and shows barlines between bars as required for the prevailing time signature.
Bars Deleting bars/beats For example, enter –6 to delete six bars, meaning the bar you selected and the subsequent five bars, or -2q to delete two quarter note beats, starting from the selected rhythmic position. 4. Press Return to close the popover. RESULT The number of bars or beats specified is deleted. Just as when Insert mode is activated, music to the right of the selection moves up to fill in the gap. NOTE ● Any signposts in the selection are also deleted.
Bars Deleting bars/beats NOTE ● Any signposts in the selection are also deleted. ● Deleting some, but not all, beats from bars according to the prevailing time signature deletes the contents of those beats only. If you want to shorten a bar’s duration, such as at the end of flows that start with a pick-up bar, you must instead either input a time signature with the required number of beats then hide the time signature, or input a barline and delete any excess bars if necessary.
Bars Splits in bars 2. Press Backspace or Delete . RELATED LINKS Large selections on page 388 Filters on page 392 Insert mode on page 407 Splits in bars You can split bars rhythmically by changing the number of beats in each bar. You can split bars visually across system or frame breaks, which might be required in music with an irregular meter or in passages of polymeter.
Bars Splits in bars Inserting system breaks on page 534 Inserting frame breaks on page 536 Inputting notes in Insert mode on page 211 Insert mode on page 407 619 Dorico SE 4.3.
Barlines Barlines are vertical lines that cross staves in order to show how music is divided into bars, according to the time signature. The most commonly used barline is the single barline between adjacent bars, but there are different types, such as double or repeat barlines. The final system in a piece in 12/8 containing a key change with double barline, three normal barlines, and a final barline at the end Dorico SE automatically shows barlines as required for the prevailing time signature.
Barlines Types of barlines Double A double barline consists of two lines, both the width of a single barline, positioned half a space apart by default. It is often used to denote significant changes in the music, or to mark the placement of rehearsal marks, key signature changes, and tempo changes. Final A final barline consists of two lines: one of normal width, the other thick. It marks where the music ends.
Barlines Types of barlines Barlines across staff groups on page 623 Changing the barline shown before repeat barlines You can change the barline shown at the end of individual systems that are followed by start repeat barlines at the beginning of the next system. For example, if you want to show normal barlines at the end of some systems following by start repeat barlines but double barlines at the end of others.
Barlines Barlines across staff groups Barlines across staff groups In order to make it easier to find a particular instrument within a score, barlines can extend across instrumental and staff groups. Barlines across default staff groups When a barline only appears on individual staves, it is much harder to locate individual lines at a glance. However, when barlines continue across instrumental groups in the score, instrument families are shown as blocks, which makes finding an instrument much easier.
Barlines Barlines across staff groups Adding players to groups on page 144 Deleting player groups on page 146 Player group labels on page 984 Changing the default barline joins You can change whether barline joins automatically extend across staff groups that are joined by a bracket or brace, or break between each instrument, in each layout independently. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2.
Bar numbers Bar numbers provide crucial reference points in music and make the chronological sequence of music clear. By providing a unique number for each bar, they enable accurate references to specific parts of pieces and allow players to co-ordinate themselves easily in rehearsals and concerts. In Dorico SE, bar numbers appear automatically, following the most common practice of showing a bar number at the start of each system in all layouts by default.
Bar numbers Hiding/Showing bar number enclosures 4. In the Frequency subsection, choose one of the following options for Show bar numbers: ● Every system ● Every n bars ● Every bar ● None 5. Optional: If you chose Every n bars, set a custom frequency for bar numbers by changing the value for Interval. 6. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT Bar numbers are hidden in the selected layouts when you choose None, and shown at the corresponding frequency when you choose any other option.
Bar numbers Hiding/Showing bar number ranges on multi-bar rests 5. ● None ● Rectangle ● Circle Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The enclosure type of all bar numbers in the selected layouts is changed.
Bar numbers Hiding/Showing guide bar numbers Hiding/Showing guide bar numbers You can hide/show guide bar numbers on every bar and above every system in page view and galley view independently; for example, to make it easier to check the bar number in scores with many staves. Guide bar numbers are not printed. PROCEDURE ● Hide/Show guide bar numbers in any of the following ways: ● To hide/show guide bar numbers in page view, choose View > Bar Numbers > Page View.
Bar numbers Positions of bar numbers Positions of bar numbers Bar numbers are typically shown at the start of each system, above the staff, and aligned with the initial barline. You can change the default positions and frequency of bar numbers in each layout independently on the Bar Numbers page in Layout Options. For example, you might want to show bar numbers every bar in full score layouts but only at the start of each system in part layouts.
Bar numbers Positions of bar numbers and dragging across multiple layouts, Shift -clicking adjacent layouts, and Ctrl/Cmd -clicking individual layouts. 3. In the category list, click Bar Numbers. 4. In the Placement subsection, activate the checkbox for each player in the Show above specific players list above whose top staff you want to show bar numbers. 5. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The vertical positions of bar numbers are changed in the selected layouts.
Bar numbers Positions of bar numbers RESULT Increasing the values positions bar numbers further away from the staff and/or other objects, either above or below the staff depending on your setting for Placement relative to staff. Decreasing the values positions bar numbers closer to the staff and/or other objects. When Align bar numbers across width of system is activated, bar numbers automatically vertically align within systems, with their position determined by the bar number furthest from the staff.
Bar numbers Bar number changes Hiding bar numbers at time signatures shown at system object positions You can choose to hide bar numbers at the same rhythmic position as time signatures shown at system object positions, as the resulting collision can be difficult to resolve in a visually clear way when bar numbers are centered on barlines. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2.
Bar numbers Bar number changes Subordinate Adds a secondary bar number sequence that uses letters rather than numbers to indicate the sequence. This can be useful in situations where a new version of a piece has been created with more bars inserted, but the original bar numbers are required. Don’t Include Excludes the selected bar from the current bar number sequence. If bar numbers are shown every bar, no bar number is shown in bars in which you have chosen Don’t Include.
Bar numbers Subordinate bar numbers Deleting bar number changes You can delete any bar number changes you have added. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the bar number changes you want to delete. 2. Press Backspace or Delete . RESULT The bar number changes are deleted. Subsequent bars follow the previous bar number sequence until the next bar number change, or until the end of the flow.
Bar numbers Subordinate bar numbers 4. Optional: If you want to change the primary bar number that accompanies subordinate bar numbers, activate Primary and change the value in the value field. For example, if you want the bar number sequence 6, 7a, 7b rather than 6, 7, 7a. 5. Change the first letter in the subordinate bar number sequence by changing the value in the Subordinate value field. The corresponding alphabetical letter is shown to the right of the value field.
Bar numbers Bar numbers and repeats TIP You do not have to add subordinate bar number changes in chronological order. You can enter a return to the primary bar number sequence first, before adding the subordinate bar number sequence. Bar numbers and repeats By default in Dorico SE, repeats are not included in the bar number count. For example, if the first ending ends in bar 10, the second ending starts in bar 11, even though the first section is repeated and therefore more than ten bars have been played.
Beaming A beam is a line that connects notes with tails to show rhythmic grouping, which varies according to the metrical structure of the prevailing time signature. This way of grouping notes helps performers calculate quickly exactly how to play their given rhythm and helps them follow both their part and, if applicable, the conductor.
Beaming Beaming notes together manually Dorico SE groups and beams notes in irregular time signatures, such as 5/8 or 7/8, according to the most common practices for those time signatures. Default beam grouping in 5/8 Default beam grouping in 7/8 For situations where you want to control the beat grouping in more detail, you can input a custom time signature with an explicit rhythmic subdivision. Dorico SE then automatically beams phrases according to this subdivision.
Beaming Beaming notes together manually ● You can assign a key command for Beam Together on the Key Commands page in Preferences.
Beaming Beaming notes together manually Splitting beam groups You can split beams into two beam groups at specific rhythmic positions. You can also split secondary beams within beamed groups. PROCEDURE 1. Select the noteheads to the right of where you want to split beams. 2. Split the beam or secondary beam in one of the following ways: ● Choose Edit > Notations > Beaming > Split Beam. ● Choose Edit > Notations > Beaming > Split Secondary Beam.
Beaming Beam placement relative to the staff RESULT Beam grouping is reset to the default settings. Beam placement relative to the staff The default staff-relative placement of beams is determined by the staff positions of the notes within the beamed group and their resulting stem directions.
Beaming Beam slants Removing beam placement changes You can undo changes to the staff-relative placement of beams in order to remove the stem direction change. This reverts selected beams to their default placement. PROCEDURE 1. Select at least one note in each of the beamed phrases whose staff-relative placement change you want to remove. 2. Choose Edit > Notations > Stem > Remove Forced Stem. You can also choose this option from the context menu.
Beaming Centered beams ensuring a minimum distance between the note closest to the beam and the innermost beam line, and avoiding wedges where possible. In Dorico SE, you can change the beam slants of individual beams. Changing beam slants You can change the slants, or angles, of individual beams. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown.
Beaming Centered beams maximum distance between noteheads and the beam, but can also place the beam within the staff, which can obscure staff lines. By default, Dorico SE allows beams that include notes on both sides of the middle staff line to appear centered. You can also create custom centered beams for beams that include notes only on one side of the middle staff line.
Beaming Creating cross-staff beams/tremolos 3. Optional: If you created a custom centered beam, change the stem direction of each note in the selected beams as required in the Custom Centered Beam dialog, then click OK. RESULT Beams are centered between the notes in the selected beam groups. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. If you select notes in multiple beams, each beam is centered separately.
Beaming Creating cross-staff beams/tremolos PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes you want to cross to another staff. NOTE You can only cross notes to other staves held by the same player. 2. Cross the notes to other staves in any of the following ways: ● To cross notes to the staff above, press N . ● To cross notes to the staff below, press M . ● Choose Edit > Notations > Cross Staff > Cross to Staff Above. ● Choose Edit > Notations > Cross Staff > Cross to Staff Below.
Beaming Creating cross-staff beams/tremolos Hiding/Showing voice colors on page 1082 Tremolos on page 1046 Changing to optical cross-staff beam spacing You can make the stems in cross-staff beams, rather than the noteheads, evenly spaced in each layout independently. This can make it easier to perceive the evenness of rhythmic spacing in cross-staff beams than when noteheads are evenly spaced. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2.
Beaming Creating cross-staff beams/tremolos A cross-staff beam across the upper two staves on an instrument with three staves A cross-staff beam across the lower two staves on an instrument with three staves If a beam group contains notes on all three staves, the placement of the beam depends on the stem directions of the notes in each staff. 1 If all notes in the beam group are stem-up, the beam is placed above the top staff.
Beaming Beam corners Resetting notes crossed to other staves You can reset notes that have been crossed to other staves so that they appear on their default staff. We recommend resetting cross-staff notes before copying and pasting them to other staves to avoid unexpected beaming. PROCEDURE 1. Select the cross-staff notes you want to reset. 2. Choose Edit > Notations > Cross Staff > Reset to Original Staff. You can also choose this option from the context menu.
Beaming Secondary beams A phrase of 64th notes, with secondary beams subdivided to show 16th and eighth note groups Changing the direction of partial beams Dorico SE automatically inputs a partial beam if one is required. You can change on which side of stems individual partial beams appear. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes whose partial beam direction you want to change. 2.
Beaming Tuplets within beams NOTE The Beaming group is only shown in the Properties panel if your selection only contains notes. ● 3. Choose Edit > Notations > Beaming > Split Secondary Beam. You can also choose this option from the context menu. In the Properties panel, select the note value that corresponds to the number of beam lines you want shown from the Split secondary beam menu. RESULT The number of beam lines shown immediately to the left of each selected note is changed.
Beaming Stemlets Stemlets Stemlets are short stems that extend from beams to rests within beam groups. They can help make music easier to read, as they help to maintain a regular pattern of stems within beams. In the examples, beaming all notes and rests together to show the boundaries of quarter note (crotchet) beats makes the syncopation of the notes easier to read. The stemlets on the rests help make clear where within the quarter note beats each note occurs.
Note and rest grouping There are generally accepted conventions for how notes and rests of different durations are notated and grouped in different contexts and meters. In Dorico SE, notes are automatically notated to fit within bars. Depending on the prevailing time signature, there can be many different ways to beam notes together. For example, you might want to beam all notes in the bar together in time signatures that cannot be divided in half and are often not divided at all, such as 3/4.
Note and rest grouping Creating custom beat groupings for meters 2. Optional: If you want to input a time signature with custom beat grouping onto multiple specific staves at once, extend the caret to those staves. 3. Optional: If you want Dorico SE to add beats at the end of the region affected by the new time signature if required, activate Insert mode in any of the following ways: 4. 5. ● Press I . ● In the Notes toolbox, click Insert .
Brackets and braces Brackets and braces are thick straight and curved lines in the left-hand margin that show instrument groupings. Brackets A bracket is a thick black line, the width of a beam, that groups staves together, most commonly according to instrument family. It often has winged ends that point inwards towards the score. It is always positioned directly to the left of a systemic barline.
Brackets and braces Changing bracket grouping according to ensemble type A brace connecting two piano staves NOTE ● Staves cannot be bracketed and braced simultaneously. Therefore, braced staves are excluded from bracketed groups. They also cannot show sub-brackets or sub-sub-brackets. ● System objects are only shown above instrument families that are bracketed or braced together. ● Blank staves can only show brackets/braces when they are shown after final flows.
Brackets and braces Changing bracket grouping according to ensemble type 5. ● Wind band ● Big band ● British brass band Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The default bracket grouping is changed in the selected layouts. TIP ● There are further options for bracketing on the Brackets and Braces page, such as hiding/ showing brackets when there is only a single instrument in the bracket group and hiding/ showing braces when only a single staff is shown.
Brackets and braces Secondary brackets This is the default setting for full score layouts in projects started from Chamber and Pit band project templates. Wind band Staves are bracketed according to their instrument type. For example, Flute 1 and Flute 2 are bracketed together, but separately from the other woodwind instruments. Big band Staves are bracketed according to their instrument family, except for brass instruments, which are all bracketed according to their instrument type.
Brackets and braces Secondary brackets Secondary bracket as a sub-bracket Secondary bracket as a brace NOTE You cannot show sub-sub-brackets in addition to braces, you can only show sub-sub-brackets in addition to sub-brackets. Hiding/Showing secondary brackets You can hide/show secondary brackets for adjacent identical instruments in bracketed groups in each layout independently. You can also choose only to show secondary brackets when subbracketed groups contain at least two staves. PROCEDURE 1.
Brackets and braces Sub-sub-brackets Showing secondary brackets as sub-brackets/braces Secondary brackets extend beyond brackets, allowing you to mark groups of staves within a bracketed group. You can show secondary brackets as either braces positioned outside the bracket or as sub-brackets in each layout independently. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to change the appearance of secondary brackets.
Chord symbols Chord symbols describe the vertical harmony of the music at a specific moment. They are frequently used in jazz and pop music, where players often improvise around chord progressions. Chord symbols shown above slashes on the Clarinet and Piano staves to help the players improvise around the notated Cornet melody. You can input chord symbols using the chord symbols popover and you can automatically generate chord symbols based on existing music.
Chord symbols Chord components Capos on page 127 Capo vs. main chords on page 127 Hiding/Showing signposts on page 406 Chords track on page 449 Enabling chord symbol playback on page 449 Chord components Chord symbols consist of a root and a quality, with intervals, alterations, and an altered bass note included if required. Root The root note of the chord, expressed either as a note name or as a specific degree of a scale.
Chord symbols Positions of chord symbols PROCEDURE 1. In Setup mode, select a player in the Players panel for whom you want to hide/show chord symbols. 2. In the action bar, click Player Settings and choose one of the following options: ● To show chord symbols above all instrument staves held by the player, choose Chord Symbols > Show for All Instruments.
Chord symbols Positions of chord symbols Hiding/Showing chord symbols in layouts You can hide/show chord symbols in different types of layouts. By default, chord symbols appear in all applicable layouts for rhythm section instruments. NOTE If chord symbols are hidden for all instruments in the current layout, signposts are shown above the top staff. PROCEDURE 1. In Setup mode, select a player in the Players panel. 2.
Chord symbols Positions of chord symbols RELATED LINKS Inputting chord symbols on page 290 Showing only chord symbols or chord diagrams on page 678 Capo vs. main chords on page 127 Hiding/Showing capo chord symbols on page 132 Changing the alignment of chord symbols relative to notes You can change the horizontal alignment of individual chord symbols relative to notes. For example, you might center-align wide chord symbols to avoid collisions with barlines.
Chord symbols Chord symbol regions ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. PROCEDURE 1. Select the chord symbols whose staff-relative placement you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Placement in the Chord Symbols group. 3. Choose one of the following options: ● Above ● Below RESULT The staff-relative placement of the selected chord symbols is changed.
Chord symbols Transposing chord symbols In Write mode, each region has a handle at the start and end, which you can use to move and lengthen/shorten regions.
Chord symbols Respelling chord symbols RESULT The selected chord symbols are transposed. RELATED LINKS Transpose dialog on page 424 Concert vs. transposed pitch on page 154 Making layouts transposing/concert pitch on page 154 Capos on page 127 Respelling chord symbols You can change the enharmonic spelling of chord symbols for transposing instruments; for example, to choose a simpler enharmonic equivalent spelling.
Chord symbols Hiding/Showing the root and quality of chord symbols PROCEDURE 1. Select the chord symbols you want to show as a mode. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Show as mode in the Chord Symbols group. 3. Select the mode you want from the menu. RESULT The selected chord symbols are respelled according to the selected mode. This does not affect the notes included in the chord symbols.
Chord symbols Changing the arrangement of compound chord symbols PROCEDURE 1. Select the chord symbols whose root and quality you want to hide. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Hide root and quality in the Chord Symbols group. 3. Activate/Deactivate the corresponding checkbox. RESULT The root and quality of the selected chord symbols are hidden when the checkbox is activated, and shown when the checkbox is deactivated.
Chord symbols Parenthesized chord symbols RELATED LINKS Chord components on page 662 Inputting chord symbols on page 290 Changing the property scope on page 559 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 544 Parenthesized chord symbols Parentheses around chord symbols are often used to indicate an alternative set of chord changes or that chords are optional. In Dorico SE, you can show parentheses around any chord symbol that uses appearance presets.
Chord symbols Parenthesized chord symbols EXAMPLE Chord symbols without parentheses Chord symbols with parentheses Showing single parentheses on chord symbols You can show only a single left or right parenthesis on individual parenthesized chord symbols; for example, to indicate that all chord symbols between two parenthesized chord symbols are optional. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown.
Chord symbols Parenthesized chord symbols Changing the style of chord symbol parentheses You can change the parenthesis style for individual chord symbols. For example, you might show stacked chord symbols with slender/tall parentheses due to their height. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. PROCEDURE 1. Select the parenthesized chord symbols whose parenthesis style you want to change. 2.
Chord symbols Chord symbols imported from MusicXML RESULT The size of parentheses around the selected chord symbols is changed. RELATED LINKS Large selections on page 388 Chord symbols imported from MusicXML Chord symbols are imported from MusicXML files. However, chords that specify Neapolitan, Italian, French, German, Pedal, Tristan, and Other values for the kind of element are ignored during import, as there is no information to specify what notes these chord symbols are meant to describe.
Chord diagrams Chord diagrams represent the pattern of strings and frets on fretted instruments and use dots to indicate the stopped finger positions required to produce the corresponding chord. This demonstrates the specific shape of chords in a compact way and is useful if a particular voicing is required. In Dorico SE, chord diagrams are part of chord symbols, meaning you can show them below chord symbols wherever they are shown.
Chord diagrams Chord diagram components Chord diagram components Chord diagrams use a combination of symbols, dots, and lines to convey the information about strings, fret positions, and finger positions that performers require to play the corresponding chord. 1 Omitted string Indicates a string that must not sound. 2 Open string Indicates a string that must sound but must be left open; that is, not stopped.
Chord diagrams Hiding/Showing chord diagrams PREREQUISITE ● You have input the chord symbols for which you want to show chord diagrams. ● Chord symbols are shown above the staves where you want to show chord diagrams. ● If you want to show chord diagrams using a custom fretted instrument tuning, you have imported the tuning or changed the tuning of a fretted instrument in the project accordingly. PROCEDURE 1.
Chord diagrams Hiding/Showing chord diagrams Showing only chord symbols or chord diagrams You can show only the chord symbol or chord diagram for individual chord symbols on staves set to show chord diagrams. For example, if you want to show both the symbol and diagram for the first time each chord appears but only show chord symbols for subsequent instances. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains.
Chord diagrams Hiding/Showing used chord diagrams grids Hiding/Showing used chord diagrams grids You can hide/show grids that contain all chord diagrams used in each flow in each layout independently. By default, used chord diagrams grids display standard guitar tuning chord diagrams but you can change this to show chord diagrams for any fretted instrument or tuning. Used chord diagrams grids are commonly used in lead sheets for pop and rock music.
Chord diagrams Hiding/Showing fingerings in chord diagrams NOTE ● Even if no chord symbols exist in a flow, vertical space for the used chord diagrams grid is added at the start of the flow. ● You cannot select or edit individual chord diagrams in used chord diagrams grids. EXAMPLE Used chord diagrams grid at the start of a flow AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can change the margins of pages, music frames, and/or flow headings if required to accommodate used chord diagrams grids.
Chord diagrams Hiding/Showing fingerings in chord diagrams 5. 6. ● To hide/show fingerings in chord diagrams shown alongside chord symbols, activate/ deactivate Show fingerings in chord diagrams. ● To hide/show fingerings in used chord diagrams grids, activate/deactivate Show fingerings in chord diagrams at start of flow. Choose one of the following options for Fingerings position: ● Inside dot ● At end of string Click Apply, then Close.
Chord diagrams Changing the chord diagram shape Changing the chord diagram shape You can change the chord diagram shape shown at individual rhythmic positions; for example, if you require a shape with a different voicing. Many chords have multiple playable shapes. You can also apply your changes to all other instances of the same chord for instruments with compatible tunings. PROCEDURE 1. Select the chord diagram whose shape you want to change.
Chord diagrams Creating new chord diagram shapes The Choose Chord Diagram dialog comprises the following: 1 Available chord diagrams Displays all the valid chord diagram shapes for the selected chord and allows you to select a different shape to show at the selected rhythmic position. Shapes you have created yourself appear in a different color.
Chord diagrams Creating new chord diagram shapes RESULT The new shape is saved and is used for the selected chord diagram. The new shape also becomes available for any other chord for which it is valid. Edit Chord Diagram dialog The Edit Chord Diagram dialog allows you to edit the shape of individual chord diagrams, including changing the number of frets shown, stopped fret positions, and the starting fret number.
Chord diagrams Creating new chord diagram shapes Displays the open pitch of the corresponding string for reference. 6 Current string pitch Displays the current pitch of the corresponding string if it is open or stopped. If the pitch of a string is not part of the chord, the string pitch appears red. 7 String status Displays the current usage status of the corresponding string and allows you to switch the status of individual strings between open and omitted by clicking in this row.
Clefs Clefs are the symbol at the start of every system that give the notes on the staff context; that is, the clef tells you which note of the scale applies to each line or space of the staff. To minimize the number of ledger lines required for notes, different clefs are typically used according to the register of instruments. The common clefs are: ● Treble clef, or G clef, whose spiral shape centers around G, normally the G above middle C.
Clefs Showing clefs after grace notes RELATED LINKS Input methods for clefs and octave lines on page 298 Clefs with octave indicators on page 689 Instrument picker on page 95 Hiding/Showing clefs according to layout transpositions on page 687 Cautionary key signatures on page 766 Cautionary time signatures on page 1035 Showing clefs after grace notes According to convention, clefs are positioned before grace notes so this is the default in Dorico SE.
Clefs Changing the octave of clefs TIP Many instruments in Dorico SE show different clefs in full score/custom score and part layouts by default. You can select the appropriate instrument type from the instrument picker when adding or changing instruments. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. PROCEDURE 1. Select the clefs or signposts of clefs you want to hide/show according to the layout transposition. 2.
Clefs Clefs with octave indicators 3. Change the value in the value field. RESULT The octave of the selected clefs is changed in all layouts with the same transposition. For example, 1 shifts clefs up one octave, and -1 shifts clefs down one octave. The pitches of notes on the staves of the selected clefs are adjusted automatically. For example, if you shift a clef up one octave, notes after the clef appear an octave lower than they do without the octave shift.
Octave lines Octave lines indicate where notes are played higher/lower than they appear in the score or part. They are dashed or dotted horizontal lines with an italic numeral at the start. The numeral indicates the number of pitches by which the phrase is changed, such as 8 for one octave and 15 for two octaves. Octave lines that indicate notes are played higher than notated are placed above the staff, while octave lines that indicate notes are played lower than notated are placed below the staff.
Octave lines Positions of octave lines Positions of octave lines By default, octave lines that indicate notes are played higher than written are placed above the staff, while octave lines that indicate notes are played lower than written are placed below the staff. You can move octave lines to new rhythmic positions in Write mode. They are automatically positioned to avoid collisions.
Octave lines Positions of octave lines ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. PROCEDURE 1. Select the octave lines whose numeral alignment relative to accidentals you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, activate L position in the Octave Lines group. 3. Choose one of the following options: ● Notehead ● Accidental RESULT The alignment of the numerals of the selected octave lines is changed.
Cues Cues are passages of music shown in instrumental parts that are played by a different player, usually to help orientate players before entries or solos following a significant passage of rests. Cues can also be used to assist with co-ordination or tuning between players, or to indicate material that the player might be asked to double. A cue in a timpani part showing music from the bassoons NOTE In Dorico SE, you cannot input or edit cues.
Dynamics Dynamics indicate the loudness of the music and can be combined with expressive text to give further clarification about how to perform the music. Dynamics can indicate an immediate change in volume or a gradual change over a specified duration. A phrase with multiple different dynamics You can add modifiers to dynamics that can give stylistic direction context alongside the volume level, such as espressivo, which indicates that a passage is played loudly but also with expressive feeling.
Dynamics Positions of dynamics Force/Intensity of attack These dynamics, such as and , indicate that a note has a stronger attack than is usually expected for the dynamic, similar to an accent articulation. Combined dynamics Combined dynamics, such as or –, specify a sudden change of dynamic. You can create custom combined dynamics in Dorico SE, and control the intensity of each dynamic in the pair, in the Combined Dynamics section of the Dynamics panel.
Dynamics Positions of dynamics NOTE When using the mouse, you can only move and lengthen/shorten dynamics to noteheads. When using the keyboard, you can move and lengthen/shorten dynamics according to the current rhythmic grid resolution.
Dynamics Positions of dynamics RELATED LINKS Changing the property scope on page 559 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 544 Changing the alignment of dynamics relative to noteheads Immediate dynamics, such as and , are usually horizontally aligned with the optical center of noteheads. However, you can change the horizontal alignment of immediate dynamics individually. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains.
Dynamics Positions of dynamics The hairpin ends are not aligned because the barline does not extend beyond the bottom staff You can allow/disallow hairpins across barlines if the hairpin ends on the first note in the next bar. Disallowing hairpins across barlines ensures hairpins appear the same length on all staves.
Dynamics Parenthesizing dynamics Parenthesizing dynamics You can show individual dynamics in parentheses; for example, to indicate editorial dynamics that were not in the original manuscript. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. is selected in the lower zone toolbar. PROCEDURE 1.
Dynamics Hiding/Showing immediate dynamics Dynamic modifiers on page 702 Key Commands page in the Preferences dialog on page 54 Hiding/Showing immediate dynamics You can hide/show individual immediate dynamics such as and ; for example, if you only want to show the dynamic modifier, such as “sim.”, without its accompanying immediate dynamic. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown.
Dynamics Changing the appearance of sforzando/rinforzando dynamics PROCEDURE 1. Select the combined dynamics whose separator you want to hide/show. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Separator shown in the Dynamics group. 3. Activate/Deactivate the corresponding checkbox. 4.
Dynamics Voice-specific dynamics RELATED LINKS Types of dynamics on page 694 Changing the appearance/position of subito modifiers on page 704 Voice-specific dynamics Voice-specific dynamics only apply to a single voice on a staff, which allows you to specify different dynamics for each voice in multiple-voice contexts or for the separate staves of grand staff instruments. By default, dynamics apply to all voices on all staves belonging to a single instrument, including grand staff instruments.
Dynamics Dynamic modifiers TIP You can hide immediate dynamics if you only want to show the modifier.
Dynamics Dynamic modifiers Adding poco a poco text to gradual dynamics on page 708 Changing the appearance/position of subito modifiers You can change the appearance and/or position of individual subito modifiers. For example, if you want to show subito modifiers as sub. on the left of dynamics, or sub. dynamics as . You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown.
Dynamics Gradual dynamics PROCEDURE 1. Select the hairpins whose modifiers you want to show centered inside hairpins. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Modifier position in the Dynamics group. 3. Choose one of the following options: ● Above or Below ● Inside RESULT Modifiers on the selected hairpins appear centered inside the hairpins. They automatically erase their background so the text does not collide with the hairpin lines.
Dynamics Gradual dynamics In Dorico SE, gradual dynamics appear as hairpins by default. You can change the appearance of individual gradual dynamics. For example, if you want to show a particularly long crescendo using cresc. text rather than a hairpin. You can show gradual dynamic text in the following ways: ● cresc. or dim.: Abbreviated text with no continuation line ● cresc... or dim...
Dynamics Gradual dynamics 4. ● Hairpin ● cresc./dim. ● cresc... ● cre - scen - do Optional: Customize the appearance of the selected gradual dynamics in one of the following ways, depending on their Gradual style: ● If you selected Hairpin, activate Hairpin line style and choose one of the available options. ● If you selected cresc./dim., cresc..., or cre - scen - do, activate Diminuendo style and select one of the available options from the menu. ● If you selected cresc...
Dynamics Gradual dynamics RESULT A flared end is shown on the selected dynamics when Flared end is activated, and hidden when it is deactivated. EXAMPLE Crescendo hairpin with flared end hidden Crescendo hairpin with flared end shown Adding poco a poco text to gradual dynamics You can add poco a poco text to individual gradual dynamics after they have been input. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. PROCEDURE 1.
Dynamics Gradual dynamics Gradual dynamic spacing Dorico SE ensures that hairpins can always be clearly distinguished by giving hairpins a minimum default length. However, this can affect note spacing. The default minimum hairpin length is three spaces. When hairpins are shorter than this, they can sometimes be confused with the accent articulation mark.
Dynamics Messa di voce hairpins TIP You can control settings for each software instrument in the Expression Maps dialog. RELATED LINKS Expression Maps dialog on page 575 Messa di voce hairpins Messa di voce hairpins are single gradual dynamic items that appear as a pair of hairpins without an immediate dynamic in the middle. They indicate that within their duration, the volume either increases then decreases, or decreases then increases.
Dynamics Messa di voce hairpins TIP 1 represents a quarter note. RESULT The centers of the selected messa di voce hairpins are moved rhythmically. TIP In Write mode, you can also click and drag messa di voce hairpin center handles to noteheads to the right/left.
Dynamics Niente markings RELATED LINKS Hiding/Showing zones on page 41 Properties panel on page 557 Dynamics panel on page 285 Inputting dynamics with the popover on page 286 Inputting dynamics with the panel on page 289 Grace notes on page 751 Niente markings Niente markings at the start/end of gradual dynamics indicate that the dynamic either increases from, or decreases to, silence. This effect works very well on strings and singers with vowels, but it cannot always be played literally.
Dynamics Niente markings PROCEDURE 1. Select the gradual dynamics to which you want to add niente markings. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Niente in the Dynamics group. RESULT Niente markings are added to the selected gradual dynamics. TIP ● Deactivating the property removes niente markings from the selected gradual dynamics.
Dynamics Groups of dynamics EXAMPLE A niente shown as Circle on hairpin A niente shown as Text RELATED LINKS Hiding/Showing zones on page 41 Properties panel on page 557 Changing the property scope on page 559 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 544 Groups of dynamics Groups of dynamics are automatically aligned in a row and can be moved and edited as a group.
Dynamics Linked dynamics RELATED LINKS Linked dynamics on page 715 Grouping dynamics together You can manually group dynamics together that were not automatically grouped when they were input. Grouped dynamics are automatically aligned in a row and can be moved and edited as a group. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the dynamics you want to group together. 2. Choose Edit > Notations > Dynamics > Group Dynamics. You can also choose this option from the context menu.
Dynamics Linked dynamics Two linked dynamics with only the top dynamic selected Moving just the top dynamic of the linked group automatically moves the other to match its new position. Similarly, if you change one linked dynamic, for example, from to , all dynamics linked to the changed dynamic are also changed. If you group other dynamics to one of the linked dynamics, such as a hairpin, the hairpin is added at the same position in all linked staves.
Dynamics VST Expression Maps for volume types Linking dynamics together When you copy and paste identical dynamics to the same rhythmic position on other staves, those dynamics are linked together automatically. You can also manually link dynamics and groups of dynamics together that are not automatically linked to allow simultaneous editing. NOTE Groups of dynamics must be the same in order to link them together.
Dynamics VST Expression Maps for volume types ● CC11 Dynamics for dynamics produced by changing MIDI channel expression ● Modulation Wheel Dynamics for dynamics produced by changing MIDI controller 1 TIP You can edit expression maps in the Expression Maps dialog. 718 Dorico SE 4.3.
Figured bass Figured bass is a shorthand that uses figures to specify the harmony above the notated bass notes. It is particularly common in Baroque and early Classical music and in the parts of accompanying instruments, such as harpsichords and viols. Figured bass informs performers about the intended harmony but allows room for interpretation, such as improvised arpeggiated phrases using notes from the chord.
Figured bass Hiding/Showing figured bass in layouts Showing figured bass on rests on page 721 Showing single brackets on figured bass on page 722 Changing the staff-relative placement of figured bass on page 726 Appearance of figured bass on page 728 Hiding/Showing figured bass in layouts You can hide/show figured bass in each layout independently and only above the staves of specific players.
Figured bass Showing figured bass on rests PROCEDURE 1. Select the figured bass figures you want to hide, or the signposts of figures you want to show. 2. In the Properties panel, activate/deactivate Hidden in the Figured Bass group. RESULT The selected figured bass figures are hidden when Hidden is activated, and shown when it is deactivated. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
Figured bass Showing single brackets on figured bass Showing single brackets on figured bass You can show only a single left or right bracket on individual bracketed figured bass figures. For example, if you want to indicate that all figures between two bracketed figures are optional. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE ● You have input figured bass figures with brackets. ● The lower zone is shown.
Figured bass Figured bass hold lines Figure (selected) with no duration Figure (selected) with duration and hold line RELATED LINKS Grace notes on page 751 Hiding/Showing figured bass hold/suspension lines You can hide/show suspension lines between suspension and resolution figures and hold lines after resolution figures, independently of each other. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. PROCEDURE 1.
Figured bass Figured bass hold lines Lengthening/Shortening figured bass hold lines You can change the duration of figured bass figures after they have been input, which changes the length of their hold lines. Lengthening a figure that was input without duration gives it duration and shows a hold line. You can also change the end positions of figured bass hold lines relative to notes. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. PROCEDURE 1.
Figured bass Figured bass hold lines RELATED LINKS Lengthening/Shortening items on page 395 Showing brackets on figured bass hold lines You can show brackets on individual figured bass hold and suspension lines; for example, to indicate editorial hold lines. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. PROCEDURE 1. Select the figured bass hold/suspension lines on which you want to show brackets. 2.
Figured bass Positions of figured bass Positions of figured bass Figured bass is automatically organized into rows according to the number of rows required in each system independently. By default, rows are aligned at the top when below the staff and at the bottom when above the staff to minimize the gap between figured bass and the staff. The vertical position of figured bass is determined by the staves above which they are set to appear and your per-layout setting for their staff-relative placement.
Figured bass Positions of figured bass EXAMPLE Figured bass below the staff Figured bass above the staff RELATED LINKS Changing the property scope on page 559 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 544 Moving figured bass resolutions You can move resolution figures rhythmically, without affecting the position of the suspension figure or the overall duration of the figured bass suspension; for example, if you want a suspension to resolve on a different note.
Figured bass Appearance of figured bass RELATED LINKS Figured bass hold lines on page 722 Moving notes/items rhythmically on page 416 Changing the rhythmic grid resolution on page 189 Inputting figured bass on page 362 Appearance of figured bass The appearance of individual figures is determined either by the default settings in Dorico SE or your popover entry, depending on whether you instructed Dorico SE to follow your entry literally when you input each figure.
Figured bass Appearance of figured bass 2. In the Properties panel, activate Show compound intervals as simple in the Figured Bass group. RESULT The selected compound figures are simplified. Deactivating the property returns the selected figures to their default octave.
Figured bass Appearance of figured bass RESULT The selected figured bass figures are reset to follow the default settings. This can affect their appearance and suspension duration. TIP You can assign a key command for Reset Figured Bass on the Key Commands page in Preferences. RELATED LINKS Inputting figured bass on page 362 Key Commands page in the Preferences dialog on page 54 730 Dorico SE 4.3.
Fingering Fingerings use numbers and letters to recommend which fingers players should use for notes. This can be useful for music aimed at players learning the instrument and for difficult musical passages where certain fingering patterns make the notes much easier to play. Fingerings are often used in keyboard music, as players can use all ten fingers to play notes, and in guitar music, where fingerings are often used alongside fret positions.
Fingering Changing fingerings to substitution fingerings bottom staff. However, in dense contrapuntal music for these instruments, fingerings can be placed between the staves to follow the direction of the voices to which they apply. Different conventions apply to fingerings for fretted instruments, as they require fingerings for both the right and left hands.
Fingering Changing existing fingerings Changing the rhythmic position of substitution fingerings Substitution fingerings are shown as immediate by default, meaning that the substitution takes place on the same note, but you can change the rhythmic position at which individual substitutions take place. PROCEDURE 1. Select the substitution fingering whose deferred rhythmic position you want to change. 2.
Fingering Changing the staff-relative placement of fingerings RESULT The selected fingerings are changed. TIP You can also change existing fingerings in Write mode by opening the fingerings popover. Any existing fingerings on the selected note are shown in the popover.
Fingering Hiding/Showing fingering Showing fingerings inside the staff You can show individual fingerings belonging to non-fretted instruments beside noteheads inside the staff. NOTE ● These steps only apply to non-fretted instruments. Left-hand fingerings for fretted instruments are shown inside the staff by default. ● These steps do not apply to substitution fingerings. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. PROCEDURE 1.
Fingering Deleting fingerings RESULT All fingerings are shown in the selected layouts when the checkbox is activated, and hidden when the checkbox is deactivated. RELATED LINKS Hiding/Showing fingerings in chord diagrams on page 680 Deleting fingerings You can remove fingerings from notes after you have input them. However, because fingerings are properties of notes rather than separate items in Dorico SE, you cannot select and delete them as you would for other items. PROCEDURE 1.
Fingering Fingerings for fretted instruments Fingerings for fretted instruments Fretted instruments, such as the classical guitar, require additional fingering instructions for both hands due to the complex nature of the music. Fingerings for fretted instruments use the same fonts as normal fingerings. A passage for guitar with right-hand and left-hand fingerings Right-hand fingering Right-hand fingerings tell the performer which finger to use to pluck the string, which is usually the right hand.
Fingering Fingerings for fretted instruments Fingering slides on page 740 String indicators on page 745 Tapping on page 853 Hammer-ons and pull-offs on page 854 Hiding/Showing brackets for right-hand fingerings When multiple notes in the same chord are plucked by the same right-hand finger, you can show the same fingering multiple times, once for each note, or show a single fingering for all notes with a bracket spanning the notes plucked by that finger.
Fingering Fingerings for fretted instruments RELATED LINKS Changing the property scope on page 559 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 544 Changing the position of left-hand fingerings You can change the position of individual left-hand fingerings. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. By default, they are positioned inside the staff and to the left of the notes to which they apply.
Fingering Fingering slides Adding fingerings to arpeggio signs You can add fingerings to arpeggio signs to indicate which right-hand finger should be used to strum a chord. By default, fingerings are placed at the bottom of arpeggio signs. NOTE These steps only apply to arpeggio signs belonging to fretted instruments. PREREQUISITE ● You have input the arpeggio signs to which you want to add fingerings. ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. PROCEDURE 1.
Fingering Fingering slides A passage with fingering slides When the source and destination notes are sufficiently close horizontally, fingering slides are shown between the fingerings, joining them directly in their existing positions without moving them. When the source and destination notes are far apart horizontally, fingering slides appear with a fixed length to the left of the destination note. You can change the length of individual fingering slides.
Fingering Fingerings for valved brass instruments RESULT Fingering slides are shown before the selected notes when Slide in is activated, and hidden when it is deactivated. If the gap between the source and destination notes is small enough, fingering slides appear as an angled line joining the fingerings. If the gap is large, fingering slides appear as a fixed length angled line to the left of the destination notes.
Fingering Hiding/Showing string fingering shift indicators RESULT Branch indicators are added to the selected fingerings. Hiding/Showing string fingering shift indicators You can hide/show shift indicators after individual fingerings belonging to string instruments. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains.
Fingering Fingerings imported from MusicXML files Changing the direction of string fingering shift indicators You can change the direction of individual string fingering shift indicators if they do not point in the direction required. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. PROCEDURE 1. Select the shift indicators whose direction you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Shift direction in the Fingering and Positions group. 3.
String indicators String indicators are commonly used in guitar music to tell performers the string on which they should play a note, particularly for pitches that are possible on multiple strings. String indicators show the string number inside a circle enclosure, optionally with a dashed line to indicate they apply to a range of notes. Open pitches commonly appear as a zero without an enclosure.
String indicators Deleting string indicators NOTE You can only show string indicators inside the staff on notes belonging to fretted instruments.
String indicators Positions of string indicators Changing the property scope on page 559 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 544 Positions of string indicators String indicators outside the staff are placed above it by default. In multiple-voice contexts, string indicators for the up-stem voices are placed above the staff and string indicators for the down-stem voices are placed below the staff.
String indicators Positions of string indicators EXAMPLE String indicators to the left of noteheads String indicators to the right of noteheads 748 Dorico SE 4.3.
Front matter Front matter in Dorico SE is a broad term that covers all information included before the first bar of music in scores. Front matter includes musical information often added on pages before the first pages of scores, such as a title page, instrumentation list, program note, and performance instructions. Front matter also includes information above the music on the first page of scores and parts, such as the dedication, title, subtitle, composer, and lyricist.
Front matter Editing layout transposition text RELATED LINKS Tokens on page 549 Layouts on page 150 Concert vs. transposed pitch on page 154 Making layouts transposing/concert pitch on page 154 750 Dorico SE 4.3.
Grace notes Grace notes are notes without a fixed duration, which are intended to be played quickly. They are scaled-down versions of normal notes, and are commonly shown with a slash through their stem. Grace notes with slashed stems are known as “acciaccaturas” and are often played very fast. Grace notes without slashed stems are known as “appoggiaturas” and are often played slower than acciaccaturas.
Grace notes General placement conventions for grace notes General placement conventions for grace notes Grace notes function like normal notes in many ways, but there are some specific conventions about their stem direction, position relative to noteheads, and the placement of stem slashes. Grace notes are always positioned before a notehead, even if they are intended to be played on the beat rather than before the beat.
Grace notes Turning existing notes into grace notes RELATED LINKS Showing grace notes before/after barlines on page 754 Slur placement relative to grace notes on page 965 Slur position relative to tie chains on page 965 Changing the stem direction of notes on page 804 Layout Options dialog on page 571 Turning existing notes into grace notes You can turn any existing notes into grace notes; for example, if you want to edit music you input using MIDI recording. PROCEDURE 1.
Grace notes Turning grace notes into normal notes Turning grace notes into normal notes You can turn any existing grace notes into normal notes starting from their original rhythmic position; for example, if you want to turn a run of grace notes at the start of a flow into standard notes in a pick-up bar. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the grace notes you want to turn into normal notes. 2.
Grace notes Grace note size NOTE This affects all grace notes at the selected rhythmic positions. RELATED LINKS Barlines on page 620 Inputting grace notes on page 224 Grace note size Grace notes are smaller versions of normal notes, and are scaled down by a ratio that is set by default to 3/5 of a normal note. You can change the size of grace notes individually in the same way as for normal notes.
Grace notes Grace note stems TIP You can also change the type of selected grace notes by pressing Alt/Opt-/ or clicking and holding Grace Notes in the Notes toolbox, then clicking Unslashed Grace Notes or Slashed Grace Notes . Grace note stems Grace notes are scaled-down notes, so the length of grace note stems is determined by the default settings for the stem length of all notes.
Holds and pauses Different notations are used to show where the established rhythmic flow of the music is interrupted, either with a moment of repose or a short silence, before continuing. The most subtle effect is produced by a tenuto mark, with more significant effects denoted with holds and pauses. The duration of the break in the music intended by the hold or pause does not need to be specified.
Holds and pauses Types of fermatas NOTE Holds and pauses do not currently have an effect in playback, but this is planned for future versions. RELATED LINKS Input methods for holds and pauses on page 305 Types of fermatas on page 758 Types of breath marks on page 759 Types of caesuras on page 759 Types of fermatas There are different types of fermatas available in Dorico SE. Each fermata indicates a suggested pause duration whilst leaving room for interpretation.
Holds and pauses Types of breath marks Style Very short fermata Short fermata Fermata Long fermata Very long fermata Standard Henze N/A N/A RELATED LINKS Input methods for holds and pauses on page 305 Changing existing items on page 397 Types of breath marks There are different types of breath marks available in Dorico SE. Breath marks indicate a suitable place for a player to take a breath, or create a musical effect like a breath.
Holds and pauses Positions of holds and pauses You can move holds and pauses to different rhythmic positions in Write mode. They are automatically positioned to avoid collisions. Fermatas Fermatas are positioned horizontally so that they are centered on front noteheads in the first voice column, regardless of the stem direction of notes. Fermatas affect the overall tempo of the piece, so all players must be able to see where they occur.
Holds and pauses Positions of holds and pauses Multiple holds and pauses at the same rhythmic position Because fermatas apply to all staves, only one type of fermata can exist at the same rhythmic position. For example, you cannot have a short fermata on one staff and a long fermata at the same rhythmic position on another staff. A Britten curlew can be used at the same rhythmic position as another kind of fermata, but it cannot exist simultaneously with any breath mark.
Holds and pauses Positions of holds and pauses PROCEDURE 1. Select the fermatas whose maximum number per staff you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Max. fermatas per staff in the Holds and Pauses group. 3. Select one of the following options from the menu: ● One per voice ● One per each side of staff ● One per staff RESULT The number of fermatas shown at the selected positions is changed.
Key signatures Key signatures are the markings that show the current key of music by indicating which notes in the scale for that key are sharpened or flattened. They are shown at the start of each system on every applicable staff. Traditionally, accidentals are organized following the pattern of the circle of fifths, which is different for sharp keys and flat keys.
Key signatures Key signature arrangements Types of key signatures on page 765 Tonality systems on page 768 Instrument picker on page 95 Note input on page 195 Deleting notes/items on page 411 Transposing instruments on page 118 Concert vs.
Key signatures Types of key signatures Types of key signatures There are multiple types of key signatures in Dorico SE, which can all be input, moved, and deleted in the same ways. Major and minor key signatures The key signature for a major key appears the same as the key signature for its relative minor, and vice versa. For example, B♭ major has two flats in its key signature. This is the same number of flats as for G minor, which is the relative minor key to B♭ major.
Key signatures Positions of key signatures Positions of key signatures Key signatures are positioned between clefs and time signatures by default, and are shown on every staff that requires a key signature. They are not shown on staves for unpitched instruments. Key signatures are shown at the start of a piece and at the start of subsequent movements, even if the music carries straight on and in the same key.
Key signatures Enharmonic equivalent key signatures Enharmonic equivalent key signatures Enharmonic equivalent key signatures are keys with different names that include the same pitches, such as C♯ major and D♭ major. Dorico SE follows the convention for transposing to keys with the same type of accidental as the previous key, except where the enharmonic equivalent key signature has fewer accidentals.
Tonality systems The term “tonality system” is used in Dorico SE to encompass three crucial elements that together make up the concept of tonality. The three elements that make up tonality systems are: ● A number of equal divisions of the octave, or EDO. For example, standard Western scales with half-step (semitone) steps have 12-EDO. ● A set of accidentals. This allows you to notate how much a note is raised or lowered. ● A key signature.
Lyrics In Dorico SE, the term “lyrics” is used for all text that is sung by singers. Lyrics for a soprano duet with basso continuo accompaniment Lyrics are organized into lyric lines to ensure consistent horizontal alignment and to make showing verse numbers simple and accurate. There are different types of lyric lines for lyrics with different purposes, and the appearance of lyrics changes depending on their line type.
Lyrics Types of lyrics Chorus lines Chorus lines contain lyrics in an italic font and are placed between lyric lines. For example, if there are two lyric lines, the chorus line appears between Line 1 and Line 2. Chorus lines do not have verse numbers. Lyric line translations Lyric line translations show the text in lyric lines or chorus lines in different languages. They are placed directly below the lyric line or chorus line of which they are a translation. They are shown in an italic font.
Lyrics Types of syllables in lyrics NOTE If other chorus lines exist at the same position on the side of the staff where you want to change your current selection to chorus lines, the two lines collide. To avoid this, change the type of the whole lyric line, which automatically avoids collisions. RELATED LINKS Showing lyrics in italics on page 781 Types of syllables in lyrics There are different types of syllables in lyrics, depending on their position in words.
Lyrics Copying and pasting lyrics NOTE Changing the syllable type changes whether a hyphen is shown after the selected lyrics, not before them. Therefore, if you want to show a hyphen before lyrics, you must change the syllable type of the lyrics immediately preceding them. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. PROCEDURE 1. Select the lyrics whose syllable type you want to change. 2.
Lyrics Copying and pasting lyrics ● If you want to select many existing lyrics in Dorico SE, you can use filters for lyric lines or you can select a single lyric and press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-A multiple times to select the rest of the lyrics in the lyric line. 2. Press Ctrl/Cmd-C to copy the selected lyrics/text. 3. In Write mode, select the first note in the voice to which you want to copy lyrics. 4. Open the lyrics popover in any of the following ways: 5. 6. ● Press Shift-L .
Lyrics Exporting lyrics Exporting lyrics You can export all lyrics from all flows in the project to a plain text file; for example, if you want to create a libretto of all the text sung in a project. PROCEDURE 1. Choose File > Export > Lyrics to open the File Explorer/macOS Finder. 2. Specify a name and location for the text file. 3. Click Save. RESULT All lyrics from all flows in the project are exported to a plain text file, which opens automatically in your default text editor.
Lyrics Positions of lyrics Above Staff Selects all lyrics above the staff in the current selection. You can use this filter in addition to the other filters. For example, you can filter first by line number, and then filter again by staff-relative placement. Below Staff Selects all lyrics below the staff in the current selection. You can use this filter in addition to the other filters. For example, you can filter first by line number, and then filter again by staff-relative placement.
Lyrics Positions of lyrics ● Melismata, which are syllables or words that are sung on more than one note, are leftaligned with the left side of the first note to which they apply. The horizontal spacing of lyrics must be wide enough so that words or syllables do not overlap with the words or syllables on either side. For this reason, note spacing must sometimes be adjusted to accommodate lyrics.
Lyrics Positions of lyrics have the same alignment. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. There is no default setting for the alignment of lyrics relative to notes, as Dorico SE automatically adjusts the horizontal position of lyrics to minimize note spacing changes. By default, lyrics on single noteheads are center-aligned, and lyrics spanning multiple noteheads are left-aligned.
Lyrics Positions of lyrics Changing the staff-relative placement of lyric lines You can show whole lyric lines either above or below the staff after they have been input. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select a lyric in each line whose staff-relative placement you want to change. TIP You can also make a selection and use the lyric filters to select different lyric lines according to their line numbers and staff-relative placement. 2.
Lyrics Lyric text editing ● Below RESULT The staff-relative placement of the selected lyrics is changed. NOTE If other lyric lines with the same lyric line number already exist at the same position on the same side of the staff, the two lines collide. To avoid this, you can change the lyric line number of one of the lyric lines, for example.
Lyrics Lyric text editing Edit Lyrics dialog The Edit Lyrics dialog allows you to view and edit entire lyric lines in one place and with the text displayed with consistent spacing. This is more convenient than changing each word/syllable individually alongside the music, where lyrics can be split up over large horizontal distances. ● You can open the Edit Lyrics dialog by selecting at least one lyric and choosing Edit > Notations > Lyrics > Edit Line of Lyrics.
Lyrics Showing lyrics in italics Edit Lyric dialog The Edit Lyric dialog allows you to edit the formatting of individual lyrics, such as making single characters underlined. ● You can open the Edit Lyric dialog by selecting a lyric and choosing Edit > Notations > Lyrics > Edit Single Lyric. You can also choose this option from the context menu. The Edit Lyric dialog comprises the following: 1 Text editor options Allows you to customize the font, size, and formatting of the selected part of the lyric.
Lyrics Changing the paragraph style used for lyrics PROCEDURE 1. Select the lyrics you want to show in an italic font. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Italic in the Lyrics group. RESULT The selected lyrics are shown in an italic font. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
Lyrics Lyric hyphens and lyric extender lines Lyric hyphens and lyric extender lines Lyric hyphens indicate that individual lyrics are syllables within multi-syllabic words; for example, “Hal-le-lu-jah”. Lyric extender lines indicate that individual lyrics, either whole words or the last syllables in multi-syllabic words, extend across multiple notes.
Lyrics Lyric line numbers Filters for lyrics on page 774 Positions of lyrics on page 775 Showing lyrics in italics on page 781 Changing the line number and type of lyric lines You can change the lyric line number of whole lyric lines after they have been input. You can also change whole lyric lines to chorus lines and lyric line translations. For example, you can change the existing Line 1 into a lyric translation of Line 4, or change Line 2 into a chorus line.
Lyrics Verse numbers Changing the line number of individual lyrics You can change the lyric line number of individually selected lyrics after they have been input. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. PROCEDURE 1. Select the individual lyrics whose line number you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, change the value for Lyric number in the Lyrics group.
Lyrics Elision slurs RESULT Verse numbers are shown before the selected lyrics when the checkbox is activated, and hidden when the checkbox is deactivated. RELATED LINKS Hiding/Showing zones on page 41 Changing the property scope on page 559 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 544 Elision slurs Elision slurs are used to show that two or more syllables or characters are part of the same lyric.
Lyrics Elision slurs EXAMPLE East Asian elision slur shown East Asian elision slur hidden 787 Dorico SE 4.3.
Notes Notes are shapes that are positioned on staves to indicate musical pitches. Notes are most commonly shown with oval-shaped, round noteheads that are either filled or void depending on their duration, but there are many different designs of noteheads that you can use. Depending on their duration, notes can have stems that help indicate their duration.
Notes Notehead sets NOTE ● A single notehead can appear in multiple notehead sets. If you edit a notehead within one notehead set, your changes affect the appearance of that notehead in all notehead sets that contain it. ● Notehead sets can only contain noteheads of the same type. For example, you cannot use a normal notehead in a pitched notehead set. ● You cannot change the type of an existing notehead set or an existing notehead.
Notes Notehead sets Notehead set design Notehead set name Slashed Noteheads (Top Left to Bottom Right) Cross noteheads Notehead set name Notehead set design Circle X Noteheads Large X and Diamond Noteheads Ornate X Noteheads Plus Noteheads With X Noteheads X Noteheads X and Circle X Noteheads X and Diamond Noteheads 790 Dorico SE 4.3.
Notes Notehead sets Triangular noteheads Notehead set design Notehead set name Large Arrow Down Noteheads Large Arrow Up Noteheads Triangle Down Noteheads Triangle Left Noteheads Triangle Right Noteheads Triangle Up Noteheads Diamond noteheads Notehead set design Notehead set name Diamond Noteheads Old-Style Diamond Noteheads White Diamond Noteheads Wide Diamond Noteheads 791 Dorico SE 4.3.
Notes Notehead sets Slash noteheads Notehead set design Notehead set name Muted Slash Noteheads Oversized Slash Noteheads Slash Noteheads Small Slash Noteheads Round and square noteheads Notehead set design Notehead set name Moon Noteheads Rectangular Noteheads Round White with Dot Noteheads RELATED LINKS Changing the notehead design of individual noteheads on page 793 Pitch-dependent notehead set designs Pitch-dependent notehead sets use different notehead designs or different notehead colors de
Notes Notehead sets Scale degree noteheads Notehead set design Notehead set name Aikin 7-shape Noteheads Funk 7-shape Noteheads Walker 4-shape Noteheads Walker 7-shape Noteheads Pitched noteheads Notehead set design Notehead set name Figurenotes© Noteheads Pitch Name Noteheads RELATED LINKS Notehead sets on page 788 Changing the notehead design of individual noteheads on page 793 Changing the notehead design of individual noteheads You can change the notehead design of individual noteheads, includi
Notes Assigning notes to strings PROCEDURE 1. Select the noteheads whose design you want to change. 2. Choose Edit > Notations > Notehead > [Notehead type] > [Notehead design]. For example, to change the notehead design of the selected notes to X noteheads, choose Edit > Notations > Notehead > Crosses > X Noteheads. TIP You can also choose these options from the context menu. RESULT The notehead design of the selected notes is changed.
Notes Hiding/Showing colors for notes out of range NOTE If selecting multiple notes at once, select notes only in staves of the same instrument type. For example, select multiple Cs in Violin 1 and Violin 2 staves. 2. In the Properties panel, activate String in the Notes and Rests group. 3. Select the string you want from the menu. The string number for the instrument is shown, followed by the fundamental pitch and the octave number of that string in parentheses.
Notes Hiding/Showing colors for notes out of range RESULT Colors for notes out of range are hidden/shown. Notes that are considered challenging are shown in a darker red, while notes that are impossible or virtually impossible are shown in a bright red. NOTE Notes out of the fret range of the corresponding string on tablature are always shown as question marks, even if you do not show colors for notes out of range. EXAMPLE Colors for notes out of range shown.
Bracketed noteheads Bracketed noteheads are often used to indicate that notes are optional, editorial, not played in all playthroughs in music with repeats, or pressed down but not fully struck on the piano. In Dorico SE, you can show brackets on any notehead. Notehead brackets extend slightly above and below noteheads so it is clear which notes are included in each bracket.
Bracketed noteheads Showing brackets on noteheads Square brackets on single noteheads on a notation staff Square bracket on a chord on a notation staff Square brackets on single noteheads on tablature Square bracket on a chord on tablature RELATED LINKS Showing brackets around one/all noteheads in tie chains on page 799 Showing notes as dead notes on page 856 Inputting notes on page 196 Ties on page 1022 Guitar bends on page 842 Guitar pre-bends and pre-dives on page 844 Vibrato bar dives and returns o
Bracketed noteheads Showing brackets around one/all noteheads in tie chains RESULT The corresponding type of notehead brackets is shown on the selected notes. If you only selected notes on tablature, brackets are not shown on the corresponding notes on the notation staff, and vice versa. If you selected notes in tie chains, only the first noteheads in the tie chains are bracketed.
Bracketed noteheads Showing brackets around one/all noteheads in tie chains ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes whose notehead bracket positions relative to tie chains you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, activate/deactivate Bracket until end of tie chain in the Bracketed Noteheads group.
Bracketed noteheads Splitting brackets on chords Splitting brackets on chords You can split brackets on any notehead within a chord. By default, Dorico SE automatically shows a single bracket for all notes in a chord unless it contains very large gaps, in which case Dorico SE automatically splits brackets. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. PROCEDURE 1. Select the individual notes in chords immediately above where you want to split brackets.
Stems Stems are vertical lines that extend from noteheads that are a half note or shorter in duration. In combination with notehead design, they allow the duration of each note to be clearly identified. For example, quarter notes (crotchets) and eighth notes (quavers) both have solid black noteheads and stems, but eighth notes also have flags on their stems. 16th notes have two flags, 32nd notes have three flags, and so on.
Stems Stem direction The default stem direction depends on the instrument type. By default, the stems of notes on the middle lines of staves point downwards on instrumental staves and upwards on vocal staves, to avoid lyrics.
Stems Stem direction notes, beam groups, or chords have different stem directions, equally balanced chords follow the default stem direction. The default stem direction depends on the instrument type. By default, the stems of notes on the middle lines of staves point downwards on instrumental staves and upwards on vocal staves, to avoid lyrics.
Stems Stem direction TIP You can also choose these options from the context menu. RESULT The stem direction of the selected notes is changed. The selected notes follow this stem direction, even if you later change their pitch to one that usually requires a different stem direction. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. NOTE ● This does not change the voice to which notes belong.
Stems Stem length TIP You can also choose these options from the context menu. Removing stem direction changes You can remove changes to the directions of stems and revert stems to their default directions. PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes whose stem direction changes you want to remove. 2. Choose Edit > Notations > Stem > Remove Forced Stem. You can also choose this option from the context menu. RESULT All stem direction changes are removed from the selected notes.
Harmonics Harmonics are pitches produced by touching resonating strings at specific positions along their length, allowing the corresponding harmonic partial to sound. Harmonics often have a high pitch with a glassy, purer sound than stopped pitches. There are two different types of harmonics: natural and artificial. Harmonic partials are numbered according to their order in the harmonic series, which also correlates to the node on the string which produces them.
Harmonics Turning notes into harmonics Turning notes into harmonics You can turn existing notes into artificial and natural harmonics. Harmonics can represent the sounding, touched, or stopped pitch. PREREQUISITE ● You have input the notes you want to turn into harmonics. However, the pitch you should input depends on the harmonic type you want to use. ● For natural harmonics, we recommend that you input the desired sounding pitch.
Harmonics Changing the harmonic partial AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can change the partial for harmonics. You can also change the appearance of natural harmonics and the style of artificial harmonics. If you want to turn harmonics back into normal notes, deactivate Type in the Harmonics group.
Harmonics Hiding/Showing or parenthesizing harmonic accidentals Artificial harmonic with default partial Partial changed to the fifth (notation and tablature) (notation and tablature) Hiding/Showing or parenthesizing harmonic accidentals You can hide/show individual harmonic accidentals, or show them in round or square brackets, independently of hiding/showing or parenthesizing accidentals of stopped pitch notes.
Harmonics Appearances/Styles of harmonics Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 544 Appearances/Styles of harmonics Both artificial and natural harmonics can be notated in different ways. In Dorico SE, it is possible to indicate the desired sounding pitch, either the stopped or touched pitch, or both stopped and touched pitches for individual harmonics.
Harmonics Appearances/Styles of harmonics Artificial harmonics Normal Shows two noteheads: one indicating the stopped pitch, the other the touched pitch. The touched pitch is automatically calculated based on the partial; the default partial is the second partial. On tablature, the stopped fret is shown on the left and the touched fret is shown on the right in parentheses. This is the default appearance of artificial harmonics on all staves.
Harmonics Appearances/Styles of harmonics Single notehead (stopped) artificial harmonic on notation staff Single notehead (stopped) artificial harmonic on tablature RELATED LINKS Changing music area colors on page 51 Changing the appearance of natural harmonics By default, natural harmonics appear as normal noteheads with a circle shown above, which indicates the desired sounding pitch.
Harmonics Appearances/Styles of harmonics RELATED LINKS Turning notes into harmonics on page 808 Changing the pitch of individual notes on page 422 Assigning notes to strings on page 794 Tablature on page 996 Changing the style of artificial harmonics By default, artificial harmonics appear as two noteheads: one normal, which indicates the stopped pitch, and one diamond, which indicates the touched pitch.
Ornaments Ornaments are markings that indicate multiple notes are played in addition to the notated pitch. They are used to decorate music, such as in Baroque music, which is highly decorated with trills and other ornaments. Over time, specific ways of notating how performers should play notes have developed and different ornament symbols indicate different patterns of decorative notes. Nonetheless, ornaments give some freedom to performers to embellish music in their own way.
Ornaments Positions of ornaments PROCEDURE 1. Select the ornaments whose interval you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, activate the following properties, individually or together, in the Ornaments group, as appropriate for the selected ornaments: 3. ● Interval above ● Interval below Change the values in the value fields to the intervals you want. ● 0 or 4 and above shows no accidental. ● 1 shows a flat. ● 2 shows a natural. ● 3 shows a sharp.
Ornaments Positions of ornaments RELATED LINKS Trills on page 818 Hiding/Showing trill marks on page 818 Moving notes/items rhythmically on page 416 Changing the start position of trills You can change whether the start position of individual trills is aligned with the notehead or with its accidental. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown.
Trills Trills are fast alternations between two notes, similar to a tremolo, that were a common decoration in Baroque, Classical, and Romantic music. Trill marks are usually added to a single note, to indicate the performed notes are the notated pitch and the note either a half-step or whole step above, and can have extension lines to show the duration of the trill.
Trills Changing the speed of trills PROCEDURE 1. Select the trills whose trill marks you want to hide/show. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Show trill mark in the Trills group. 3. Activate/Deactivate the corresponding checkbox. RESULT Trill marks are shown when the checkbox is activated, and hidden when the checkbox is deactivated. When the property is deactivated, trill marks are shown by default.
Trills Hiding/Showing speed changes in trill extension lines EXAMPLE A trill extension line starting slow and ending fast Trill with normal speed throughout AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can customize the playback speed of trills individually.
Trills Trill intervals RESULT Trill extension lines are shown when the checkbox is activated, and hidden when the checkbox is deactivated. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. When the property is deactivated, trill extension lines are only shown on tied notes by default.
Trills Trill intervals Microtonal trill intervals When using other tonality systems than 12-EDO, such as 24-EDO, you must specify trill intervals as an interval degree, expressed as the number of staff position steps, and total number of octave divisions from the notated pitch. This is because specifying only the interval quality is insufficient in such cases.
Trills Trill intervals Signposts are shown at the position of each hidden trill interval accidental. However, trill interval signposts are hidden by default. RELATED LINKS Changing the appearance of trill intervals on page 826 Changing the property scope on page 559 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 544 Annotations on page 504 Hiding/Showing signposts on page 406 Changing trill intervals The default trill interval is a second, either major or minor depending on the context.
Trills Trill intervals RELATED LINKS Resetting trill intervals on page 825 Ornaments popover on page 310 Changing trill intervals partway through trills You can change the intervals of existing trills at any notehead within their duration; for example, if you want a trill to change seamlessly from a minor second in one bar to a major second in the next. PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. In Write mode, select one of the following: ● The note whose trill interval you want to change.
Trills Trill intervals EXAMPLE Trill with interval changes shown as accidentals Trill with interval changes shown as auxiliary notes RELATED LINKS Changing the appearance of trill intervals on page 826 Ornaments popover on page 310 Signposts on page 406 Hiding/Showing signposts on page 406 Notes toolbox on page 172 Rhythmic grid on page 189 Resetting trill intervals You can reset trill intervals to the default trill interval of a second, either major or minor depending on the context, including resetti
Trills Trill intervals Trill interval appearance There are different accepted ways to present trill intervals on notation staves, including accidental symbols and the Hollywood convention of showing “H.T.” for a half-step (semitone) and “W.T.” for a whole step (tone). In Dorico SE, trill intervals can appear in the following ways on notation staves: Accidental Indicates the trill interval using accidentals positioned above, below, or beside the tr mark.
Trills Trill intervals NOTE You can only change the trill interval appearance of trills with a major/minor second interval. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. PROCEDURE 1. Select the trills whose trill interval appearance you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Appearance in the Trills group. 3.
Trills Trills in playback ● Below ● On the right ● Superscript RESULT The position of interval indicators relative to the selected trill marks is changed. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. EXAMPLE Above Below On the right Superscript Trills in playback Dorico SE plays back trills by using a combination of sampled trills, when available, and triggering multiple notes.
Trills Trills in playback Playback techniques on page 598 Input methods for ornaments, arpeggio signs, glissando lines, and jazz articulations on page 309 Sampled vs. generated trills Sampled trills are recorded, looped samples, whereas generated trills are produced by manually triggering separate notes.
Trills Trills in playback PROCEDURE 1. Select the trills whose starting note you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Start on upper note in the Trills group. 3. Activate/Deactivate the corresponding checkbox. RESULT The selected trills start on the upper note when the checkbox is activated, and on the lower note when the checkbox is deactivated. 830 Dorico SE 4.3.
Arpeggio signs Arpeggio signs are vertical lines that indicate chords are to be played arpeggiated, or “spread”, so that the notes in the chord are played very quickly one after another. Arpeggio signs are normally shown as vertical wavy lines. Arpeggiated chords can be played in two directions: ● Upwards, starting from the bottom note in the chord. ● Downwards, starting from the top note in the chord.
Arpeggio signs Types of arpeggio signs Down arpeggio A vertical wavy line that indicates chords are to be arpeggiated from the top note downwards. Non arpeggio A bracket with straight lines that indicates all notes in the chord are to be played together, not arpeggiated. Curved arpeggio A curved line, similar to a slur but vertical, that some composers use to indicate gentle or partial arpeggiation.
Arpeggio signs Types of arpeggio signs 2. In the Properties panel, select one of the following options from the Arpeggio type menu in the Arpeggios group: ● Non arpeggio ● Up arpeggio ● Down arpeggio ● Up arpeggio (curve) RESULT The type of the selected arpeggio signs is changed. TIP You can also change the arpeggio type by opening the ornaments popover and changing the entry.
Arpeggio signs Length of arpeggio signs EXAMPLE Up arpeggio sign with nothing at the end Up arpeggio sign with an arrow at the end Up arpeggio sign with a swash at the end Length of arpeggio signs The length of arpeggio signs is determined by the pitch range of notes in the voices/staves to which the arpeggio sign applies. Dorico SE automatically adjusts the length of arpeggio signs if pitches change or you add notes to, or delete notes from, chords.
Arpeggio signs Changing arpeggio playback relative to the beat 2. In the Properties panel, activate/deactivate Arpeggio before grace notes in the Arpeggios group. RESULT The selected arpeggio signs are shown before grace notes when the property is activated, and after grace notes when the property is deactivated. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
Arpeggio signs Changing the playback duration of arpeggios The duration of arpeggios is expressed as a fraction of the notated rhythm of chords. For example, an arpeggio on a quarter note (crotchet) chord with a note offset value of 1/2 lasts an eighth note (quaver), whereas with a note offset value of 1/8 it lasts a 32nd note. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. PROCEDURE 1. Select the arpeggio signs whose playback duration you want to change.
Glissando lines Glissando lines indicate a continuous transition between two notes, which can be smooth or in chromatic steps. They can have straight lines or wiggly lines, and can be shown with a text indication or as a line without text. Because glissando lines are positioned between noteheads, the steepness of their angle reflects the interval between the notes: the steeper the angle, the greater the interval. There are different conventions regarding the playing techniques for glissando and portamento.
Glissando lines Glissando lines across empty bars Glissando lines across empty bars In Dorico SE, you can input glissando lines between any two notes, even if there are rests or other notes between them, and including between notes in different voices and notes on different staves.
Glissando lines Changing glissando line text RELATED LINKS Ornaments popover on page 310 Changing existing items on page 397 Changing glissando line text You can show individual glissando lines with “gliss.” text, “port.” text, or without text. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. is selected in the lower zone toolbar.
Glissando lines Glissando lines in playback PROCEDURE 1. Select the glissando lines whose setting for when text is shown you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Glissando text shown in the Glissando Lines group. 3. Choose one of the following options: ● Show if sufficient space ● Always show RESULT When Show if sufficient space is chosen, glissando line text is not shown if the glissando line is too short.
Glissando lines Glissando lines in playback Delaying the start of glissandos in playback You can delay the start of glissandos in playback so that they start partway through their duration. By default, glissandos sound for their full duration in playback. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. PROCEDURE 1. Select the glissando lines whose playback start you want to delay. 2.
Guitar bends The guitar bend is a technique commonly performed on electric guitars, where the performer pushes strings out of their normal alignment after notes start to sound. Bending strings tightens them, which produces the characteristic pitch fluctuation. Performing a guitar bend often also involves sustaining the bent pitch before allowing the string to return to its natural position and un-bent pitch. In Dorico SE, these actions are called a “guitar bend hold” and “release” respectively.
Guitar bends Guitar bends on chord on notation staff Guitar bends on chord on tablature Sequences of consecutive guitar bends are notated as bend runs on tablature. Guitar bend runs on tablature Guitar bend holds Guitar bend holds indicate that the performer should maintain the pitch at the peak of a guitar bend. They are usually shown on tied notes. On tablature, guitar bend holds are notated using a horizontal line. They are not notated on notation staves.
Guitar bends Guitar pre-bends and pre-dives If you input releases on multiple notes in chords, they are notated with a single downwards-pointing curved line on tablature. If the bend intervals are the same for all notes, the end pitches are parenthesized together. Releases on chord on notation staff Releases on chord on tablature NOTE ● In addition to guitar bends, Dorico SE supports guitar pre-bends/pre-dives, guitar postbends, vibrato bar dives and returns, and other guitar techniques.
Guitar bends Guitar post-bends Guitar pre-bends Guitar pre-bends indicate that the performer should bend the string before playing the note to raise the pitch; for example, to repeat a note that was at the end of a previous guitar bend. The pitch can then be lowered after starting to sound. On notation staves, guitar pre-bends are notated using an angled line between the noteheads at the start and end.
Guitar bends Guitar post-bends strings tightens them, which produces the characteristic pitch fluctuation. Microtonal post-bends are particularly idiomatic in Blues music. In Dorico SE, guitar post-bends are properties of notes belonging to fretted instruments, meaning they only apply to single notes. They are notated the same on notation staves and tablature, using an upwards-pointing curved line with an arrowhead at the top and a bend interval above the arrowhead.
Guitar bends Vibrato bar dives and returns Vibrato bar dives and returns The vibrato bar dive and return is a technique performed on electric guitars with a vibrato bar, where the performer uses the vibrato bar to loosen then tighten strings after notes start to sound. This produces the characteristic downwards-then-upwards pitch fluctuation.
Guitar bends Bend intervals RELATED LINKS Inputting vibrato bar dives and returns with the popover on page 327 Inputting vibrato bar dives and returns with the panel on page 328 Vibrato bar techniques on page 852 Bracketed noteheads on page 797 Tablature on page 996 Bend intervals Bend intervals indicate the amount guitar bends, pre-bends, pre-dives, post-dives, and dives and returns change the pitch, expressed in relation to whole steps using text or numbers/fractions.
Guitar bends Hiding/Showing guitar bend hold lines Hiding/Showing guitar bend hold lines Guitar bend hold lines indicate that the bend should be held for the duration of the note, which is usually a tied note. You can hide/show hold lines on guitar bends on tablature. NOTE These steps only apply to guitar bends. You cannot show hold lines on pre-bends or releases. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. PROCEDURE 1.
Guitar bends Hiding/Showing accidentals on guitar pre-bends/pre-dives 2. In the Properties panel, activate Pre-bend direction in the Guitar Pre-bends group. 3. Choose one of the following options: ● Up ● Down RESULT The direction of the selected guitar pre-bends/pre-dives is changed. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. TIP You can change the direction of guitar bends on notation staves by selecting them and pressing F .
Guitar bends Deleting guitar pre-bends, pre-dives, and post-bends Deleting guitar pre-bends, pre-dives, and post-bends You can remove guitar pre-bends, pre-dives, and post-bends from notes after you have input them. However, because guitar pre-bends, pre-dives, and post-bends are properties of notes rather than separate items in Dorico SE, you must select and delete them differently from other items. PROCEDURE 1.
Guitar techniques The term “guitar techniques” covers a range of techniques typically associated with guitar music, such as hammer-ons, pull-offs, and pitch alterations that use the vibrato bar on electric guitars.
Guitar techniques Tapping notation staves and tablature and are placed above the staff. You can change the staff-relative placement of individual vibrato bar dips. Vibrato bar indications/lines Vibrato bar indications are text instructions that indicate that the performer should use the vibrato bar. When they apply to a range of notes, they typically show dashed lines. In Dorico SE, vibrato bar indications/lines are considered playing techniques. They show lines when they have duration.
Guitar techniques Hammer-ons and pull-offs A phrase containing right-hand and left-hand tapping By default, tapping indications only appear on notation staves and are placed above the staff. You can change the staff-relative placement of individual tapping indications. In Dorico SE, tapping indications are considered properties of notes.
Guitar techniques Hammer-ons and pull-offs A phrase containing hammer-ons, a pull-off, and a ligado By default, hammer-ons/pull-offs appear on both notation staves and tablature and are placed above the staff. You can change the staff-relative placement of individual hammer-on/pull-off indications. In Dorico SE, hammer-on/pull-off indications are considered properties of notes.
Guitar techniques Showing notes as dead notes RELATED LINKS Inputting hammer-ons/pull-offs on page 333 Changing the staff-relative placement of guitar techniques on page 857 Fingerings for fretted instruments on page 737 Showing notes as dead notes You can show individual notes belonging to fretted instruments as dead notes. Dead notes are notated with cross noteheads on notation staves and with an X on tablature. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown.
Guitar techniques Changing the staff-relative placement of guitar techniques ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. PROCEDURE 1. Select the vibrato bar dips whose interval you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, change the value for Interval above in the Ornaments group. For example, enter 1 for a half step interval, 2 for a whole step interval, or 3 for a minor third interval. RESULT The interval of the selected vibrato bar dips is changed.
Guitar techniques Deleting guitar techniques RESULT The staff-relative placement of tapping, hammer-on, and pull-off indications on the selected notes is changed. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. TIP You can change the staff-relative placement of vibrato bar dips and lines by selecting them and pressing F .
Jazz articulations Jazz articulations in Dorico SE cover a range of note ornamentations that are idiomatic to jazz music, and brass instruments in particular. Although they are often known as jazz “articulations”, these techniques function more like ornaments than articulations because they change the pitch rather than the duration or attack of notes. For this reason, they are considered ornaments in Dorico SE. They are found in the Ornaments panel, and you can also input them using the ornaments popover.
Jazz articulations Jazz ornaments Fall (bend) Fall (smooth) Additionally, there are other jazz ornaments commonly used by brass instruments that you can add to notes in the same ways as inputting jazz articulations. If your sound library includes samples for jazz articulations, Dorico SE loads the required samples using playback techniques.
Jazz articulations Positions of jazz articulations Positions of jazz articulations In Dorico SE, jazz articulations are automatically positioned relative to the noteheads to which they apply, with any other notations on those notes, such as rhythm dots, accidentals, and back notes, automatically considered.
Jazz articulations Deleting jazz articulations PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes with smooth jazz articulations whose line style you want to change. NOTE You must select notes with smooth jazz articulations on the same side; for example, only select notes with smooth jazz articulations before them. 2.
Page numbers Page numbers are used to give each page a unique number, and indicate its position relative to other pages. Just as in newspapers and books, musical scores and parts use page numbers to make sure the music stays in the correct order. Because you can have multiple flows in a single project in Dorico SE, you do not need to change page numbers manually in most cases.
Page numbers Hiding/Showing page numbers and dragging across multiple layouts, Shift -clicking adjacent layouts, and Ctrl/Cmd -clicking individual layouts. 3. In the category list, click Page Setup. 4. In the Page Numbers section, select one of the following options from the Use menu: 5. ● Number ● Roman numeral Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The page number numeral style is changed in the selected layouts.
Page numbers Hiding/Showing page numbers NOTE Your per-layout setting for whether page numbers are hidden/shown above flow headings affects whether page numbers are shown on pages where they are higher on the page than flow headings. RELATED LINKS Tokens on page 549 Flow headings on page 547 Hiding/Showing information in running headers above flow headings on page 518 865 Dorico SE 4.3.
Harp pedaling Harp pedaling is a broad term that covers the specific requirements for notating music for harps. This primarily involves harp pedal diagrams, which are often necessary due to the way in which modern concert harps change their tuning.
Harp pedaling Changing the appearance of harp pedal diagrams Note Names Indicates the required accidentals for the seven diatonic pitches, arranged in two lines. Right-foot pedals are shown on top and left-foot pedals are shown below. Any pitches that you input that do not fit with the current harp pedal diagram are considered out of range, and appear red when colors are shown for notes that are out of range.
Harp pedaling Hiding/Showing harp pedaling in layouts ● Note Names RESULT The appearance of the selected harp pedal diagrams is changed in the current layout. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. TIP You can change the default appearance of harp pedaling in each layout independently in the Harp Pedaling section of the Players page in Layout Options.
Harp pedaling Hiding/Showing borders on harp pedal diagrams NOTE ● You can hide individual harp pedal diagrams in layouts where harp pedaling is shown, but you cannot show individual harp pedal diagrams in layouts where harp pedaling is hidden. ● You can hide/show harp pedaling signposts by choosing View > Signposts > Harp Pedals. Hiding/Showing harp pedal diagrams individually You can hide/show individual harp pedal diagrams in layouts in which harp pedaling is shown.
Harp pedaling Positions of harp pedal diagrams PREREQUISITE ● Harp pedaling is shown in the current layout. ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. PROCEDURE 1. Select the note name harp pedal diagrams on which you want to hide/show borders. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Border in the Harp Pedals group. 3. Activate/Deactivate the corresponding checkbox.
Harp pedaling Partial harp pedaling Partial harp pedaling Partial harp pedal diagrams only show the notes whose pedal setting must change at that position, rather than showing the required settings for all pedals. This can make those changes immediately clear to the performer, as they have fewer pedals to read.
Harp pedaling Partial harp pedaling 3. Activate/Deactivate the corresponding checkbox. RESULT Partial harp pedaling is allowed for the selected note name harp pedal diagrams when the checkbox is activated, and disallowed when the checkbox is deactivated. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
Pedal lines Pedal lines indicate to performers which piano pedals to use, and can also give performance instructions, such as how far down to depress the pedals and when to lift the pedal to clear the resonance. Most pianos have either two or three pedals. These pedals are: Sustain pedal The sustain pedal controls the dampers on the piano strings, which is why it is also known as the “damper pedal”. It is also the most commonly used pedal.
Pedal lines Sustain pedal retakes and pedal level changes Dorico SE offers comprehensive notational and playback support for piano pedal lines. You can create pedaling for the sustain, sostenuto, and una corda pedals, with support for modern sustain pedaling techniques, including changing the pedal level over the course of a single pedal instruction. You can change the appearance of pedal lines, including changing their start sign and continuation type.
Pedal lines Positions of pedal lines 7 Line end hook RELATED LINKS Changing the pedal line continuation type on page 881 Positions of pedal lines on page 875 Removing retakes and pedal level changes on page 875 Input methods for playing techniques, pedal lines, string indicators, and harp pedal diagrams on page 336 Removing retakes and pedal level changes You can remove pedal retakes and level changes without deleting the sustain pedal line or changing its rhythmic position. PROCEDURE 1.
Pedal lines Positions of pedal lines 3. Una corda pedal: furthest from the staff The beginning of the glyph/text that indicates the start position of pedal lines aligns with the note to which it applies. If you are using a line end hook to indicate the end of pedal lines, the hook aligns with the note or rhythmic position to which it applies. You can move pedal lines to different rhythmic positions in Write mode. They are automatically positioned to avoid collisions.
Pedal lines Splitting pedal lines EXAMPLE Pedal line starting/ending before grace notes Pedal line starting/ending after grace notes Splitting pedal lines You can split sustain pedal lines at any rhythmic position with an existing item along their length into two separate pedal lines. NOTE These steps only apply to sustain pedal lines. PROCEDURE 1. Select an item on the staff and at the rhythmic position where you want to split the sustain pedal line. NOTE You can only split one pedal line at a time.
Pedal lines Pedal line start signs, hooks, and continuation lines RELATED LINKS Moving notes/items rhythmically on page 416 Selecting/Deselecting notes and items individually on page 386 Pedal line start signs, hooks, and continuation lines on page 878 Changing the pedal line continuation type on page 881 Text pedal line signs on page 882 Input methods for playing techniques, pedal lines, string indicators, and harp pedal diagrams on page 336 Merging pedal lines You can merge existing sustain pedal lines t
Pedal lines Pedal line start signs, hooks, and continuation lines You can select whole pedal lines in Write mode and change most aspects of their appearance according to the type of pedal line, such as their continuation line or start sign. RELATED LINKS Input methods for playing techniques, pedal lines, string indicators, and harp pedal diagrams on page 336 Changing the start sign appearance of pedal lines You can change the appearance of the start of pedal lines individually.
Pedal lines Pedal line start signs, hooks, and continuation lines Una corda pedal lines Symbol u. c. una corda AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK If you selected a text sign appearance, you can edit the text shown. RELATED LINKS Editing pedal line start text on page 882 Changing the type of hook at the start/end of pedal lines You can change the type of hook shown at the start/end of pedal lines individually.
Pedal lines Pedal line start signs, hooks, and continuation lines Changing the pedal line continuation type You can change the continuation type used for individual pedal lines. For example, if you want some pedal lines to show a dashed line and a sign at the end, but others to show a line and end hook. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. PROCEDURE 1. Select the pedal lines whose continuation type you want to change. 2.
Pedal lines Text pedal line signs PROCEDURE 1. Select the pedal lines whose continuation sign appearance you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Show continuation sign in parentheses in the Pedal Lines group. 3. Activate/Deactivate the corresponding checkbox. RESULT Continuation signs are shown with parentheses when the checkbox is activated, and without parentheses when the checkbox is deactivated.
Pedal lines Text pedal line signs PROCEDURE 1. Select the pedal lines whose start text you want to edit. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Text in the Pedal Lines group. 3. Enter the text you want into the value field. 4. Press Return . RESULT The text shown at the start of the selected pedal lines is changed. Deactivating Text restores the default start text for the selected pedal lines. NOTE Deactivating properties permanently deletes any custom text entered.
Pedal lines Pedal lines in playback Editing una corda pedal line restorative text The equivalent to the final pedal lift for una corda pedal lines is the indication to return to tre corde. You can change the tre corde text shown at the end of individual una corda pedal lines. NOTE These steps only apply to una corda pedal lines that use text as their start sign. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. PROCEDURE 1.
Playing techniques The term “playing techniques” covers a wide range of instructions intended to tell performers to modify the sound of the notes they are playing; for example, by changing their embouchure or changing the position of their bow, or by modifying their instrument, such as adding a mute or depressing a pedal. In Dorico SE, there are the following types of playing techniques: Glyph playing techniques Playing techniques that display symbols, such as up bow or down bow markings.
Playing techniques Adding text to playing techniques RELATED LINKS Input methods for playing techniques, pedal lines, string indicators, and harp pedal diagrams on page 336 Playback techniques on page 598 Pedal lines on page 873 String indicators on page 745 Playing technique continuation lines on page 888 Groups of playing techniques on page 891 Positions of playing techniques on page 887 Adding text to playing techniques You can add text to playing techniques after they have been input; for example, to c
Playing techniques Hiding/Showing playing techniques Input methods for playing techniques, pedal lines, string indicators, and harp pedal diagrams on page 336 Hiding/Showing playing techniques You can hide/show playing techniques individually; for example, if your expression map requires you to input a playing technique to trigger the correct playback but you do not want that technique to appear in the music.You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains.
Playing techniques Playing technique continuation lines techniques for the up-stem voices are placed above the staff and playing techniques for the down-stem voices are automatically placed below the staff. Glyph playing techniques are center-aligned on noteheads. Text playing techniques are leftaligned with noteheads. Placement of playing techniques with two voices on the same staff You can move playing techniques to different rhythmic positions in Write mode.
Playing techniques Playing technique continuation lines Transition line Indicates that the playing technique at the start must gradually turn into the playing technique at the end over the duration specified by the line. The transition line for most playing techniques is a solid line with an arrow cap at the end. Transition lines are automatically shown between playing techniques in groups. NOTE Playing technique continuation lines do not affect playback.
Playing techniques Playing technique continuation lines String indicator (selected) with no duration String indicator (selected) with duration and duration line RELATED LINKS Input methods for playing techniques, pedal lines, string indicators, and harp pedal diagrams on page 336 Lengthening/Shortening items on page 395 Hiding/Showing playing technique duration lines on page 890 Grouping playing techniques together on page 892 Vibrato bar techniques on page 852 String indicators on page 745 Hiding/Showi
Playing techniques Groups of playing techniques For glyph playing techniques, the playing technique is repeated for each note within the duration automatically when you select Repeat the signs. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. EXAMPLE Duration line shown Duration line hidden Duration line hidden but sim.
Playing techniques Groups of playing techniques ● Groups of playing techniques apply project-wide, meaning you cannot have playing techniques grouped one way in some layouts but differently in other layouts.
Playing techniques Groups of playing techniques ● To ungroup all playing techniques in the selected groups, choose Edit > Notations > Playing Techniques > Ungroup Playing Techniques. ● To remove only the selected playing techniques from their groups, choose Edit > Notations > Playing Techniques > Remove Playing Technique from Group. TIP You can also choose these options from the context menu. RESULT The selected playing techniques or all playing techniques are removed from the selected groups.
Lines Lines can convey a variety of meanings in music, such as indicating which hand to use in piano music or a gradual change in bow pressure. In Dorico SE, lines can be vertical, horizontal, or angled between notes and have different styles and appearances.
Lines or horizontal, as their end positions and resulting angles are determined by the interval between the start and end notes. A phrase containing two notehead-attached lines, showing where the melody moves between piano staves ● Barline-attached Attached to a rhythmic position and aligned with barlines, if their rhythmic positions coincide with barline positions. Barline-attached lines are always horizontal.
Lines Line components RELATED LINKS Input methods for lines on page 351 Lines panel on page 352 Adding text to lines on page 906 Changing the placement of horizontal lines on page 899 Arpeggio signs on page 831 Glissando lines on page 837 Jazz articulations on page 859 Octave lines on page 690 Trills on page 818 Playing technique continuation lines on page 888 Pedal lines on page 873 Repeat endings on page 923 Guitar bends on page 842 Tuplet brackets on page 1056 Line components In Dorico SE, lines consist
Lines Positions of lines NOTE Dorico Pro provides further options for customizing lines and line components, such as using text for caps and music symbols for annotations in the center of lines. You might encounter lines with different components than are available in Dorico SE if you import or open a project that contains them.
Lines Positions of lines Showing vertical lines on the right/left of notes You can change the side of notes on which vertical lines appear; for example, to show selected vertical lines on the right side of notes. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. PROCEDURE 1. Select the vertical lines whose horizontal position you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Side in the Vertical Lines group. 3.
Lines Positions of lines 3. Change the value in the value field. RESULT The order of the selected vertical lines relative to any other vertical lines at the same rhythmic positions is changed. Lines with higher Column values are placed further to the left, while lines with lower values are placed further to the right. Showing vertical lines before grace notes You can position individual vertical lines so they appear to the left of grace notes.
Lines Positions of lines ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. PROCEDURE 1. Select the horizontal lines whose placement you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Placement in the Horizontal Lines group. 3. Select one of the following options from the menu: ● Above ● Below ● Inside staff RESULT The placement of the selected horizontal lines is changed. Horizontal lines inside the staff are centered on the middle staff line by default.
Lines Length of lines RESULT The staff positions of the corresponding ends of the selected lines are changed according to the new values. For example, 0 is the middle line of the staff, 4 is the top line of the staff, and -4 is the bottom line of the staff. EXAMPLE Horizontal lines inside the staff with different staff positions at their start/end Length of lines Dorico SE automatically calculates the appropriate length for both horizontal and vertical lines.
Lines Length of lines ● To shorten them by the current rhythmic grid resolution, press Shift-Alt/OptLeft Arrow . ● To snap the end of a single line to the next notehead, press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-Alt/OptRight Arrow . ● To snap the end of a single line to the previous notehead, press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-Alt/ Opt-Left Arrow . NOTE ● ● When multiple lines are selected, you can only lengthen/shorten them according to the current rhythmic grid resolution.
Lines Length of lines down by staff positions. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
Lines Changing the body style of lines EXAMPLE Horizontal line starting before the notehead Horizontal line starting centered on the notehead Horizontal line starting before the accidental Horizontal line ending after final note Horizontal line ending centered on Horizontal line ending before the final notehead following note Changing the body style of lines You can change the body style of individual lines without changing their caps. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown.
Lines Changing the caps of lines Changing the caps of lines You can change the caps of individual lines without changing their body style. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. PROCEDURE 1. Select the lines whose caps you want to change. NOTE You must select either only horizontal lines or only vertical lines. 2. 3.
Lines Adding text to lines 2. In the Properties panel, activate Reverse in either the Horizontal Lines or Vertical Lines group. RESULT The direction of the selected lines is change. Text on vertical lines now reads downwards. Deactivating Reverse returns the selected lines to their default direction.
Lines Adding text to lines EXAMPLE Text on a horizontal line Text on a vertical line AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK ● If you want text on vertical lines to read downwards, you can reverse the lines. ● You can erase the backgrounds of text on lines.
Lines Adding text to lines EXAMPLE Text Above Text Centered Text Below RELATED LINKS Changing the placement of text relative to lines on page 909 Changing the position of text relative to vertical lines You can change the position of text relative to vertical lines individually; for example, to show text on the left of vertical lines. By default, text is centered on vertical lines. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. PROCEDURE 1.
Lines Adding text to lines Changing the placement of text relative to lines You can change the placement of text relative to lines individually; for example, to show text at the start of horizontal lines or the top of vertical lines. By default, text appears in the center of lines. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. PROCEDURE 1. Select the lines whose text placement you want to change.
Lines Adding text to lines NOTE You must select either only horizontal lines or only vertical lines. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Keep text horizontal in either the Horizontal Lines or Vertical Lines group. RESULT Text on the selected lines always appears horizontal, even if the line is angled or vertical. 910 Dorico SE 4.3.
Rehearsal marks Rehearsal marks are ordered sequences of letters or numbers that provide useful reference points, such as indicating significant changes in the music. They allow performers to co-ordinate easily in rehearsals and make the chronological sequence of the music clear. In Dorico SE, rehearsal marks follow an automatic sequence where each rehearsal mark has a unique index, ensuring there are never duplicate rehearsal marks.
Rehearsal marks Changing the index of rehearsal marks You can move rehearsal marks to different rhythmic positions in Write mode. They are automatically positioned to avoid collisions. The vertical spacing between the top two staves is increased to allow room for the rehearsal mark and the tempo marks. Rehearsal marks are categorized as system objects in Dorico SE, which you can show above the first bracket of selected instrument families.
Rehearsal marks Changing the rehearsal mark sequence type RESULT The selected rehearsal mark changes according to the Index value and its sequence type. Any subsequent rehearsal marks without index changes in the same sequence follow the new index automatically. For example, if you changed a rehearsal mark from A to P, the next rehearsal mark changes from B to Q. TIP You can also change the sequence type of rehearsal marks; for example, if you want rehearsal mark C to appear as rehearsal mark 3.
Rehearsal marks Adding prefixes/suffixes to rehearsal marks Adding prefixes/suffixes to rehearsal marks You can add both prefixes and suffixes to individual rehearsal marks. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. PROCEDURE 1. Select the rehearsal marks to which you want to add a prefix or suffix. 2. In the Properties panel, activate the following properties, individually or together, in the Rehearsal Marks group: ● Prefix ● Suffix 3.
Markers Markers are labels locked to a particular position in time, most commonly in relation to a video. They typically indicate an important moment that requires musical prominence, and composers often use them to help shape the writing process. Markers on a timecode staff showing custom text and timecodes By default, markers in Dorico SE show the default text “Marker” and also include the timecode of their fixed position in time. In Dorico SE, you can use markers in any project.
Markers Changing the vertical position of markers By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog. You can select other layouts by using the selection options in the action bar, clicking and dragging across multiple layouts, Shift -clicking adjacent layouts, and Ctrl/Cmd -clicking individual layouts. 3. In the category list, click Markers and Timecode. 4. Activate/Deactivate Show markers. 5. Click Apply, then Close.
Markers Editing marker text You can also change the vertical position of timecodes so they appear above/below the start of systems rather than on the timecode staff. ● You can change the default distance between the timecode staff and other staves on the Vertical Spacing page in Layout Options. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can change the frequency of timecodes on the timecode staff.
Markers Defining markers as important PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select an item in the flow containing the markers whose timecodes you want to change. 2. In the Notations toolbox, click Panels 3. In the Markers section, double-click the timecode you want to change. 4. Enter the new timecode you want into the value field. 5. Press Return . , then Video to show the Video panel. RESULT The timecode of the marker is changed.
Timecodes Timecodes indicate an exact position in time, usually in the context of a video. They allow precise synchronization between multiple elements, such as music and moving images, and can be used as a reference tool. Timecodes are displayed in the format hh:mm:ss:ff, which is two-digit hours, minutes, seconds, and frames.
Timecodes Changing the initial timecode value RELATED LINKS Inputting markers/timecodes on page 368 Frame rates on page 170 Video Properties dialog on page 166 Changing the timecode frequency on page 921 Changing the content shown in the transport display on page 467 Markers on page 915 Hiding/Showing markers on page 915 Changing the vertical position of markers on page 916 Changing the vertical position of timecodes on page 920 Changing the initial timecode value You can change the timecode at which each
Timecodes Changing the timecode frequency 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to change the vertical position of timecodes. By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog. You can select other layouts by using the selection options in the action bar, clicking and dragging across multiple layouts, Shift -clicking adjacent layouts, and Ctrl/Cmd -clicking individual layouts. 3. In the category list, click Markers and Timecode. 4.
Timecodes Changing the timecode frequency 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to change the timecode frequency. By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog. You can select other layouts by using the selection options in the action bar, clicking and dragging across multiple layouts, Shift -clicking adjacent layouts, and Ctrl/Cmd -clicking individual layouts. 3. In the category list, click Markers and Timecode. 4.
Repeat endings For music with repeated passages, repeat endings show which bars are played at the end of each repetition, with different endings each time if required. They are also known as “volta lines”, or as “first and second endings”, but in this documentation, we refer to them as “repeat endings”. Repeat endings comprise two or more segments, where each segment contains a different possible ending.
Repeat endings Lengthening/Shortening segments in repeat endings 2. In the Properties panel, activate No. times played in the Repeat Endings group. 3. Change the value in the value field. NOTE You cannot have fewer playthroughs than the number of segments. RESULT The total number of playthroughs in the selected repeat endings is changed. Dorico SE adds additional playthroughs to the last closed segment in the repeat ending.
Repeat endings Positions of repeat endings NOTE ● This does not automatically input or move repeat barlines. You must input and delete repeat barlines as appropriate manually. ● You can also lengthen/shorten the final segment in a single repeat ending by selecting the repeat ending and using the following key commands: ● To lengthen the final segment, press Shift-Alt/Opt-Right Arrow . ● To shorten the final segment, press Shift-Alt/Opt-Left Arrow .
Repeat endings Repeat endings in MusicXML files RESULT The end of the line of the final segment in the selected repeat endings is changed. Repeat endings in MusicXML files All aspects of repeat endings can be imported from and exported in MusicXML files. However, while MusicXML can represent this, segments in the middle of sets of endings cannot have an open right-hand end in Dorico SE. 926 Dorico SE 4.3.
Repeat markers Repeat markers show that musical material is to be repeated, but unlike repeat endings, repeat markers often involve jumping to different positions and sections in the music instead of moving through the music consecutively. A mid-system coda section In Dorico SE, repeat markers are divided into the following types: Repeat jumps Specify the position from which players or playback must jump, such as D.C. al Coda or D.S. al Fine.
Repeat markers Changing the index for repeat markers Changing the index for repeat markers You can change the index of individual repeat markers; for example, if a flow requires two different codas with different symbols so players can tell them apart. By default, all repeat markers of the same type have the same appearance, even when there are multiple repeat markers in the flow. NOTE You cannot change the index of Fine or D.C. repeat markers. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown.
Repeat markers Editing repeat marker text Editing repeat marker text You can change the text shown in individual repeat markers; for example, if you are typesetting a score with an unusual repeat marker instruction. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. PROCEDURE 1. Select the repeat markers whose text you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Custom text in the Repeat Markers group. 3.
Repeat markers Positions of repeat markers Input methods for repeats and tremolos on page 371 Positions of repeat markers Repeat markers are placed above the staff by default, and at the same positions as other system objects. Coda sections are separated from the preceding music by a gap in the system. You can move repeat markers to different rhythmic positions in Write mode.
Repeat markers Repeat counts Repeat counts Repeat counts at end repeat barlines tell performers how many times to play through sections of music. This is particularly helpful for sections played through three or more times, as end repeat barlines typically indicate that the preceding music is played through twice. Dorico SE automatically shows repeat counts at system object positions for end repeat barlines set to have three or more playthroughs when repeats are included in playback.
Repeat markers Repeat counts ● Start ● End ● Neither ● Both RESULT The location of the selected repeat counts is changed. Repeat counts shown at the start of repeated sections are left-aligned with the start repeat barlines that correspond to the selected end repeat barlines. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
Bar repeats Bar repeats indicate that the musical material in preceding bars must be repeated exactly, but without notating that material again. Bar repeats can comprise groups of one, two, or four bars. For example, a one-bar repeat indicates that the material in one bar is repeated, meaning every bar in the region repeats the same material. A four-bar repeat indicates that the material in the previous four bars is repeated.
Bar repeats Changing the length of the repeated phrase in bar repeat regions RELATED LINKS Inputting bar repeats on page 384 Repeats popover on page 372 Bar repeat counts on page 935 Bar repeat grouping on page 938 Numbered bar regions on page 940 Slash regions on page 945 Repeat counts on page 931 Moving notes/items rhythmically on page 416 Lengthening/Shortening items on page 395 Hiding/Showing multi-bar rests on page 963 Types of barlines on page 620 Changing the number of playthroughs at repeat barlines
Bar repeats Hiding/Showing region highlights RELATED LINKS Bar repeat grouping on page 938 Inputting bar repeats on page 384 Repeats popover on page 372 Changing existing items on page 397 Hiding/Showing region highlights You can hide/show colored highlights for bar repeat and numbered bar regions at any time; for example, if you want to show the highlights when inputting music but hide them when engraving. PROCEDURE ● Choose View > Highlight Bar Repeat Regions.
Bar repeats Bar repeat counts Changing the start count of bar repeats You can change the number from which individual bar repeats start; for example, if you want to notate the first bar in a repeated phrase at the start of each system, but show a continuous count across multiple bar repeats. NOTE ● The start count applies to the first bar in the bar repeat, which is the notated bar.
Bar repeats Bar repeat counts NOTE Bar repeat counts are only shown on one-bar repeat regions. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. PROCEDURE 1. Select the one-bar repeats whose count frequency you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Count frequency in the Bar Repeat Regions group. 3. Change the value in the value field. RESULT The count frequency is changed for the selected bar repeat regions.
Bar repeats Bar repeat grouping RELATED LINKS Changing the property scope on page 559 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 544 Bar repeat grouping Bar repeat grouping allows you to consolidate longer bar repeat regions, which can be helpful in very regular music as it can simplify the overall phrasing. The symbols shown on the staff are different for the different groupings, and two-bar and four-bar repeats also show a number to indicate how many bars are included in the group.
Bar repeats Bar repeat grouping 2. In the Properties panel, select one of the following options from the Group every menu in the Bar Repeat Regions group: ● One bar ● Two bars ● Four bars NOTE The options available depend on the minimum length of the selected bar repeat regions. For example, if you select bar repeat regions that last three bars, only One bar and Two bars are available in the menu. RESULT The grouping in the selected bar repeat regions is changed.
Numbered bar regions Numbered bar regions allow you to show bar counts in specific regions without additional notations. This can help performers keep track of how many bars have passed when playing repetitive music. Numbered bar region spanning six bars By default, numbered bar regions are hidden in full score/custom score layouts and shown in part layouts. You can hide/show numbered bar regions in each layout independently.
Numbered bar regions Hiding/Showing numbered bar regions Hiding/Showing numbered bar regions You can input numbered bar regions in any layout, but by default they do not appear in full score layouts, as they are normally most useful in part layouts. You can hide/show numbered bar regions in each layout independently. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to hide/show numbered bar regions.
Numbered bar regions Numbered bar region counts Changing the start count of numbered bar regions You can change the number from which individual numbered bar regions start; for example, if you want to show a continuous count across multiple numbered bar regions. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. PROCEDURE 1. Select the numbered bar regions whose start count you want to change. 2.
Numbered bar regions Numbered bar region counts ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. PROCEDURE 1. Select the numbered bar regions whose counts you want to hide/show or parenthesize. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Count appearance in the Bar Repeat Regions group. 3. Select one of the following options from the menu: 4. 5. 6.
Numbered bar regions Numbered bar region counts Changing the staff-relative placement of numbered bar region counts You can show the counts in individual numbered bar regions either above or below the staff. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. NOTE Changing the staff-relative placement of counts affects all counts in the region. You cannot change the placement of a single count independently of other counts in the region.
Rhythm slashes Rhythm slashes are diagonal lines positioned on staves that are used to indicate that performers should play something, but without specifying the exact rhythms and pitches. They are often accompanied by chord symbols to indicate the set of notes the performer should use. There are two different types of rhythm slashes: Slashes with stems Slashes with stems usually indicate the rhythm to be played, but not the pitches. Also known as “rhythmic notation”.
Rhythm slashes Slash regions By default, slash regions are highlighted with a colored background. As you zoom out, the highlights become more opaque, which is especially useful when viewing full score layouts in galley view. These highlights are considered annotations, are not printed by default, and you can hide/show them. When two different slash regions are adjacent, they alternate highlight colors to ensure the separate regions are always identifiable.
Rhythm slashes Slashes in multiple-voice contexts Slashes in multiple-voice contexts Multiple slash regions and slash voices can exist at the same rhythmic positions. In multiple-voice contexts for slash voices and when slash regions overlap, Dorico SE automatically changes their staff position and offset to accommodate all slashes as legibly as possible.
Rhythm slashes Slashes in multiple-voice contexts Changing the staff position of rhythm slashes You can change the staff position of rhythm slashes in both slash voices and slash regions; for example, to accommodate other notes at the same rhythmic positions better. By default, rhythm slashes are positioned on the middle line of the staff. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3.
Rhythm slashes Slashes in multiple-voice contexts EXAMPLE Notes hidden alongside a slash region Notes shown alongside a slash region RELATED LINKS Slash regions on page 945 Slash voices on page 953 Hiding/Showing slash region highlights on page 946 Inputting slash regions on page 383 Hiding/Showing padding rests before/after slash regions You can hide/show padding rests before/after slash regions that start partway through bars individually; for example, if you have other notes at those positions and t
Rhythm slashes Splitting slash regions Splitting slash regions You can split slash regions after they have been input; for example, if you later want to input more precise notation in the middle of an existing slash region. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select a slash in each slash region you want to split, immediately to the right of where you want to split them. 2. Split the slash regions in any of the following ways: ● Press U . ● In the Notes toolbox, click Scissors .
Rhythm slashes Slash region counts Slash region counts Slash region counts are numbers shown at regular intervals, either above or below slash regions, to help performers keep track of how many bars have passed. The intervals are usually based on typical musical phrases, such as every four or eight bars. By default, slash region counts are shown in parentheses every four bars and are placed below the staff. Each slash region has its own separate count.
Rhythm slashes Slash region counts EXAMPLE Two separate slash regions, where the start count in the second region has been changed so it appears to continue on from the first region. Changing the slash region count frequency You can change how frequently counts are shown on individual slash regions; for example, if you want to show the count after eight bars on a single slash region. By default, slash region counts are shown every four bars. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown.
Rhythm slashes Slash voices ● Do not show RESULT Counts in the selected slash regions are shown with parentheses, without parentheses, or hidden. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
Rhythm slashes Slash voices NOTE ● Because you can change notes in slash voices to normal voices and vice versa, the pitches you input are retained. ● Notes in slash voices are not played back. You can have multiple slash voices active at the same time. To accommodate all slash voices in multiple-voice contexts, Dorico SE changes their staff position automatically. However, you can also change the staff position of rhythm slashes manually.
Rhythm slashes Slash voices RELATED LINKS Inputting notes into slash voices on page 208 Changing the voice of existing notes on page 420 Adding slash voices to percussion kits You can add slash voices to percussion kits; for example, to show the desired rhythm for a passage without specifying the instruments to be played. You can add multiple slash voices to the same kit, including slash voices with and without stems.
Rests Rests are markings with a rhythmic value that indicate no note is played for that duration. Each note duration has an equivalent rest; for example, a quarter note rest is different to a sixteenth note rest. All notes and rests within a bar must add up to the duration of the bar, according to the prevailing time signature. Dorico SE automatically fills the gaps between notes with implicit rests of the appropriate duration. Therefore, it is usually not necessary to input rests in Dorico SE.
Rests Implicit vs. explicit rests However, on staves with multiple voices, rests are placed higher on the staff, or above the staff, for up-stem voices and lower on the staff, or below the staff, for down-stem voices. Example rest positions in a multiple-voice context Rests in multiple voices must not overlap. You can consolidate rests so that only one is shown when multiple voices have a rest of the same duration at the same rhythmic position.
Rests Implicit vs. explicit rests Inputting notes on page 196 Deleting rests on page 960 Forcing the duration of notes/rests on page 237 Turning explicit rests into implicit rests on page 959 Hiding/Showing rest colors on page 959 Implicit rests in multiple-voice contexts In Dorico SE, implicit rests are shown automatically to fill in rhythmic positions around notes, including when there are multiple voices on the staff.
Rests Hiding/Showing rest colors RELATED LINKS Moving rests vertically on page 960 Deleting rests on page 960 Slash voices on page 953 Turning explicit rests into implicit rests Implicit rests and explicit rests behave differently. For example, you can hide implicit rests using the Properties panel, but you cannot hide explicit rests or rests with forced durations. NOTE You can only hide implicit rests using Starts voice and Ends voice in the Notes and Rests group of the Properties panel. PROCEDURE 1.
Rests Moving rests vertically AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can delete rests that you have identified as explicit rests. The implicit rests that replace them now respect the Starts voice and Ends voice properties. Moving rests vertically You can change the vertical position of rests individually; for example, if you want to change the staff line from which a whole bar rest hangs, or you want to show rests for all voices at a particular rhythmic position.
Rests Deleting rests ● If you want to delete rests because you do not want to show bar rests in empty bars, you can instead hide bar rests. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the rests you want to delete. TIP You can select rests individually, or make a larger selection that contains the rests you want to delete. 2. Choose Edit > Remove Rests. RESULT All rests in the selection are deleted.
Rests Hiding/Showing bar rests in empty bars Hiding/Showing bar rests in empty bars You can hide/show bar rests in empty bars in each layout independently. For example, you can hide bar rests in full score layouts but show bar rests in part layouts. Bar rests are usually shown in empty bars in music to indicate to performers that they have nothing to play. However, there are contexts in which it is preferable to hide bar rests in empty bars, and instead leave the bar completely empty.
Rests Multi-bar rests NOTE Multi-bar rests are automatically split by items positioned within their range, such as systemattached text, rehearsal marks, and holds and pauses. However, if items are positioned at the start of the first bar in a multi-bar rest, that bar remains part of the subsequent multi-bar rest. You can hide/show multi-bar rests in each layout independently in Dorico SE, and you can hide/ show bar number ranges below them.
Slurs Slurs are tapered, curved lines that join notes to indicate legato articulation and phrasing. Depending on the context and the instrument to which they apply, slurs can have additional meanings to simply marking phrases. For example, for wind players, a slur indicates that all the notes in the phrase are played in the same breath and without re-tonguing or re-articulating any notes. For string players, a slur indicates that all the notes in the phrase are played legato and under one bow.
Slurs General placement conventions for slurs Slur curvature direction on page 970 Slur position relative to tie chains There are different conventions for the position of slurs relative to tie chains in music for modern use and historical editions. Modern practice is for slurs to start on the first note in tie chains, and end on the last note in tie chains. This makes the full length of the phrase visually clear to the performer, which helps their performance, and is the default in Dorico SE.
Slurs General placement conventions for slurs ● Slurs connect noteheads rather than stems. ● Slurs are scaled to match the proportions of grace notes. ● Slurs must not obscure ledger lines. ● Slurs are placed above notes if they would collide with the accidental of a standard note when placed below the notes. Due to the general placement conventions of grace notes, slurs in Dorico SE appear below grace notes and curve downwards by default.
Slurs General placement conventions for slurs Slurs between the stems of unbeamed notes Slur endpoints relative to notes with different stem directions For slurs between notes with different stem directions, Dorico SE positions their endpoints close to the notehead by default so that the shape and curvature direction of slurs reflects the rising or descending pitch contour of phrases, including when they span multiple staves.
Slurs Slur styles The end of a system showing the first slur part; the end on the right indicates a continuation to the next system. The start of the next system showing the second slur part; the end on the left indicates a continuation from the previous system. Slur collision avoidance By default, Dorico SE automatically adjusts the shape and position of slurs to avoid collisions with items under their arc.
Slurs Slur styles Half-dashed start The first halves of slurs appear as dashed lines, the second halves as solid lines. Used to denote that a slur was written incompletely in the source in critical editions. Half-dashed end The first halves of slurs appear as solid lines, the second halves as dashed lines. Used to denote that a slur was written incompletely in the source in critical editions.
Slurs Slur curvature direction Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 544 Changing individual slurs to flat slurs Although they are not often used as standard, some publishers use flat slurs in order to reduce the vertical space occupied by slurs. You can change individual slurs to flat slurs. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains.
Slurs Slur curvature direction The following options for slur curvature direction are available when you activate Direction in the Slurs group of the Properties panel: Up Forces slurs to curve upwards, and appear above notes. Down Forces slurs to curve downwards, and appear below notes. Up/Down Forces slurs to comprise two segments: the first curves upwards, the second curves downwards to create a mirrored S-shape.
Slurs Cross-staff and cross-voice slurs RESULT The curvature direction of the selected slurs is changed. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. RELATED LINKS Changing the property scope on page 559 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 544 Cross-staff and cross-voice slurs Cross-staff slurs start on one staff and end on another staff, and cross-voice slurs start in one voice and end in another voice.
Slurs Nested slurs A phrase with nested slurs You can input nested slurs in the same ways as inputting standard slurs. By default, Dorico SE makes automatic adjustments to their positioning to avoid collisions. RELATED LINKS Slur collision avoidance on page 968 Inputting nested slurs You can input nested slurs, both during note input and by adding them to existing notes.
Slurs Nested slurs ● To start the inner slur on the same note as the outer slur during note input, press S or click Slur in the Notes panel. ● To start the inner slur on a later note during note input, input notes or advance the caret in the manually to where you want the inner slur to start, then press S or click Slur Notes panel. NOTE If you added nested slurs to existing notes, stop here. 5. During note input, input the notes you want to include in the inner slur.
Slurs Linked slurs Linked slurs Slurs of the same duration at the same rhythmic position on multiple staves can be linked together. This happens automatically when you copy and paste slurs or material including slurs between staves, or enter them simultaneously. If slurs are linked, moving one slur in the linked group moves any slurs linked to it in the same way. Similarly, lengthening or shortening a slur in a linked group lengthens or shortens any slurs linked to it in the same way.
Slurs Slurs in playback Unlinking slurs You can unlink slurs, including slurs that were linked automatically. For example, if you want to lengthen/shorten slurs independently of each other. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select a slur in each linked group that you want to unlink. 2. Choose Edit > Notations > Slurs > Unlink. You can also choose this option from the context menu. RESULT All slurs in the linked groups are unlinked. This applies to all layouts in which the slurs appear.
Staff labels Staff labels are used to identify the instruments playing the music on the corresponding staves, and are positioned to the left of systems, before the initial barline of each system. Staff labels are typically used in music containing multiple players. It is usual to show instrument names in full in the staff labels for the first systems in each flow, and abbreviated instrument names in the staff labels of subsequent systems.
Staff labels Hiding/Showing staff labels ● Staff labels do not show all instruments held by players; for example, in the staff label for the first system. You should include a comprehensive instrumentation list that shows any doubling at the front of your score.
Staff labels Hiding/Showing staff labels RESULT Staff labels are hidden/shown on the corresponding staves in the selected layouts. ● None hides staff labels. ● Full and Abbreviated show staff labels using the corresponding instrument name length. TIP These settings apply to each flow in the layout, not the project as a whole. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK ● You can change the full and short names for each instrument.
Staff labels Staff label contents Staff label contents Staff labels can show the instrument names set for each instrument or the player name of the corresponding player. Staff labels can show full or short names. Instrument numbers are automatically shown in both full and abbreviated staff labels that use instrument names. ● Full staff labels use full instrument/player names. ● Abbreviated staff labels use short instrument/player names. ● None shows no staff labels.
Staff labels Instrument transpositions in staff labels AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can change the full and short names for each instrument and player. RELATED LINKS Percussion kit presentation types on page 1073 Renaming groups in grid presentation percussion kits on page 140 Instrument transpositions in staff labels Instrument transpositions indicate the interval between the note an instrument plays and the sounding note produced.
Staff labels Instrument transpositions in staff labels RESULT Instrument transpositions are shown in staff labels of the corresponding length in the selected layouts when the corresponding checkbox is activated, and hidden when the corresponding checkbox is deactivated.
Staff labels Hiding/Showing instrument change labels at the start of flows EXAMPLE Instrument transposition shown at start, with hyphen separator Instrument transposition shown at end, on separate line Instrument transposition shown at end, in parentheses Instrument transposition shown at end, after instrument number RELATED LINKS Instrument numbering on page 114 Hiding/Showing instrument change labels at the start of flows You can hide/show instrument change labels at the start of each flow in each
Staff labels Player group labels Player group labels Player group labels show the names of player groups as vertical text on vertical brackets to the left of staff labels. They allow you to identify groups of staves and are typically used in large-scale works, such as for orchestra and double choir. Player group labels to the left of staff labels, showing sections in an orchestra Player group labels show full player group names by default.
Staff labels Staff labels for percussion kits 4. In the Staff Labels section, activate/deactivate Show player group names. 5. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT Player group labels are shown in the selected layouts when Show player group names is activated, and hidden when it is deactivated. Staff labels for percussion kits The staff labels shown for percussion kit staves depend on how kits are presented in your project. Kits can be presented as five-line staves, grids, and as single-line instruments.
Staff labels Staff labels on condensed staves You can change the player names, layout names, and instrument names of percussion kits in the same ways as for other players and instruments.
Staff labels Staff labels on condensed staves Dorico SE also shows player labels above/below condensed staves to identify the players to which notes on condensed staves belong, as condensing can change within a single system. For condensed divisi staves, Dorico SE shows the player labels “div.”, with any required qualifications, and your set unison indication where each division starts and ends respectively.
Staves A staff is a line or group of lines on which musical notes are notated to indicate the pitch and rhythm of music. Pitched instruments use the traditional five-line staff and unpitched instruments often use a single-line staff. Notes are positioned on the lines and in the spaces on five-line staves, and can also use ledger lines above/below the staff to represent pitches that cannot fit on the staff.
Staves Per-layout options for staves Per-layout options for staves You can change settings that affect the staves in each layout independently. You can change the size of staves in each layout in the Space Size section of the Page Setup page in Layout Options. You can change other aspects of staves on the Staves and Systems page in Layout Options. For example, you can change which staff labels are shown on systems, indent the first system of each flow, and fix the number of bars included in each system.
Staves Ossia staves RELATED LINKS Ossia staves on page 990 Divisi on page 995 Voice-specific dynamics on page 702 Hiding/Showing empty staves on page 512 Signposts on page 406 Ossia staves Ossia staves are smaller staves shown above/below the main staff of an instrument. They are used to show alternative phrases that can be played instead of the original phrase, such as suggestions for ornaments, alternative notations from other sources, or an easier version. In Dorico SE, you cannot add ossia staves.
Staves System dividers A system divider between two systems in a string quartet score You can show system dividers in different circumstances and change their appearance in each layout independently. Hiding/Showing system dividers You can change the circumstances in which system dividers are shown, including specifying the minimum number of players required to show them, in each layout independently.
Staves System objects RELATED LINKS Hiding/Showing empty staves on page 512 Changing the length of system dividers You can change the length of system dividers in each layout independently; for example, if you want to show longer system dividers in layouts that show full staff labels. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to show system dividers.
Staves System objects ● If the size of system object font styles is set to Staff-relative, the staff size of the top staff in each instrument family group affects the size of system objects if they are shown above that bracketed group. Font styles that are set to Absolute are unaffected by staff size.
Staves System indents System indents System indents control the distance between the left page margin and the start of systems of music. According to tradition, the first system in part layouts is indented, but in modern use this is not always necessary. According to convention, coda sections at the start of new systems are also indented. Dorico SE uses the same gap size before the start of codas whether they occur partway through systems or at the start of a new system.
Divisi Divisi is when players split, or “divide”, in order to play multiple lines of music, commonly for a limited passage, before returning to play together, or “tutti”. Divisi passages can be notated with all lines on a single staff or across multiple staves. Divisi is a technique most commonly used in orchestral string writing, as the string section typically contains a large number of players compared to the number of staves.
Tablature Tablature is an alternative notation to the five-line staff, and is used for fretted instruments. On tablature, pitches are indicated by fret numbers positioned on lines, each of which represents a string on the instrument. As tablature is commonly used for guitars, it usually shows six lines.
Tablature Rhythms on tablature Trills on page 818 Rhythms on tablature When notation staves and tablature are both shown, it is customary only to notate rhythms on the notation staff. However, when only tablature is shown, it is necessary to show rhythms on tablature.
Tablature Changing the allocated string for notes on tablature ● To show only tablature and hide notation staves, choose Tablature only. 5. Optional: If you chose Notation and tablature or Tablature only, activate/deactivate Show rhythms in tablature. 6. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT Notation staves and tablature are hidden/shown for the corresponding players in the selected layouts.
Tablature Changing the allocated string for notes on tablature PROCEDURE 1. On tablature, select the fret numbers of notes whose allocated string you want to change. NOTE You must select fret numbers on tablature, you cannot select the notes on notation staves. 2. Change their allocated string in any of the following ways: ● To move them up a string, press N . ● To move them down a string, press M . ● In the Properties panel, select a string from the String menu in the Notes and Rests group.
Tempo marks Tempo marks indicate how fast music is played, often with a combination of text instructions and metronome marks. They are also known as “tempo changes”, “tempo indications”, and “tempo markings”. A tempo mark can show text instructions, a metronome mark, or a combination of the two.
Tempo marks Types of tempo marks System objects on page 992 Changing the positions of system objects on page 993 Changing the tempo mode on page 455 Layout Options dialog on page 571 Types of tempo marks Dorico SE groups tempo marks into different types according to their function and effect on the music. In Dorico SE, there are the following types of tempo marks: Absolute Tempo Change Indicates a defined change in tempo, and is often shown with a metronome mark. For example, “Adagio =76”.
Tempo marks Tempo mark components Tempo mark components Tempo mark components include text, metronome marks, parentheses, and approximate indications. Tempo marks can include different components in different combinations, depending on your preference or the requirements for different projects. You can activate properties that correspond to the different components in the Tempo group of the Properties panel.
Tempo marks Tempo mark components Changing the type and appearance of absolute tempo changes You can change which components are included in individual absolute tempo changes, and how they appear. For example, if you want to show only parenthesized metronome marks in some tempo marks and only text in other tempo marks. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. PROCEDURE 1. Select the absolute tempo marks whose components you want to change. 2.
Tempo marks Positions of tempo marks RESULT Poco a poco text is shown immediately after the text in the selected gradual tempo changes. Deactivating Poco a poco (little by little) removes poco a poco text from the selected gradual tempo changes. EXAMPLE Rallentando with poco a poco text Positions of tempo marks Tempo marks are placed above the staff and at the same positions as other system objects, because they usually apply to all staves.
Tempo marks Changing tempo text PROCEDURE 1. Select the tempo marks whose tempo text you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, enter the tempo text you want into the Text field in the Tempo group. 3. Press Return . RESULT The tempo text for the selected tempo marks is changed. TIP You can also change the tempo text by opening the tempo popover and changing the entry.
Tempo marks Hiding/Showing tempo marks Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 544 Hiding/Showing tempo marks You can hide/show the different components in individual tempo marks without changing the speed of playback. This affects their appearance in all layouts. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. PROCEDURE 1. Select the tempo marks you want to hide, or the signposts of tempo marks you want to show. 2.
Tempo marks Metronome marks In Dorico SE, metronome marks can appear as an individual value or as a range. Depending on the type and appearance of metronome marks, the bpm value can indicate a fixed tempo or an approximate tempo.
Tempo marks Metronome marks Showing the metronome mark value as a range You can show the metronome mark value of individual absolute tempo marks as a range. For example, you can use this to indicate that any speed within the given range is musically appropriate for the piece. NOTE These steps do not apply to gradual tempo changes or reset/relative tempo marks. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. PROCEDURE 1.
Tempo marks Metronome marks RELATED LINKS Hiding/Showing zones on page 41 Properties panel on page 557 Changing the final tempo at the end of gradual tempo changes You can change how significantly gradual tempo changes affect the tempo in playback, expressed as a percentage of the tempo at the start of the gradual tempo change. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. PROCEDURE 1. Select the gradual tempo changes whose final tempo you want to change.
Tempo marks Gradual tempo changes EXAMPLE Metronome mark before tempo text Metronome mark after tempo text RELATED LINKS Hiding/Showing zones on page 41 Properties panel on page 557 Types of tempo marks on page 1001 Metronome marks on page 1006 Tempo mark components on page 1002 Positions of tempo marks on page 1004 Hiding/Showing tempo marks on page 1006 Gradual tempo changes Gradual tempo changes indicate a change in tempo over a defined period of time, such as rallentando, which indicates slowing do
Tempo marks Gradual tempo changes Changing the style of gradual tempo changes You can change the style of individual gradual tempo changes. Gradual tempo changes can appear as text only with no continuation line, text with a continuation line, or with the word spread across their duration. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. PROCEDURE 1. Select the gradual tempo changes whose style you want to change. 2.
Tempo marks Tempo equations PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. PROCEDURE 1. Select the gradual tempo changes whose line style you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Line style in the Tempo group. 3. Select one of the following options from the menu: ● Solid ● Dotted ● Dashed RESULT The line style of the selected gradual tempo changes is changed.
Text items Text items exist at rhythmic positions within flows and allow you to display generic text in the music. You can customize the formatting of text in text items using the available text editor options, such as by applying different paragraph styles to each line of text and different character styles to each character.
Text items Types of text Types of text Generic text in Dorico SE can exist as text items, either staff-attached or system-attached, or in text frames, which are fixed to the page rather than the music. There are dedicated features for other types of text that often appear in musical scores, such as tempo marks and dynamics. In Dorico SE, there are the following types of text: Text items Text items exist at rhythmic positions within flows. They can display any text you enter, apart from tokens.
Text items Types of text Tempo marks Tempo marks indicate how fast music is played, often with a combination of text instructions and metronome marks. For example, A tempo, Larghetto, ritardando, and accelerando are all tempo marks. Tempo mark containing text instruction in French and metronome mark Rehearsal marks Rehearsal marks are ordered sequences of letters or numbers that provide useful reference points. They are often shown in a rectangular enclosure.
Text items Types of text Lyrics In Dorico SE, the term “lyrics” is used for all text that is sung by singers. Lyrics are organized into lyric lines, with different types of lyric lines available for lyrics with different purposes. For example, lyrics in a chorus line are shown in an italic font by default. Lyrics for a soprano duet with basso continuo accompaniment Fingering Fingerings use numbers and letters to recommend which fingers players should use for notes.
Text items Types of text Chord symbols shown above slashes on the Clarinet and Piano staves to help the players improvise around the notated Cornet melody. Repeat markers Repeat markers show that musical material is to be repeated. They often involve jumping to different positions and sections in the music instead of moving through the music consecutively. For example, D.C. al Coda, D.S., and Fine are all repeat markers.
Text items Changing the paragraph style of text Page numbers on page 863 Tacets on page 538 Tempo marks on page 1000 Rehearsal marks on page 911 Playing techniques on page 885 Dynamics on page 694 Lyrics on page 769 Fingering on page 731 Figured bass on page 719 Chord symbols on page 661 Repeat markers on page 927 Comments on page 430 Changing the paragraph style of text You can change the paragraph style that is applied to individual text items; for example, if you want to use different paragraph styles a
Text items Adding borders to text items RESULT The selected text items are aligned with the start of systems when the checkbox is activated, and aligned with the first note/rest in systems when the checkbox is deactivated. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. When the property is deactivated, text items follow the system alignment setting of their paragraph style.
Text items Adding borders to text items EXAMPLE Text with no border Text with border shown Changing the style of text item borders You can change the style of borders shown on individual text items; for example, if you want to show rectangle borders on some text items but capsule borders on others. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown.
Text items Hiding/Showing text items Hiding/Showing text items You can hide/show individual text items. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. For example, you can show specific text items in part layouts but hide them in full score layouts. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. is selected in the lower zone toolbar. PROCEDURE 1.
Ties A tie is a curved line that joins two notes of the same pitch. When notes are longer than the maximum duration of a bar in the prevailing time signature, they automatically appear in Dorico SE as tie chains; that is, a sequence of adjacent notes joined with ties. Each sequence of ties, whether they join two notes or ten notes together, represents a single note with the duration of all the tied notes combined.
Ties Ties vs. slurs middle of tie chains by activating the caret and moving it to the required rhythmic position within the tie chain. ● When you tie existing notes together, they might be consolidated into fewer or more notes within a tie chain, depending on the musical context, the time signature, and the position of the start of the note in the bar. ● Articulations can only appear once on each tie chain, either at the start or the end, depending on the type of articulation.
Ties Tie styles Slurs can also be used in conjunction with articulation. Unlike ties, articulation within slurs can affect the sound throughout the phrase. For example, staccato articulations on repeated notes of the same pitch within a slur indicate that notes should be played on a stringed instrument using the same bow direction, but stopping the bow between each note.
Ties Tie styles Changing the style of ties You can change the style of individual ties. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. By default, all ties are solid. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. is selected in the lower zone toolbar. PROCEDURE 1. Select the ties whose style you want to change.
Ties Tie curvature direction PROCEDURE 1. Select the dashed/dotted ties whose dash/dot size you want to change. NOTE You can only select whole tie chains, and any changes to tie chains only affect the first tie in the chain. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Dash/dot in the Ties group. 3. Change the value in the value field. RESULT Increasing the value makes dashes/dots bigger, decreasing the value makes dashes/dots smaller.
Ties Non-standard ties TIP You can change the curvature direction of ties individually. Changing the curvature direction of ties You can change the curvature direction of ties individually. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. is selected in the lower zone toolbar. PROCEDURE 1.
Ties Non-standard ties The horizontal space for the parts of ties shown to the left of notes at the start of new systems/ frames may not be sufficient to show an ideal tie curve. The start of a tie chain before a system break The end of the same tie chain after a system break Tied notes with accidentals across system/frame breaks The ends of ties for tied notes with accidentals across system/frame breaks are also automatically positioned.
Ties Hiding/Showing laissez vibrer ties Tied notes building up a chord Notes tied to the following chord Multiple grace notes tied to the following chord Ties between different voices You can input ties between notes of the same pitch in different voices belonging to the same instrument. Ties between notes on different staves You can input ties between notes of the same pitch in different staves belonging to the same instrument, such as the two staves of a piano.
Ties Deleting ties TIP You can assign a key command for Toggle Laissez Vibrer Tie on the Key Commands page in Preferences. EXAMPLE Phrase without laissez vibrer ties Phrase with laissez vibrer ties Deleting ties You can delete ties without deleting the notes to which they are attached. NOTE Deleting ties from tie chains removes all ties in the tie chain. If you want to remove single ties from longer tie chains, you can split the tie chain. PROCEDURE 1.
Ties Splitting tie chains Splitting tie chains You can split tie chains at specified positions; for example, if you want to change the pitch halfway through a tie chain or delete individual ties within tie chains. This does not remove any other ties in the tie chain. NOTE If you want to split ties because Dorico SE notated notes differently than you expected, you can set custom beat groupings for individual time signatures. PROCEDURE 1.
Time signatures Time signatures indicate the meter of music, and apply to all bars from where they first appear until a subsequent change of time signature. Meter describes the rhythmic pulse of music, and its division into beats and bars. A time signature is made up of two parts: numerator on top, and denominator underneath. These are the same mathematical terms as are used for fractions due to their similar arrangement. 1 Numerator Specifies the number of beats in each bar for the time signature.
Time signatures Types of time signatures ● Dorico SE does not automatically add beats to fill bars when you input time signatures unless Insert mode is activated. A 5/8 time signature input before an existing 4/4 time signature without Insert mode activated, leaving only three eighth note beats in the second 5/8 bar.
Time signatures Types of time signatures unequal beat groups. For example, 5/4 usually contains a half note beat and a dotted half note beat. Additive Additive time signatures show how bars are subdivided into beat groups. You can show beat group numerators for any type of time signature. For example, instead of 7/8, you could show an additive time signature of 2+3+2/8.
Time signatures Cautionary time signatures NOTE In open meters, you must input barlines and add beats manually. You can also extend open meter bars by inputting notes with Insert mode activated and set to a global scope. Non-power of two A non-power of two time signature is one such as 5/6, which indicates five sextuplet quarter notes (crotchets) where the sextuplet overall equals a whole note (semibreve). Examples of time signatures like this can be found in the music of Adès.
Time signatures Pick-up bars Pick-up bars Pick-up bars allow you to include music before the first full bar. They are also known as an “upbeat” or “anacrusis”. Often, pick-up bars only comprise a few beats whose main purpose is to lead in to the start of the piece. Pick-up bar of four eighth notes at the start of a piece in 9/8 Pieces that start with a pick-up bar have time signatures that are positioned at the start of the system as normal.
Time signatures Large time signatures PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. PROCEDURE 1. Select the time signatures or the signposts of time signatures starting with an explicit irregular bar whose pick-up definition you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Group first bar as pick-up in the Time Signatures group. 3. Activate/Deactivate the corresponding checkbox.
Time signatures Large time signatures Narrow, serif time signatures shown once per bracketed group Large time signatures shown on bracketed groups occupy horizontal space, which can be a significant amount when they are especially large and use the standard time signature design. Therefore, we recommend that you use one of the narrow designs in layouts that show large time signatures on bracketed groups.
Time signatures Time signature styles Changing the size and position of time signatures You can change the size of time signatures in each layout independently, including changing their vertical position. For example, you can show large time signatures centered on each bracket in full score layouts but standard-sized time signatures on each staff in part layouts. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2.
Time signatures Time signature styles Denominator styles The denominator can appear as a number, as a note indicating the equivalent duration, or not appear at all. Number denominator Note denominator None denominator Open meter styles Open time signatures can be shown as an X, Penderecki’s symbol, or be hidden with no symbol. Open time signatures with no symbol are indicated by signposts.
Time signatures Time signature styles ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. PROCEDURE 1. Select the time signatures whose numerator style you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Numerator style in the Time Signatures group. 3. Choose one of the following options: ● Number ● Beat group RESULT The numerator style of the selected time signatures is changed.
Time signatures Time signature styles ● X ● Penderecki’s symbol RESULT The open meter style of the selected time signatures is changed. No symbol open time signatures are indicated by signposts. RELATED LINKS Time signature styles on page 1039 Input methods for time signatures and pick-up bars on page 257 Signposts on page 406 Changing the separator style of interchangeable time signatures You can change the separator shown in interchangeable time signatures individually.
Time signatures Positions of time signatures RELATED LINKS Time signature styles on page 1039 Inputting time signatures with the popover on page 261 Time signatures popover on page 257 Positions of time signatures Standard time signatures are positioned on staves with the middle staff line, or only staff line for single-line staves, passing through their center. Large time signatures can be positioned in the middle or at the top of bracket groups, or above staves at system object positions.
Time signatures Ending interchangeable time signatures ● You can hide/show time signature signposts by choosing View > Signposts > Time Signatures. ● You can assign a key command for Hide/Show Item on the Key Commands page in Preferences, which applies to chord symbols, playing techniques, figured bass, text items, and time signatures.
Time signatures Changing the design of time signatures 5. ● Normal ● Narrow, serif ● Narrow, sans serif ● Plain font Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The design of time signatures in the selected layouts is changed. If you choose Plain font, time signatures use a different font style than the one used for the other options. RELATED LINKS Large time signatures on page 1037 1045 Dorico SE 4.3.
Tremolos Tremolos are thick, slanted lines that cross individual stems or are positioned between multiple stems. They are used to indicate that notes are repeated, either individually or in sequences of multiple notes. Using tremolo strokes instead of notating each notehead can save horizontal space and make fast passages easier to read. The number of tremolo strokes indicates both how many times notes are repeated and how fast they are.
Tremolos General placement conventions for tremolos Four quarter notes without tremolos Multi-note tremolos input between those quarter notes, in two pairs Tuplet tremolos Multiple notes in tuplets are repeated in the notated sequence. Tuplet tremolos are positioned between all the notes in the tuplet. Quarter notes in two different tuplets without tremolos Multi-note tuplet tremolos input across those tuplets Depending on the musical context, tremolos can be either measured or unmeasured.
Tremolos Tremolos in tie chains The positions of the tremolo strokes on the first two notes and the last two notes are the same, although the pitches are all different. In Dorico SE, the angle of single-note tremolo strokes is always the same, no matter the direction of the phrase. The angles of multi-note tremolo strokes are determined by the height of the stems to which the multi-note tremolos apply.
Tremolos Deleting tremolos NOTE Select single-note tremolos and multi-note tremolos separately. 2. Click the button with the number of tremolo strokes you want in the Tremolos section of the Repeat Structures panel. For example, click Two Strokes Single-note Tremolo to input single-note tremolos with two strokes, or click Three Strokes Multi-note Tremolo to input multi-note tremolos with three strokes.
Tremolos Rhythmic positions of notes with tremolos NOTE If tie chains with single-note tremolos contain notes of different durations, the number of tremolo strokes on each note in the tie chain is different. RELATED LINKS Moving notes/items rhythmically on page 416 1050 Dorico SE 4.3.
Tuplets Tuplets indicate where a beat is divided into a different number of subdivisions than is usually expected according to the current meter. They can be used to fit more notes or fewer notes in a beat than usually exist in a beat, according to the usual pattern of subdivision. Because these subdivisions are not standard but tuplet notes use the same rhythmic notation as normal notes, tuplets must be clearly marked to show that their rhythmic duration is different.
Tuplets Nested tuplets Inputting nested tuplets You can input nested tuplets on empty staves and select existing tuplets and input nested tuplets within them. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, start note input. 2. Open the tuplets popover in any of the following ways: ● Press ; . ● In the Notes toolbox, click and hold Tuplets , then click x:y . When inputting tuplets with the keyboard, Dorico SE automatically continues inputting notes as the specified tuplet.
Tuplets Turning existing notes into tuplets RELATED LINKS Tuplets popover on page 229 Notes toolbox on page 172 Inputting notes on page 196 Selecting note/rest durations on page 234 Turning existing notes into tuplets You can turn any existing notes into tuplets; for example, if you need to fit extra notes into an existing duration. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the notes on a single staff that you want to turn into tuplets. 2. Open the tuplets popover in any of the following ways: ● Press ; .
Tuplets Allowing/Disallowing tuplets to span barlines NOTE You must not select any of the noteheads in the tuplets. 2. Optional: If you want the selected tuplets to push subsequent notes to later rhythmic positions if required, press I to activate Insert mode. 3. Optional: If you activated Insert mode, choose the appropriate Insert mode scope. 4. Press Backspace or Delete . RESULT The selected tuplets are deleted.
Tuplets Tuplet beams EXAMPLE A 16th note sextuplet across a barline, notated as two triplets The same sextuplet allowed to span the barline AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can beam notes in the selected tuplets together. RELATED LINKS Barlines on page 620 Beaming notes together manually on page 638 Tuplet brackets on page 1056 Tuplet numbers/ratios on page 1059 Tuplet beams Tuplet beams join notes in tuplets that can be joined with beams just like non-tuplet beams.
Tuplets Tuplet brackets Tuplet brackets Tuplet brackets show the duration of tuplets that are not joined by beams, such as triplet quarter notes, by showing the notes within the tuplet under a bracket.
Tuplets Tuplet brackets RESULT Brackets on the selected tuplets are hidden/shown. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. Signposts are shown at the position of each hidden tuplet; that is, tuplets with no numbers/ratios or brackets shown. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK If you want to hide indications of tuplets entirely, you might also need to hide the tuplet numbers/ratios.
Tuplets Tuplet brackets Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 544 Changing the rhythmic end position of tuplet brackets You can change the rhythmic end position of tuplet brackets relative to individual notes individually. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties.
Tuplets Tuplet numbers/ratios Tuplet numbers/ratios Tuplet numbers and ratios are very similar: both indicate the number of equal notes included in the tuplet, such as 3 for triplets, but tuplet ratios also include the number of normal notes into whose duration the tuplet fits, such as 3:2 for triplets. Additionally, tuplet ratios can include a note glyph that indicates the duration of notes in the tuplet.
Tuplets Tuplet numbers/ratios Signposts are shown at the position of each hidden tuplet; that is, tuplets with no numbers/ratios or brackets shown. Deactivating Number returns the selected tuplets to the default setting. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK If you want to hide indications of tuplets entirely, you might also need to hide the tuplet brackets.
Tuplets Tuplet numbers/ratios RELATED LINKS Tuplet brackets on page 1056 Signposts on page 406 1061 Dorico SE 4.3.
Unpitched percussion The term “unpitched percussion” covers all percussion instruments that are not tuned to specific pitches. This includes instruments such as bass drum, guiro, maracas, cymbals, and shakers. Dorico SE provides comprehensive support for unpitched percussion notation, with flexible options for combining music for multiple instruments into percussion kits that can then be displayed differently in different layouts.
Unpitched percussion Playing techniques for unpitched percussion instruments Changing playing technique-specific noteheads on page 1066 Defining how combinations of articulations and single-note tremolos sound in playback on page 597 Exporting percussion kits on page 1070 Importing percussion kits on page 1070 Input methods for playing techniques, pedal lines, string indicators, and harp pedal diagrams on page 336 Playing technique-specific noteheads Playing technique-specific noteheads use the design and
Unpitched percussion Playing techniques for unpitched percussion instruments 1 Playing technique-specific noteheads list Contains the main playing technique-specific noteheads currently defined for the selected percussion instrument, showing the notehead set and the staff position corresponding to the playing technique as applicable. You can add new playing technique-specific noteheads for unpitched percussion instruments.
Unpitched percussion Playing techniques for unpitched percussion instruments NOTE Overrides for articulations and tremolos are not currently reflected in playback, but this is planned for future versions.
Unpitched percussion Playing techniques for unpitched percussion instruments ● Default Notehead: Displays the notehead used by default for the playing technique in the corresponding row of the table. ● Notehead Override: Displays the notehead override used in five-line staff presentations for the playing technique in the corresponding row of the table. You can change the notehead override by clicking it and selecting another notehead from the menu.
Unpitched percussion Playing techniques for unpitched percussion instruments Changing the notehead design of individual noteheads on page 793 Creating new playing technique-specific noteheads You can define new playing technique-specific noteheads for unpitched percussion instruments, which are saved for that type of percussion instrument in your project. You can also export playing technique-specific noteheads from your project and import them into other projects. PROCEDURE 1.
Unpitched percussion Percussion kits vs. individual percussion instruments Overriding the appearance of playing technique-specific noteheads It might be necessary to override the appearance of playing technique-specific noteheads in order to disambiguate the notes for one instrument from another if they share a staff position in five-line staff kit presentations. PROCEDURE 1.
Unpitched percussion Percussion kits and drum sets NOTE Kit instruments in player cards in the Players panel in Setup mode are colored green, whereas individual percussion instruments not part of percussion kits are colored the same light blue as all other instruments. Percussion kits and drum sets A percussion kit is a collection of unpitched percussion instruments that are played by a single player. Drum sets are a particular type of percussion kit that are often used in pop and rock music.
Unpitched percussion Percussion kits and drum sets Exporting percussion kits You can export percussion kits as .doricolib files. This allows you to use kits again without having to create them from scratch. PROCEDURE 1. In Setup mode, in the Players panel, expand the card of the player whose percussion kit you want to export. 2. In the kit instrument label, click the instrument menu open the Edit Percussion Kit dialog. 3.
Unpitched percussion Notations on notes in percussion kits Moving notes to different instruments in percussion kits You can move notes to different instruments in the same percussion kit after they have been input. NOTE These steps do not apply in layouts using the single-line instruments kit presentation type. In such layouts, you can cross or move notes to other staves. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the notes you want to move to a different instrument in the percussion kit. 2.
Unpitched percussion Notations on notes in percussion kits Tuplets When working in the grid and five-line staff kit presentation types, tuplets are added to all instruments in the same voice. You can switch to the single-line instruments presentation type to input cross-rhythms on each instrument separately. When you switch back to the grid or five-line staff kit presentation types, Dorico SE attempts to resolve the rhythmic conflicts.
Unpitched percussion Percussion kit presentation types single-line instruments presentation type do not appear when you switch to grid/five-line presentations. This is due to the complexity of combining a large number of different dynamics at the same rhythmic position, as allowed in the single-line instruments presentation, into the single position required for both the grid and five-line staff presentations.
Unpitched percussion Percussion kit presentation types Single-line instruments Kit instruments are shown as individual instruments with their own lines. Normal-sized staff labels are shown for each instrument. The editing area in the Edit Percussion Kit dialog lists all of the instruments in the order in which they appear in the score.
Unpitched percussion Percussion legends Percussion legends Percussion legends list the percussion instruments in use when using the five-line presentation type. Percussion legends can include all instruments that are represented on the staff, or only show sounding instruments in a set range to remind players which instruments to play at certain points. Two sounding instrument percussion legends By default, percussion legends appear above the staff.
Unpitched percussion Percussion legends 2. ● An item on the staff at the rhythmic position where you want to add a percussion legend for all instruments. ● The range of notes/items for which you want to show a percussion legend for sounding instruments. Add a percussion legend in one of the following ways: ● Choose Edit > Notations > Percussion > Legend for All Instruments. ● Choose Edit > Notations > Percussion > Legend for Sounding Instruments.
Unpitched percussion Percussion legends Changing the sounding instrument percussion legend range You can change the rhythmic range of sounding instrument percussion legends to include more/ fewer instruments in the legend, as they only show the instruments playing at the rhythmic positions included in the range. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the sounding instrument percussion legend whose range you want to change. 2.
Unpitched percussion Voices in percussion kits RELATED LINKS Staff labels for percussion kits on page 985 Percussion legends on page 1075 Percussion kit presentation types on page 1073 Adding percussion legends to five-line staff kit presentations on page 1075 Editing percussion legend text By default, percussion legends show the instrument names of percussion instruments in five-line staff presentations, stacked vertically. You can change the text shown in percussion legends to show custom text.
Unpitched percussion Voices in percussion kits Defining percussion kits as drum sets on page 139 Adding slash voices to percussion kits on page 955 Specifying the stem direction/voice of instruments in percussion kits You can specify the stem direction for each instrument in individual percussion kits. You can also set which voice they are in, allowing you to control which instruments share voices in percussion kits. PROCEDURE 1.
Unpitched percussion Unpitched percussion in Play mode TIP You can reset the voice of individual notes by selecting them and choosing Edit > Notations > Percussion > Change Voice > Reset Note Destination Voice. You can also choose this option from the context menu. Unpitched percussion in Play mode Unpitched percussion instruments are handled differently in Play mode than pitched instruments.
Voices For many instruments, such as flute or trombone, each staff usually contains a single musical line in a single voice that is read from left to right along the staff. When multiple, independent lines must be shown in a single staff, each line can be a separate voice.
Voices Hiding/Showing voice colors Hiding/Showing voice colors You can show notes in different colors according to their voice; for example, to check which notes are in which voice. When voice colors are hidden, all notes appear black by default. Voice colors are considered annotations and are not printed by default. NOTE You cannot show colors for voices and notes out of range simultaneously. PROCEDURE ● Do one of the following: ● To show voice colors, choose View > Note And Rest Colors > Voice Colors.
Voices Note positions in multiple-voice contexts Note positions in multiple-voice contexts Notes are usually placed directly above each other and at the same horizontal position, so that it is immediately clear which notes are played together. However, the horizontal alignment of notes can be different in multiple-voice contexts. There are circumstances when some notes must be positioned slightly to one side in a different voice column to ensure the division of notes across the voices is clear.
Voices Note positions in multiple-voice contexts Voice column index The voice column index is used to determine the positions of notes when multiple columns are needed; for example, when notes in two voices are a second interval apart and therefore cannot be placed directly above each other vertically, instead they must partially overlap. Dorico SE automatically changes the voice column of voices according to the number of active voices and the pitch of notes.
Voices Unused voices RELATED LINKS Stem direction on page 802 Implicit rests in multiple-voice contexts on page 958 Swapping the contents of voices on page 421 Changing the voice of existing notes on page 420 Changing the property scope on page 559 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 544 Unused voices An unused voice is one that contains no notes anywhere in the project.
Voices Notes crossed to staves with existing notes in other voices Moving notes/items to other staves on page 419 Inputting notes into multiple voices on page 206 Changing the voice of existing notes on page 420 Stem direction on page 802 1086 Dorico SE 4.3.
Glossary A action (expression maps) A control in expression maps that determines how individual switches are controlled in order to trigger the required playback technique or combination of playback techniques. action (harps) The mechanism that raises or lowers the pitch of harp strings, as controlled by the position of each pedal.
Glossary caret Shown during note input, the caret is the vertical line that extends above and below the staff and indicates the rhythmic position at which items are input. Also known as an “insertion point”. In Dorico SE, the caret, cursor, and mouse pointer are related but serve different purposes. See also rhythmic grid, note input, cursor, mouse pointer. casting off The act of fixing the layout of pages of music, such as defining a set number of systems per page or the number of bars per system.
Glossary constant point A change in value in a track or lane in Play mode that sets a fixed value until the next point in the track or lane. See also linear point, value line. context menu A menu that you can access by right-clicking on a mouse or double-tapping on a touchpad. Its options vary by the location of the mouse pointer and what is selected when you access it, but it most commonly contains options also found on the Edit menu.
Glossary ensemble A predefined collection of players, each holding instruments that are often used together, such as string quartet, wind quintet, brass quintet, string ensemble, and double woodwinds. envelope A change in sound over time that comprises multiple stages, such as attack, sustain, and decay. In dynamics lanes in Play mode, envelopes are represented by multiple separate points, each controlling a different parameter of the overall envelope. See also constant point, linear point, value line.
Glossary instrument at the top of the page, such as piccolo, to the lowest string instrument at the bottom of the page, such as contrabass, with brass, keyboards, voices, and percussion in between. G galley view A viewing option that shows music laid out as a single, infinitely wide system.
Glossary system of a flow is not fully justified and is allowed to end partway across the width of the frame. See also frame, justification. I implicit rest A rest that is automatically shown around the notes you input. Its notated duration automatically adjusts according to the time signature and its position in the bar. Implicit rests can be suppressed between notes in a particular voice, which hides them. See also rest, explicit rest, padding rest, multi-bar rest.
Glossary linear point A change in value in a track or lane in Play mode that acts as a point on a curve, setting a value for its position only and allowing for a smooth change in value from that position until the next point in the track or lane. See also constant point, value line. lock duration Functionality that allows you to change the pitches of existing music while retaining existing rhythms. lyric Any text that is intended to be sung or spoken by an individual singer or group of singers.
Glossary music area The main part of the window in Setup mode and Write mode where you input and edit your music. MusicXML A file format designed to allow the interchange and archiving of music notation data in an open and non-proprietary way. It is useful for exchanging scores between different music applications. N node A position along the length of a string that marks an equal division of the string, such as a quarter of the way along a string.
Glossary partial A single pitch or frequency in the harmonic series, which varies in pitch according to the pitch of the fundamental but is always a consistent interval above the fundamental according to its number in the harmonic series. For example, the second partial is an octave above the fundamental, the third partial is an octave and a fifth above the fundamental, and the fourth partial is two octaves above the fundamental.
Glossary Play mode A mode in Dorico where you can change how your music sounds in playback, including by changing the playback template and assigning VST instruments, inputting automation, adjusting the mix, and changing the sounding duration of notes in playback without affecting their notated duration. See also modes. playthrough A single time playing from the beginning of the piece to the end.
Glossary reducing The process of taking music for more than one instrument and assigning it to fewer instruments, such as a keyboard reduction of a choral piece. A piece of music that has been reduced is known as a “reduction”. See also exploding, condensing, divisi. rest A marking with a rhythmic value that indicates no note is played for that duration. Also known as a “silence” or “pause”, but in this documentation, we refer to them as “rests”.
Glossary and B. The same pitch is normally spelled a certain way in a given key; for example, MIDI note 61 is normally spelled as C♯ in D major, but is spelled as D♭ in A♭ major. See also EDO, MIDI. split stem A way of presenting altered unisons that keeps each accidental directly beside the notehead to which it applies. Also known as a “cherry stalk” or “tree”. staff-relative placement The vertical position of items relative to musical staves; that is, either above or below.
Glossary transport Encompasses all options related to playback and recording. transposed pitch In transposed pitch, the pitches notated are the pitches that the instrument plays, rather than the desired sounding pitch. Instrumental parts are always in transposed pitch so that players can simply play the written notes, which is especially important for transposing instruments. See also concert pitch, instrument transposition. tuplet A rhythm that is performed at a fraction of its normal written duration.
Glossary W Write mode A mode in Dorico where you can input and edit your music, including changing the rhythmic positions of items, changing the pitch of notes, and deleting notes and items. See also modes. 1100 Dorico SE 4.3.
Index A abbreviated dates 553 dynamics 694, 704 instrument names 157, 159, 160, 980 staff labels 135, 978, 980 tempo text 1005 absolute channel change actions 587 absolute tempo changes 1001 components 1002 Academico font 573 accelerando. See gradual tempo changes. See also tempo marks accents. See articulations acciaccaturas. See grace notes accidental duration rules 609 common practice 609 accidental spelling 219 changing 426, 427, 429 resetting 429 accidentals 604 altered unisons.
Index advancing caret 195 chord symbols popover 297 figured bass popover 366 hairpins 395 lyrics popover 361 slurs 395 aeolian chord symbols 295, 668 aggregate time signatures 257, 1033 dashed barlines 257, 1033 inputting 257, 259, 261, 262 aikin noteheads 792, 793 air sounds. See playing techniques.
Index arpeggio signs (continued) grace notes 834 handles 834 inputting 309, 312, 317, 318 length 317, 318, 834 moving 416, 419 muting in playback 459 panel 314, 318 playback 835 popover 312, 317 position 834 spacing 834 swash 831 ties 222 types 312, 832 voices 317, 318 arrangements accidentals in key signatures 764 chord symbols 670 flows 147 movements 147 arranger 69 adding 69 tokens 552 arranging 411, 413 changing instruments 121 condensing.
Index augmented 232 accidentals 609 chord symbols 293, 662 intervals 232, 311, 424, 609, 823, 824 trills 311, 823, 824 author name 430 changing 435 auto-save 88, 89 date and time 89 deleting projects 88 disabling 90 interval 90 recovering projects 89 AutoPan 565, 569 auxiliary notes 826 notehead design 793 position 827 showing 826 B backgrounds 49 colors 49, 50 erasing 745 gradients 50 pages 49 backups 90 auto-save.
Index bar rests (continued) showing 962 slashes 958 voices 958 barbershop quartet. See project templates barline joins 623, 624, 657 default 624 barline-attached lines. See lines barlines 620 across staves 623, 624 bar numbers 629 caesuras 309 changing 280, 281, 620, 622 chord symbols 665 copying 148 counts. See repeat counts custom joins. See barline joins dashed 620, 622 deleting 411, 624 double 620, 622 dynamics 697, 698 end barlines 622 fermatas 762 final.
Index beam groups (continued) selecting 386 stem directions 804 time signatures 637 beam lines direction 650 number 650 beam slants 642 changing 643 grace notes 756 beaming 637, 638, 652 angles 642, 643, 652 centered beams 643, 644 corners 649 cross-staff. See cross-staff beams direction 641–643, 650 fanned 652 grace notes 756 grouping 637, 638, 653. See also beat groups half-bar 653 inverting 641 large pitch ranges 756 lyrics 639 meter 653 multiple staves.
Index bracketed noteheads (continued) inputting 798 percussion 798 playback 798 showing 798 splitting 801 tablature 797, 798, 842, 847 tie chains 799 ties on tablature 799, 1022 trills 826 vibrato bar dives and returns 847 brackets 655 accidentals 605, 810 arpeggio signs 831 bar numbers 636 bar repeats 935, 937, 941, 942 barlines 623, 624 chord symbols.
Index capos 127 adding 128, 129 chord symbols 127, 131–133, 135 defining 128–132, 134 deleting 130, 132 hiding 132, 133, 135 italics 127 notation staves 130, 131 partial 128, 129 tablature 127–130 caps 888, 896 arrows 905 changing 905 continuation 896 lines 896 cards disclosure arrows 40 flows 103 layouts 100 players 93 timecodes 103 caret 190 activating 172, 194 advancing 195 chords 190, 225 color 51 deactivating 172, 194 extending 194, 209 grace notes 190, 224 inputting vs.
Index chord diagrams (continued) dots 683, 684 editing 683 fingerings 676, 680, 681, 683, 684 formatting 683, 684 fret numbers 680, 681, 683, 684 gaps 679 grid 679, 680 hiding 676, 678, 679 inputting 676, 678 nut 676 omitted strings 676, 684 open strings 676, 684 resetting 681, 684 rows 679–681 shapes 682–684 showing 676, 678, 679 size 679 symbols.
Index chords (continued) selecting 386 stem directions 803. See also voices tablature 199, 216 ties 222, 1026 track. See chords track vibrato bar dives and returns 847 voices 206, 1081 chords track 449 hiding 451 showing 451 Chorus 565, 569 chorus lyrics 769 changing lines to 784 changing lyrics to 770 popover 360 chromatic glissando 837 playback 840 circle bar number enclosures 626 hairpins.
Index colors (continued) rests 959 rhythmic grid 51 slash regions 945, 946 tablature 51, 795, 996, 998 text 356 voices 51, 1081, 1082 windows 49 columns accidentals 606 figured bass 719 lines 898 markers 369 missing fonts 68 videos 369 voices 1083, 1084 combinations part layouts 152 playback techniques 585, 589, 597 tremolos 597 combined dynamics. See dynamics combining. See consolidation comma breath marks.
Index continuation lines (continued) playing techniques 888, 890–892 slurs across breaks 967 tempo marks 1010, 1011 continuation signs 882 lines 896 parentheses 881 text 883 continuous bar counts 936, 942 beams across staves 645 controller 587 rehearsal marks 912 view 38, 47 contrabass. See instruments contracting. See expanding contrapuntal.
Index cross-staff arpeggio signs 317, 318 beams 645, 647, 649 lines 352, 353 resetting 649 slurs 247, 395, 416, 419, 972 spacing 647 stems 645, 649 ties 222, 1029 tremolos 645, 649 cross-voice arpeggio signs 317, 318 lines 352, 353 slurs 247, 395, 416, 419, 972 ties 222, 1029 crotchets. See quarter notes crushed notes.
Index dashed lines attachment 416 lines 352, 894 octave lines 690 tempo marks 1010, 1011 data expression maps 575 library 571 date and time annotations 504 auto-saved projects 89 comments 430 exporting 492 printing 488 tokens 553 deactivating caret 194 chord input 225 Insert mode 211 mouse input 204 muted tracks 459, 561, 562 note input 196, 199 player sorting 109 soloed tracks 459, 561, 562 dead notes 856 decimal places metronome marks 272, 273, 1007 decorations. See ornaments decrescendo.
Index deleting (continued) retakes 875 rhythmic feel change 465 scoops 858 staff labels 978 staves 512, 513 stem direction changes 806 stop positions 410 string indicators 746 strings 123 system breaks 535 system indents 994 tapping 858 ties 653, 1030, 1031 time 407, 408, 615–617 titles 518 tremolos 1049 trill intervals 825 tuplets 1053 videos 169 voices 1085 demo projects 63 denominators styles 1039, 1041 time signatures 1032 dense chords accidental stacking 607 depressed keys 182 depth audio 568 nested s
Index distance (continued) chord diagrams 679 fermatas 760 noteheads 647 staff labels 979 staves. See staff spacing stems 647 system indents 979, 994 Distortion 565, 569 distribution bars per system 532 beats in bars 653 dynamics 706 staves per frame 510 systems per frame 533 dives 842, 847, 852 inputting 324, 325, 327, 328 popover 312 pre-dives. See guitar pre-bends vibrato bar. See vibrato bar. See also guitar bends dividers. See system dividers dividing.
Index duplets. See tuplets duplex printing 488, 499 booklets 498 duplicating copying.
Index dynamics (continued) swells.
Index endpoint positions (continued) repeat endings 925 slurs 613, 965–967 staff lines 966 trills 817 tuplet brackets 1058 Endpoint Setup dialog 476 endpoints 475 changing 480, 481 configurations 478 custom 479, 480 deleting 480 expression maps 476, 481 glissando lines 837 instruments 480 moving 395, 416 percussion maps 476, 481 plug-ins 468 renaming 480 saving 479 setup 476 voices 480 Engrave mode 544 panels 557 engraving options exporting 72 project templates 72 engraving tools. See properties.
Index exporting (continued) FLAC files 85, 86 flows 74, 75, 490, 491 fretted instrument tunings 126 key commands 54 layouts 492 lyrics 774 MIDI 81 monochrome graphics 503 MP3 files 85, 86 MusicXML files 78, 926 note colors 504 options 485 output format 492 page ranges 490, 491, 497 path 494 PDF 492, 493 percussion kits 1070 percussion maps 597 playback templates 475 players 74 PNG 492, 493 repeats 460 signposts 504 stems 85, 86 SVG 492, 493 tempo tracks 84 TIFF 492, 493 time 504 voice colors 504 watermarks
Index figured bass (continued) input options 729 inputting 362, 363, 366 instruments 362 inverting 726 length 395, 722, 724, 727 local 362, 719 moving 416, 722, 724, 727 navigation during input 366 octaves 728 parentheses 363, 722, 725 pitches 422 placement 726 players 362, 720 popover 363 position 726 resetting 729 resolutions 362, 363, 723, 727 rests 362, 719, 721, 728 rows 726 showing 362, 720 signposts 362, 406, 719, 720, 728 simplifying 728 slashes 363 staff-relative placement 726 staves 362 suspensio
Index fingering (continued) strings 794 substitution 732, 733 tapping. See tapping thumb letter 680, 681, 684 types 250, 742 valved brass instruments 742 fingering slides 740 deleting 741 handles 740 hiding 741 showing 741 finials. See caret. See also annotations first and second endings. See repeat endings first pages formatting 517 page numbers 864 page templates 517, 546 first steps starting new projects 65 first systems indents 994 fit to paper 501.
Index flows (continued) tokens 552 transposing 423, 424 trimming 275, 280, 281, 617 videos 103, 165, 167 voices 480 Flows panel 92, 103 flute. See instruments flutter-tongue. See playing techniques flz.
Index frames (continued) margins 521, 523 moving 521, 522 padding 505, 523 running headers 518 staves 510, 519 systems 510, 519, 533 tokens 549 frequency auto-save 90 bar numbers 625, 942 bar repeat counts 936 harmonics 807 numbered bar region counts 942 slash region counts 952 timecodes 921 trills 819 Fretboard panel 184 frets 123, 996 adding 123, 216, 684 brackets. See bracketed noteheads capos. See capos changing 998 chord diagrams.
Index gaps (continued) system indents 979, 994 systems 510, 927 tacets 540 text 909 time signatures 1043 Gate 565, 569 General MIDI 574, 587 generated trills 828, 829 generating harp pedaling 348 ghost notes 797, 798 guitar. See dead notes. See also bracketed noteheads gli altri. See divisi glissando lines 837, 859, 894 accidentals 837 angles 837 changing 397 deleting 411 direction 794 endpoints 837 filter 392 formatting 838 guitar bends.
Index gradual dynamics (continued) spacing 709 syllables 706 tempo marks 1004 ties 286, 289, 416 truncated 709 ungrouping 715 unlinking 717 gradual tempo changes 828, 1001, 1010 components 1002 continuation lines 1010, 1011 drawing 447 editing 447 final tempo 1009 formatting 1011 hyphens 1011 inputting 267, 270, 272, 273 length 395 lines 1010, 1011 Play mode 447 popover 267 style 1011 syllables 1011 tempo track 447 text 1004 grand staff instruments barlines 623, 624 braces 655 brackets 657 centered beams 6
Index guitar bends (continued) intervals. See bend intervals microtonal 325, 845, 848 parentheses 842 playback 842 popover 312, 323, 324 post-bends 325, 845 pre-bends 844 releases 842 runs 842 tablature 997 guitar post-bends 845 bend intervals 848 chords 845 deleting 851 inputting 325 microtonal 325, 845 guitar pre-bends 844 accidentals 850 bend intervals 848 deleting 851 direction 849 inputting 324 guitar pre-dives.
Index harmonics (continued) styles 811, 814 tablature 808, 811 harp pedal diagrams 866, 867 placement 870 position 870 showing 867 harp pedaling 866 appearance 866, 867 borders 869 calculating 348 diagrams. See harp pedal diagrams filter 392 glissando lines 840, 866 hiding 868, 869 inputting 339, 347, 348 moving 416, 419 note names 867 notes out of range 795 partial 871 playback 866 popover 339 showing 868 signposts 406, 866, 868, 869 headers flows 547 tracks 438, 439, 446–449 heavy swing.
Index hiding (continued) parentheses 605, 671, 672, 699, 722, 725, 798 partial harp pedaling 871 pedal lines 879–881 percussion legend signposts 1075 player group labels 984 players 148, 152 playhead 453 playing techniques 887, 890 quality in chord symbols 669 rectangles 626 repeat counts 931 repeat markers 929 rest colors 959 rests 958, 960, 962, 963 root in chord symbols 669 running headers 518 segno 929 separators 700 signposts 401, 406, 535, 537 slash region counts 952 staff labels 978 staves 104, 148,
Index horns (continued) key signatures 95, 121 transposition 95, 118, 121 hotkeys. See key commands hours 30, 465, 919 HTML files comments 435 Hub 63 opening projects 66, 67 starting projects 65 video tutorials 63 hymnals lyrics 530 note spacing 530 hyphens dynamics 283, 700 lyrics 359, 361, 771, 783 staff labels 982 tempo marks 1011 time signatures 1039, 1042 I illustrations exporting 492, 493 images exporting 492, 493 resolution 492, 493, 502 videos 165 immediate dynamics.
Index inputting (continued) dynamic modifiers 283, 285, 286, 289, 703 dynamics 283, 285, 286, 289, 703 elision slurs 359, 361 ensembles 97, 112, 113 expression maps 588–590 fermatas 305, 307, 308 figured bass 362, 363, 366 figured bass hold lines 362, 363, 395, 722–724 fingerings 248 flows 73, 147–149, 430 frame breaks 536 glissando lines 309, 312, 318, 319, 838 grace notes 80, 224, 753 gradual dynamics 283, 285, 286, 289 gradual tempo changes 267, 270, 272, 273 guitar bend hold lines 849 guitar bends 312,
Index inputting (continued) vibrato bar lines 332, 333, 395 vibrato bar scoops 329, 330 videos 167 voices 206, 208 VST instruments 444, 468, 469, 473 Insert Bar Number Change dialog 632 Insert mode 172, 186, 407 activating 172, 211 caret 190, 211 deactivating 211 inputting notes 211 scope 408, 409 stop positions 407, 409, 410 time signatures 261–263, 265, 408, 1032 tuplets 411 Insert Music Text dialog 357 inserting. See inputting.
Index instruments (continued) moving between players 122 muting 458, 459, 561 names. See instrument names non-sustaining 709 numbering 114 order 109, 110, 122, 141, 143 panning 568 part layouts.
Index jazz articulations (continued) panel 314, 321 playback 598, 599, 859 popover 311, 320 position 861 smooth 859 types 311, 859, 861 jazz ornaments 859, 860 inputting 311, 315, 316 popover 311 types 311 jeté.
Index L l.v. ties. See laissez vibrer ties labels brackets 984 instrument changes 116, 117 instruments 160, 977 markers 915 percussion kits 985, 1073 player groups 984 staves. See staff labels laissez vibrer ties 885, 1022, 1029 width 1029 landscape orientation 500, 501, 507 languages application 48 ensembles 97 instruments 95, 97, 117, 159, 160, 162 key commands 25, 56, 58 large noteheads 792 selections 388 time signatures. See large time signatures large time signatures 1037, 1039 bar numbers 632 largo.
Index layouts (continued) page numbers 863 page ranges 490, 491, 497 page size 500, 507 page template sets 508, 545 page templates.
Index letters rehearsal marks 913 levels channels 561, 562, 567 dynamics. See dynamic levels nested tuplets 1051 pedal lines 874. See also pedal level changes libraries 571 fretted instrument tunings 126 percussion 592 project templates 72 sound 439, 442, 456, 468, 574, 575, 592 libretto exporting 774 librettist 69, 552 lifts jazz articulations. See jazz articulations pedal lines. See pedal retakes ligado. See hammer-ons light swing.
Index loading MIDI instruments 444 playback templates 473 sounds 444, 473 video files 167 VST instruments 444 local chord symbols 290, 661 figured bass 362, 719 properties 544, 557–559 locations backups folder 91 lock duration. See lock to duration lock to duration 172, 425 loco. See octave lines locrian chord symbols 295, 668 lower case flow titles 552 Roman numerals 552 lower notes trills 829 lower zone 28, 35, 181 hiding 36 showing 36 lute. See fretted instruments lv ties.
Index markers (continued) hiding 915, 929 important 370, 918 importing 83 inputting 368, 448 moving 416, 917 panel 369 repeats 372, 373, 927 showing 915, 929 signposts. See signposts staff 916 staff spacing 510, 527 text 83, 368, 369, 917 timecodes 368, 917 track 448, 451 vertical position 510, 527, 916 marks rehearsal. See rehearsal marks tempo. See tempo marks trills 815, 816, 818, 827 marquee tool 37 using 388 martelé. See articulations masking. See hiding master output volume 561–564, 567 master pages.
Index MIDI (continued) navigation 58 note input 195, 209, 219 note range 113 opening 66 order 580 overlapping notes 235 pan 562, 563, 568 percussion maps 481, 592, 595 playback 446, 475, 592 ports 439, 476 quantization 80 range 113 recording.
Index modes (continued) jump bar 59, 61 Play 437 Print 483 Setup 92 tempo 455 Write 171 modifier keys key commands 56 searching 56 modifiers. See dynamic modifiers modulation wheel dynamics 717 molto centered 704 dynamics 283, 285, 702, 704 marcato. See articulations tempo marks 267, 270 monochrome graphics 503 MonoDelay 565, 569 monophony. See polyphony MonoToStereo 565, 569 moon noteheads 792, 793 mordents. See ornaments morendo. See gradual tempo changes.
Index multi-bar rests (continued) showing 963 signposts 406 single bars 963 tacets 538, 539 multi-note tremolos. See tremolos multi-pasting 414, 415 multi-rests. See multi-bar rests multi-staff instruments 989 cross-staff beams 645, 647, 649 hiding staves 512–514, 527 slurs 247 multiple bar numbers per system 629 bounce roll.
Index naturals hiding 605, 810 inputting 218 parentheses 605, 810 showing 605, 810 navigation 59, 401, 402 bars 404 caret 195 chord symbols popover 297 figured bass popover 366 fingerings popover 248 flows 403 items 402 jump bar 59–61 layouts 40, 44 lyrics popover 361 mixer 566 music area 402 note input 196, 199, 216 notes 402 pages 403, 404 part layouts 40, 44, 439 print preview area 34, 483 rehearsal marks 404 rhythmic grid 189 strings 123 Write mode 402 nested slurs 967, 972, 973 tuplets 1051, 1052 new
Index note input (continued) Insert mode 190 Keyboard panel 182 lock to duration 425 MIDI 239–242 mouse input 204 multiple staves 194, 209 muting notes 393 percussion 212, 214, 216 piano keyboard 182 pitch 202 playing notes back 393 register selection 199 repitching notes 425 rests 957 retrospective recording 241 rhythmic grid 189 starting 194 stem direction 216 strings 184 tablature 199, 216 ties 222 tuplets 228 voices 206 note names chord symbols 293–295 harp pedaling 866, 867, 871 noteheads 792 note spa
Index notes (continued) durations 176, 234, 235, 237 dynamics 283, 694. See also dynamics lanes dynamics alignment 696, 697 editing 172, 557 editorial. See bracketed noteheads. See also comments enharmonic spelling 426, 427, 429 filters 392 fixing duration 237 fonts 573 ghost notes 798 glissando lines. See glissando lines grace notes 224, 751, 753 grouping 637, 653 guitar bends 323, 324, 842 guitar post-bends 325, 845 guitar pre-bends 324, 844 harmonics.
Index numbers backups 90 bar repeats 935, 936 bars. See bar numbers bars per system 532 beam lines 650 chord diagrams 680, 681, 683, 684 condensing 986 figured bass. See figured bass flows. See flow numbers frets. See frets.
Index options (continued) toolbar 28 transport 28, 30 workspaces 28, 29 zoom 36, 39, 405 orchestral cues. See cues order 109, 122, 143, 155, 984 panning 568 shorthand 97 staff grouping 657, 984 templates 65, 72, 97 orchestrating.
Index page formatting (continued) empty staves 512, 514 fixing 532, 533, 541, 542, 544 flow headings 505, 547 formatting 545 left pages 516 multiple flows 516 page size 507 page templates 508, 544–546 staff size 524 staff spacing 510, 526 staves 513, 514 systems 510, 533 tacets 539 text 573 titles 544, 547 page margins 505, 521 changing 508, 523 hiding 401 page numbers 546, 863 count 553 flow headings 518, 864 flows 552 hiding 518, 864 initial 516, 864 numeral style 863 page templates 546 showing 518 token
Index panels (continued) playing techniques 339, 342, 345 Print mode 483 print options 485 properties 557 repeat endings 375 repeat markers 375 rhythm slashes 375 Setup mode 92 showing 29, 40, 41, 181 tempo 270, 273 time signatures 259, 262, 265 tonality systems 256 tremolos 375, 382 VST instruments.
Index PDF files (continued) layout numbers 155 layouts 492, 493 page size 492 project preview 69 peaking 567 pedal level changes 874 removing 875 pedal lines 866, 873 alignment 875 appearance 878, 879, 881–884 brackets 881, 882 changing 397 continuation lines 873, 878, 881 dashed 881 deleting 411 duration 884 end signs 880, 881 filter 392 formatting 879–881 grace notes 876 harp pedaling. See harp pedaling hiding 879–881 hooks 878, 880 inputting 336, 338, 343, 345 length 395, 875, 878 levels.
Index percussion legends (continued) instrument names 1077 layouts 1075 length 1077 position 1075 ranges 1075, 1077 signposts 406, 1075 sounding instruments 1077 staff-relative placement 399 text 1078 types 1075, 1076 percussion maps 592 creating 595 custom 595 dialog 592 endpoints 475, 481 exporting 597 file format 597 filters 592 importing 597 linking 481 note input 214 playback techniques 592 resetting 592 Percussion Maps dialog 592 percussion stickings 1072 perfect intervals 232, 423–425 performance in
Index placement (continued) lines 898–900 lyrics 775 ornaments 816 pauses 759 pedal lines 875 playing techniques 399, 887 rehearsal marks 911 rests 956 slurs 964, 966, 970 tempo marks 1004 ties 1026 tremolos 1047 voices 1083 plain font 1014 playing techniques 885 string indicators 745 time signatures 1044 Play mode 18, 437 channels. See channels. See also tracks Endpoint Setup dialog 476 exporting expression maps 591 expression maps 574, 585 loading sounds 444, 456 MIDI instruments 439, 443, 444 mixer.
Index playback techniques 475, 589, 598, 599, 610, 885 attribute 599 combinations 585, 589 creating 599 deleting 590, 599 direction 599 editing 599 endpoints 475 expression maps 574, 575 fallback 599 mutual exclusion groups 590 percussion 597 percussion maps 592 playback templates 468 resetting 599 playback templates 468, 469 changing 473 creating 473 custom 468, 470, 473 dialog 469, 470 endpoint configurations 442, 476, 478 exporting 475 factory default 469 fallback 470 file format 468 importing 474 overr
Index playhead 452 color 51 fast-forwarding 452 hiding 453 moving 404, 452 playback 454, 465 position 454 repeats 460 rewinding 452 showing 453 transport 465, 467 zooming 451 playing technique lines 888, 891 appearance 890 changing 892 default settings 888 duration 395, 889, 890 hiding 890 showing 890, 892 playing technique-specific noteheads 751, 885, 1062, 1063, 1065 appearance 1068 articulations 597 changing 1066 creating 1067 inputting 212 playback 597 playing techniques 885 adding text 886 changing 39
Index polychord chord symbols 295, 661 arrangement 670 inputting 290 polymeter 261, 262, 1032 polyphony 1081 adding voices 206 changing voices 420 condensing. See condensing MIDI recording 239, 240 polytonality 254, 256, 763 popovers 21, 177 add intervals. See note tools popover arpeggio signs 312, 317 bar repeats 374, 384 barlines 275–277, 280, 281 bars 275, 277 beats 275 changing items 397 chord symbols 292, 297 clefs 299, 301 commands. See jump bar dynamics 283, 286 ensembles.
Index presets background color 50 effects 587 staff size 524 zoom 39 pressure. See playing techniques. See also lines presto.
Index propagating part formatting 541 properties 544 properties 557 copying to other layouts 544 global 558, 559 local 558, 559 notations 557 notes 557 scope 557–559 searching 557 selected items 557 values 559 videos 166 Properties panel 557 disclosure arrow 36 Write mode 171 pulgar. See thumbs pull-offs. See hammer-ons punctuation duration 552 timecodes 919 question marks harmonics 808 tablature 422, 996 quintet templates 65, 72 staff grouping 657 quintuplets.
Index rectangle (continued) music. See music frames. See also frames noteheads 792 text enclosures 1019, 1020 redo 28 reducing 150, 420, 524 condensing. See condensing note durations 235, 237 reeds 150 adding 95, 97, 107, 119 instrument changes 116 part names 157, 158 staff labels 980 transposition 118 regions bar repeats. See bar repeats bars. See numbered bar regions chord symbols. See chord symbol regions counts 935, 941, 951 Play mode. See colored regions slashes 945, 950.
Index repeat endings (continued) types 372 vertical positions 992 repeat jumps. See repeat markers repeat markers 927 bar numbers 636 barlines 622 changing 397 deleting 411 exporting 460 filter 392 hiding 929 index 928 inputting 373, 375, 379, 380 MIDI recording 242 moving 416 multiple 928 multiple positions 930, 992, 993 number of times played 461 optional notes.
Index rests (continued) explicit 956, 957, 959 figured bass 362, 719, 721, 728 filling in 235 forcing duration 237 grouping. See note grouping H-bars. See multi-bar rests hiding 949, 960, 962, 963 implicit 956, 957, 959 inputting 172, 182, 196, 220, 221, 237 moving 530, 960. See also note spacing multi-bar rests. See multi-bar rests padding 949 placement 956 position 956 restoring 960 showing 960, 962, 963 spacing. See note spacing voices 956, 958, 960 retakes. See pedal retakes retrieving. See recovering.
Index rim shots. See playing techniques. See also playing technique-specific noteheads rinforzando. See dynamics rips. See jazz articulations. See also glissando lines ritardando. See gradual tempo changes. See also tempo marks ritenuto. See gradual tempo changes. See also tempo marks rolled chords. See arpeggio signs rolls. See tremolos.
Index scope Insert mode 408, 409 jump bar 59 properties 558, 559 scordatura 123, 125 scores. See layouts scrapes. See playing techniques scroll view.
Index setting up audio devices 52, 242, 244 drum sets 135 duplex printing 488 key commands 57 MIDI recording 242 percussion kit note input 214 percussion kits 135 windows 40 workspaces 40 settings 571 audio 52 copying properties 544 default 52, 571 harp pedals 866 individual items. See properties layout-specific 571 mouse input 187, 188 note input 199, 202, 203 preferences 52 properties 557–559 videos 166 Setup mode 18, 92 adding players 112 ensembles 111 flows. See flows instruments.
Index single players (continued) staff size 525 staves 513, 514 single-line percussion kits 1073, 1074 staves 988 single-note tremolos. See tremolos single-sided printing 488 single-stroke caesuras 306, 759 single-voice contexts 1081 articulations 611 grace notes 752 guitar pre-bends 849 stem direction 752, 802 tie curvature direction 1026 six-line staff tablature.
Index slashes (continued) figured bass 363 grace notes 751, 752, 755, 756 noteheads 789, 792, 945, 953, 1063 notes. See slash voices. See also tremolo strokes pauses. See caesuras percussion 1063 regions. See slash regions rests 958 stemless 954 stems. See tremolo strokes systems. See system dividers time signatures 1039, 1042 tremolos. See tremolo strokes triple 1046 voices. See slash voices slides fingerings. See fingering slides jazz. See jazz articulations pitch. See glissando lines.
Index sound libraries (continued) loading sounds 444, 468, 473 missing sounds 473 percussion maps 595 playback 574, 592 trills 828 sounding duration 756. See also played duration percussion legend ranges 1075, 1077 pitch. See sounding pitch. See also concert pitch sounding pitch 154, 807 harmonics 811 input pitch 202 layouts 154 sounds.
Index staff labels (continued) galley view 38 grouping 139, 140, 984–986 hiding 978 indents 979, 994 instrument change labels 983 instrument names 139, 140, 157, 159, 160, 162, 551, 978, 980 italics 160 length 978, 980 line breaks 982 MusicXML import 978 numbering 114, 980, 986 parentheses 982 percussion 135, 139, 140, 980, 985, 1073, 1077 player groups.
Index start signs lines 896 pedal lines 878, 879, 882 starting 194 area 32 Hub 63 interchangeable time signatures 257, 261, 262, 1033, 1044 MIDI recording 240 note input 194, 196, 199 playback 454 players 32 projects 32, 65 timecode values 920 workspaces 40 status bar 36 selection tools 37 view types 38 status display 36 staves 13, 988 adding 107, 112, 119, 989, 995 arranging tools 411 bar numbers 628, 629 bar rests.
Index stem direction (continued) grace notes 752, 756 guitar pre-bends 849 middle line 802 multiple-voice contexts 803 notes crossed to other staves 645, 649, 1085 notes on middle line of staff 802 percussion kits 135, 139, 216, 1078, 1079 resetting 642, 806 rhythm slashes 805, 947 single-voice contexts 802, 805 slurs 967, 970 staff-relative placement 641 ties 804 voices 420, 802, 805, 1081 stemless rhythm slashes 190, 208, 954 stemlets 652 gaps 652 length 652 stems 637, 802 altered unisons 607 articulatio
Index strings (continued) color 51 deleting 123 fingering 737, 794. See also string indicators fretted instruments 95, 123 hammer-ons. See hammer-ons harmonics 807 indicators. See string indicators notes out of range 795, 998 numbers. See string indicators pitches 123, 794 pull-offs. See hammer-ons ranges 123 resetting 998 slurs. See hammer-ons tapping.
Index syllables (continued) lyrics 771, 775, 776 position 775 tempo marks 1011 types 771 symbols bar repeats 933, 938 bar rests 960 caret 190 chords. See chord symbols. See also chord diagrams coda 929 ornaments 815 pedal lines 874, 878, 881, 882 playing techniques 885 repeats. See repeat markers. See also repeat barlines segno 929 speech bubbles. See comments text 354, 357 vibrato bar 852 symphony.
Index systems (continued) indents 519, 978, 979, 989, 994 lyrics 776, 783, 785 margins 519, 978, 979, 994 moving 534, 536 numbered bar regions 941 rehearsal marks 911 repeat barlines 622 sections 927 selecting 387, 388 spacing. See system spacing splitting 927 staff labels 978, 986, 994 text. See system-attached text timecodes 920, 921 tonality 768 track. See system track trill marks 818 vertical position.
Index templates (continued) projects. See project templates staff grouping 657 staves 72, 97, 113, 657 titles 547 tempo 1000 bpm 1006 default 411, 1000 drawing 447 editing 447 equations. See tempo equations finding 370, 918 fixed tempo 455, 465 follow tempo 455, 465 marks. See tempo marks metronome marks 1006 MIDI recording 455 muting in playback 459 Play mode 447 range 1008 recording 455 tracks. See tempo tracks tempo changes.
Index text (continued) rehearsal marks 911 repeat markers 929 resetting 1018 restorative 882, 884 showing 1021 signposts 406, 1021 staff labels. See staff labels. See also player group labels staff-relative placement 399 system-attached text 354, 992 tacet. See tacets. See also multi-bar rests tacets 539 tempo marks 397, 1000, 1002, 1004–1006, 1010 timecodes 917 tokens. See tokens types 1014 vertical.
Index time deleting 407, 408, 615–617 display 465, 467 inserting 211, 277–279, 407, 408 latency 239, 242, 243 markers 915 rhythmic position 22 signatures. See time signatures tokens 553. See also date and time track. See tempo track transport window 465, 467 videos 167 time and date. See date and time time bars.
Index tokens (continued) project information 69, 163, 552 Roman numerals 552 running headers 546 SMuFL 551 staff labels 551 time 553 titles 163 tom-tom. See unpitched percussion tonality systems 768 octave divisions 768 panel 256 ToneBooster 565, 569 tones intervals. See whole steps. See also pitch microtones. See microtones. See also quarter tones tongue clicks.
Index transposing instruments (continued) key signatures 154, 763, 765, 767 layout names 158 layouts 154 staff labels 977, 981, 982 transposed pitch 154 tre corde. See una corda pedal. See also pedal lines treble clef. See clefs trees. See split stems tremblements. See ornaments tremolo arm.
Index tuning (continued) fretted instruments 95, 123, 127 guitar 95, 123, 127 importing 126 open pitches 125 strings 125 systems. See tonality systems tuplet brackets 1056 angle 1056 end position 1058 handles 1056 hiding 1056 hooks 1056 horizontal 1058 length 1056 showing 1056 tuplet numbers 1051, 1059 appearance 1059 hiding 1059 horizontal position 1060 tuplet ratios.
Index underlines lyrics 781 text 356 undo 28 ungrouping dynamics 715 playing techniques 892 unisons 995 altered. See altered unisons stems 206 voices 206, 1084 units beats 166, 270, 370, 397, 1006, 1007 measurement 48 metronome marks 397, 1007 quantization 80 rhythmic grid 189 swing playback 462 system track 389 tempo 270, 370 time 166, 465 tuplets 229 video 166 Universal Indian Drum Notation 1080 unlinking 715 dynamics 717 slurs 976 unmeasured tremolos.
Index vertical alignment dynamics 714, 715, 717 lines 891 playing techniques 891 vertical justification staves 510, 527 systems 510, 527 vertical lines. See lines.
Index view options (continued) notes out of range 51, 795 numbered bar regions 935 page arrangements 36, 39, 47 page color 49 page view 38, 47 panels 35, 41 percussion legends 1075 playhead 453, 467 print preview 401, 483 printing 504 recent projects 63 rests 959 signposts 406 slash regions 946 system break signposts 535 system track 391 tabs 31, 40, 42, 44 time signature signposts 1043 timecode 467 tracks 451 transport 467 types 38 video window 168 voices 1081, 1082 windows 46 zoom 39, 405, 451 VintageCom
Index VST Bass Amp 565, 569 VST instruments 439, 442 allowing 456 blocking 456 chord symbols 450 editing 442 endpoints 475, 478 expression maps 575 instances 442 loading 444, 456 names 476 numbering 442 panel 442 percussion maps 481 playback 468, 469, 475, 574, 592 ports 439, 476 VSTDynamics 565, 569 W w/ bar.
Index windows (continued) VST instruments 439, 442 workspaces 40 wizard. See hub wood blocks 1062, 1068, 1069 adding 107, 119 woodwind instruments 113 adding 95, 97, 107, 112, 119 brackets 657, 984 chord symbols 662 groups 143 player order 93, 109 playing techniques 339 transposition 95, 118 word spacing 356 lyrics 781, 782 words. See lyrics. See also text workflow comments 430 worksheets extracts.
